Preamble: C-18 - Curriculum For Diploma Programmes in Telangana

C-18 - CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA
I. PREAMBLE
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana under the aegis of the
Department of Technical Education, Telangana regularly reviews the Curricula in tune with the
developments both in academic and industry side. However, recognizing the changing needs as
stated by the catchment industries, the Board has decided to bring about the revision of curriculum.
Thus, the Board, with the assistance of senior faculty of the branches concerned, has reviewed C-
16/C-16S Curriculum in force. On finding the merits and shortcomings of C-16/C-16S Curriculum,
the faculty has made a thorough assessment of the curricular changes that have to be brought in. It
was felt that there is an urgent need to improve hands-on experience among the students pursuing
diploma courses. Further, the urgency of enhancing communication skills in English has also been
highlighted in the feedback and suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view, a
number of meetings and deliberations were held at State level, with experts from industry, academia
and senior faculty of the department. The new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been
designed with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics
of Telangana, besides reviewed by Expert Committee constituted with eminent academicians.
The new C-18 curriculum is designed, duly taking into consideration the Outcome Based
Education model as per NBA norms and Credit system has also been introduced.
This new Curriculum has taken the Telangana State Industrial Policy in the course of
Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship. Skill Upgradation is given importance by allotting
2.5 grade points per semester.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce best technicians in the country
by correlating growing needs of the industries with the academic inputs.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2018 or C-18 is planned and designed by
making 6 months industrial training is mandatory.
Salient Features:
1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

 The Curriculum is Outcome based, Semester Pattern, more practical oriented, Flexible,
Relevant to the industry needs and oriented to develop entrepreneurship skills in
Diploma students.
1
 A maximum of 20% credits be permitted in specialized electives offered in VI semester
that can be pursued through MOOC like SWAYAM / NPTEL
 To start with a robust curriculum structure is designed
 Course structure contains 5 theory courses and 5 Laboratory courses per semester
 All theory courses will be of Lecture -Tutorial-Practicals (L:T:P) pattern
 In order to ensure continuous evaluation, total course content is divided into 3 parts i.e.,
Mid Semester- I should be conducted for 20 marks from part I and Mid Semester- II
should be conducted for 20 marks from part II, End Examination shall be conducted for
40 marks of which 20 marks should be covered from part III, 20 marks covered from
overall course content.
 The sessional marks of 20 are assigned to slip tests, assignments, seminars, quiz etc.
 The question paper pattern is comprising of short answer questions, Essay questions,
Application based Questions covering the attributes of understanding, remembering and
Application.
 Scoring of the candidate in the examination is reflected in terms of grade points
blending with relative grade point award system.
2. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills that is playing a vital role in the success
of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and acquiring
listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Communication Skills lab and Life Skills
lab are therefore introduced in III Semester and Advanced Communication Skills lab and Life
Skills lab as lab electives from IV Semester for all the branches.
3. Latest topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global scenario suitable to be taught at
Diploma level are also incorporated in the curriculum.
4. CAD specific to the branch has been given more emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
5. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1 styear itself in order to familiarize
himself/herself with skills required for keyboard/mouse operation, internet usage and e-mailing.
6. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/chapter has been rationalized keeping
in view the past experience.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical content of
Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills in C-18 Curriculum.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all the
2
courses is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional procedure
based. While the course content in certain courses felt overloaded is reduced, in rest of the courses
the content has been enhanced as per the need.
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the suggestions
received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment available at the
Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical sessions are identified to
conform to the field requirements of industry.
10. The course of skill up-gradation in each semester is incorporated in the time table for one complete
day consisting of 7 periods..
11. The student shall be awarded satisfactory through RUBRICS only if he/she puts in at-least 75%
attendance in the skill up-gradation course apart from the satisfactory performance in the activities
allotted.
12. The activities suggested for skill up-gradation in the curriculum at the end of each course will be
assessed by the respective course teacher through RUBRICS and duly certified by the HOS/Principal.
13. The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri Navin Mittal I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman, S.B.T.E.T.(TS) for his constant guidance and valuable inputs in
revising, modifying and updating the curriculum.
14. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Sri. U.V.S.N. Murthy,
Secretary and his team of SBTET, Telangana, Dr C. Srinath, Additional Secretary, SBTET and Sri A.
Pullaiah, RJD and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the State Board of
Technical Education, Telangana.
15. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Dr.Uma
Shanker Sahu of NITTTR, Hyderabad and experts from industry, academia from the
universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who
are directly and indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DUR ATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
duration of Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on semester-wise pattern.
3
1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations laid down in this regard
from time to time.
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear
for Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana, Hyderabad.
The candidates satisfying the following requirements only are eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for the X class examination, conducted
by the Board of Secondary Education, Telangana or equivalent examination at the time of making
application to the Common Entrance Test for Polytechnics for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET). In case of candidates who apply with pending results of their qualifying examinations,
their selection shall be subject to production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in
one attempt or compartmentally at the time of counselling for admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test (POLYCET) and
the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana from time to time.
c) For admission into the Diploma in Pharmacy Course for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission into
these courses.
d) Admission into DHMCT Course shall be based on the Merit in Intermediate for which admissions
are made by DOST conducted by TSCHE.
1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a
Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate, which is
computer generated so as to facilitate this work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic Year for all the Courses usually shall be from June 1 st week of the year of admission
to the 31st March of the succeeding year.
4
b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working days.
d). The minimum number of Instructional working days for each semester shall be 90 days
excluding examination days/ Public holidays/ orientation programme/ Sports and games
Period. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements
shall be made to conduct classes to cover the syllabus.
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OF ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END
EXAMINATION
Note: Student attendance is recorded, twice a day using Aadhar Based Attendance System
with Bio metric Device.
a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all courses, if he or she has
attended a minimum of 75% of Instructional working days during the Semester.
b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below 75%) in
each semester may be granted on medical grounds.
c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to take
their end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-
admission for that semester when offered next.
e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
1.7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal of the
institutions concerned. 10% of approved intake are eligible for Readmission and preference
will be given to first-cum-first-serve basis, while according permission for re-admission of
the Diploma candidates:-
1. The percentage of attendance to a readmitted candidate is to be calculated from
the first day of beginning of the class work of that year / semester, but not from
the date, a readmitted candidate reports for class work, after given readmission.
No. of working
No. of working
S No. of days required
Year/Semester days required for
No Working days for 65%
75% attendance
attendance
1 Any Semester 90 67.5 58.5
5
(Except for
Industrial Training
2. The Principals of all Polytechnics shall ensure that the readmission cases should
considered and granted:-
a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

Otherwise such cases should not be considered for readmission for that Semester/year, and
the candidates concerned may be advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent
semester/year.
Before issuing readmission orders, an undertaking letter from the student is to be obtained,
stating that he/she will agree to the rule that the percentage of attendance to him/her shall be
calculated from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / semester, as
officially announced by DTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported to
the class work, after readmission is granted, and that he/she will complete the Diploma in twice the
duration of the course from the date of the first admission, otherwise he/she will forfeit the claim
for qualifying for the award of Diploma.
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:
THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

respect of specified courses of 2 hours duration, along with 60 marks for continuous
evaluation.
 The Semester End Examination paper shall be set for 40 marks
 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each laboratory course carries 40 marks of 2/3
hours duration and 60 sessional marks for continuous internal evaluation.
2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

I. Assessment: In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is
formulated as
End 40 marks
Examination
Mid Sem 1 20 marks
Mid Sem 2 20 marks
Tutorials 20 marks
/Sessionals
Total marks 100 Marks
6
 Total course content shall be divided into three parts as Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
 Mid sem 1 Exam should be conducted from Part 1
 Mid sem II Exam should be conducted from Part 2
 End Examination to be conducted for 40 marks of which
 20 Marks should be covered from Part 3
 Remaining 20 marks covered from over all course contents
 The tutorial/sessionals shall consist of following marks division
1. Slip test 1 -- 5 marks
2. Slip test 2 -- 5 Marks
3. Assignments -- 5 Marks
4. Seminar/paper presentation/group discussion -- 5 Marks
II. Mid semester Question paper pattern
 Part A shall consist of ‘Remember’ based questions
 Part B shall consist of ‘Understanding’ questions
 Part C shall be of ‘Application’ based Questions
III. Semester End Examination:
 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.
 Backlog examinations should be held before the commencement of Academic Year to give
sufficient time for the student to prepare for Backlog examinations.
IV. Examination Pattern (End Semester Examination):
Part 3 Unit 5&6 ‘Remember’ based questions
Part A
Entire syllabus ‘Remember’ based questions
Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based

Part B Unit 5&6 questions
‘Understanding’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
Part 3
‘Application’ based questions
Unit 5&6
Part C
‘Application’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
7
V. Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum
1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated as:
Theory Practical
End Examination 40 marks End Examination 40 marks
Mid Sem-I 20 marks Mid Sem-I 20 marks
Mid Sem-II 20 marks Mid Sem-II 20 marks
Internal 20 marks Internal 20 marks
Total marks 100 Marks Total marks 100 Marks
2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

Absolute Grade Cut off Hybrid Grade Cut off
Grade Relative Grade
Grade Practical &
Point Theory Subjects Cut off
Drawing
Min of
A+ 10 > 90% > 90% Min of Top 1/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
A 9 > 80 to < 90% > 82.5 to < 90% Min of Top 2/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B+ 8 > 70 to < 80% > 75 to < 82.5% Min of Top 3/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B 7 > 60 to < 70% > 67.5 to < 75% Min of Top 4/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C+ 6 > 50 to < 60% > 60 to < 67.5% Min of Top 5/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C 5 > 40 to < 50% > 55 to < 60% Min of Top 6/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
D 4 > 35 to < 40% > 50 to < 55% Min of Top 7/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
E 0 Rest of the Candidates

Based on the minimum of Absolute Grade cut off and Relative Grade cut off, a Hybrid
grade cut off shall be arrived and the appropriate grade shall allotted to the student and based on the
Grade, a Grade point shall be allotted in each subject provided the Candidate passes in the subject.
8
Pass Criteria for Regular Candidate: The Candidate is declared pass only if he/she
secures above the Hybrid Grade cut off of ‘D’ grade and 35% or above in Theory Examination and
50% or above in Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula below in Sem End
Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks
Grades for backlog subjects : The Candidate shall be awarded ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade based on
‘Pass’ or ‘Fail’ respectively in the Backlog Subjects. The ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade has no Grade point but P
grade will count towards credits earned for awarding Diploma. The Candidate shall get P Grade if
he/she secures 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in Practical and Drawing
Examinations, as per the formula below in End Sem Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks of Regular exam of that batch
VI. Credits:
For theory courses-- 3 Credits
For Laboratory courses- 1.5 Credits
Skill up-gradation 2.5 Credits
Total credits per semester 25 Credits
 CGPA will be calculated for Regular Examinations only and not for backlog exams.
 Backlog exams will count for credits.
 Skill up gradation course will not count for CGPA but for Credits.
 Minimum credits for obtaining Diploma are 130 out of 150
VII. Electives:
a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Or
Specialized electives related to V semester course contents offered in MOOCs, like
SWAYAM/NPTEL
b) The student has to complete one Project in V Semester
Industrial Training (VI Semester)
Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

(50% of each Polytechnic students undergo Industrial Training in V Semester and
remaining in VI Semester).
9
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
10
Assessment parameters at Industry
Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
nd
3 2 Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
Semester End Examination
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
11
 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be
averaged
a) Theory Courses: Theory Courses carry 20 marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20
marks for Tutorials which consists of Slip Test-I 5 Marks, Slip Test-II 5 Marks, Assignment-5 Marks
and Seminar -5Marks. Mid Sem examinations will be conducted on the dates specified by SBTET.
The remaining 40 marks of theory will be conducted as End Semester Exam.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during each
semester of study for 40 marks in end practical course and internal assessment carries 20 marks
for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20 marks for Tutorials. Each student has to write a
record / log book for assessment purpose. In the course of Drawing, which is also considered as a
practical paper, the same rules hold good. Drawing exercises are to be filed in seriatim.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc., during the course of study shall be done
and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer / Workshop
superintendent with the concurrence of concerned HOS as the case maybe.
d) For practical examinations, there shall be two examiners. External examiner shall be appointed
by the Principal in consultation with respective head of the department preferably choosing a
person from an Industry/Academician. At least one External Examiner from Industry should be
appointed for core labs.The Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal
assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in
respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover all the experiments / exercise
prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical courses are to be
maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of D.C.C.P., though the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 50% in the end
examination, equivalency will be given for the students who got 45% with the examinations held
by SBTET, TS.
12
3 RULES OF PROMOTION FOR NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses for 1st ,2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5thand 6thSemesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first Semester examination provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However, attendance
can be condoned by the Principal on Medical grounds upto 10% (i.e. attendance after condonation
on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay the condonation fee along
with examination fee as prescribed by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2ndsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the first semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate who could not pay the first semester examination fee has to pay the promotion
fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 2nd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 2nd
semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays the
examination fee and earned more than 25 credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 2 nd
semester). A candidate who could not pay the 2nd semester examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time
before commencement of 3rd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3 rd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) and pays the
examination fee in the 3rd semester and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rdsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester. A candidate, who could not pay
the 3rdsemester exam fee but fulfilling all other conditions has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester. IVC pass out students admitted into 3 rd semester through lateral
entry shall be promoted to 4th Semester, if he/she Puts the required percentage of attendance
13
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) and pays examination in the 3 rd semester.
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 4 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earns 75 Credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 4 th semester). A
candidate, who could not pay the 4thsemester examination fee but earned 75 credits has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to
time before commencement of 5thsemester as the case may be.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 5 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 75 credits upto the end of 4 th Semester. A candidate, who could not
pay the 5thsemester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 6 thsemester as the
case may be.
(a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 6th semester (Theory) exam if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 6 th semester
ii) Should have appeared for 5th semester examination.
(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6 th (Industrial Training) semester

examination if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Training)
ii) Should have completed the Industrial Training
iii) Should have submitted Industrial Training assessment report.
(c) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he /
she will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
Promotion rules for C-18
S From To Cumulative
Attendance Remarks
No. Sem Sem Credits
75%
1 I II -
(65% on medical grounds)
Cumulative credits are
2 II III -do- 25
applicable from the
3 III IV -do- 25
A.Y. 2021-22 onwards
4 IV V -do- 75
5 V VI -do- 75
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
14
Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)
From To Cumulative
S No. Attendance Remarks
Sem Sem Credits
75% (65% IVC candidates should be
1 III IV on medical - allotted 50 credits during
grounds) admission into 3rd semester
2 IV V -do- 75 From A.Y. 2021-22
3 V VI -do- 75 -do-
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time.
4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued Grade Card without any
payment of fee. However, candidates who lose the original Grade Card have to pay the
prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
for each duplicate Grade Card.
4.3 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the prescribed duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma. (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years of engineering and non-engineering
courses including candidates seek admission under lateral entry. In respect of Pharmacy
courses the completion period s 4 years as the prescribed duration of the course is 2
years.
4.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfill the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 academic years & not more than 6 academic
years.
15
ii. He / she should have earned 130 credits out of 150 credits.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course &
their seat shall stand cancelled.
4.5 RE-VALUATION / ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY:
4.5.1 a) As per the SBTET notification.
A candidate desirous of applying for Revaluation / issue of Photocopy of valued answer
scripts should submit the application online to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 as per the notification issued for Revaluation /issue
of Photo copy of answer Script.
4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:
If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked
and the Punishment shall be awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET,TS
from time to time.
4.5.3 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy regarding results etc., shall be represented to the Board within one month
from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any
manner.
4.6 EQUIVALENCE:
In general there is no equivalency of CGPA and marks percentage:
However : 60% is insisted a CGPA of 6.50
55% is insisted a CGPA of 6.00
50% is insisted a CGPA of 5.50
With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates, who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3rdsemester (i.e., second year) level, the CGPA over 4 semesters
shall alone be taken into consideration for award of Diploma.
5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES :
5.1 ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA:
If the candidate desires for a duplicate certificate of Diploma, he/she may obtain on payment
of prescribed fee, duly following the procedure.
16
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to pursue Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any time
and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for whom it
is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training are
within the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET (TS) is final.
C -18 CURRICULLUM
DIPLOMA IN ARCHITECTURAL ASSISTANTSHIP
17
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING
TELANGANA STATE, HYDERABAD
CONTENTS
S. No. CONTENTS PAGE NO.
I Preamble
II Rules & Regulations
III Syllabus
FIRST SEMESTER
1 18AA-101F English- I
2 18AA-102F Engineering mathematics-I
3 18AA-103F Engineering Physics-I
4 18AA-104F Engineering Chemistry & Environmental studies-I
5 18AA-105C Building Materials
6 18AA-106D Engineering Drawing Practice
7 18AA-107D Basic Design
8 18AA-108D Free Hand Drawing
9 18AA-109P –(A+B) Applied Science Lab Practice
10 18AA-110P Computer fundamentals Lab - I
11 Skill Upgradation
Academic
SECOND SEMESTER
18
12 18AA-201F English- II
13 18AA-202F Engineering mathematics-II
14 18AA-203F Engineering Physics-II
15 18AA-204F Engineering Chemistry & Environmental studies-II
16 18AA-205C Advanced Building Materials
17 18AA-206D Advanced Engineering Drawing Practice
18 18AA-207D Architectural Design-I
19 18AA-208D Architectural Graphics
20 18AA-209P –(A+B) Applied Science Lab Practice
21 18AA-210P Computer fundamentals Lab -II
22 Skill Upgradation, Academic activities
THIRD SEMESTER
23 18AA-301F Applied Engineering Mathematics
24 18AA-302C Engineering Mechanics (common with Civil)
25 18AA-303C Building Specifications

26 18AA-304C History of Indian Architecture
27 18AA-305C CAD Theory
28 18AA-306D Perspective Drawing
29 18AA-307D Architectural Design
30 18AA-308P Model Making Lab Practice
31 18AA-309P Basic CAD Lab Practice
32 18AA-.310P CS &LS Lab Practice
33 Skill Up gradation
FOURTH SEMESTER
34 18AA-401C Building Estimation
35 18AA-402C Strength of Materials (common with Civil)
36 18AA-403C Surveying (common with Civil)
37 18AA-404C History of Western Architecture
38 18AA-405C Urban Planning
39 18AA-406D Building Construction Drawing
40 18AA-407D Advanced Architectural Design
41 18AA-408P Surveying Lab Practice
42 18AA-409P CAD Lab Practice
43 18AA-.410P Advanced communication skills & life skills lab practice
44 Skill Up gradation
19
FIFTH SEMESTER
45 18AA-501C Reinforced Concrete Structures (common with Civil)

46 18AA-502C Entrepreneurship and Project Management
47 18AA-503C Building Services, Green Buildings & Acoustics
48 18AA-504C International Architects
49 18AA-505D Interior Design
50 18AA-506P Design Practice Lab
51 18AA-507P Advanced CAD Lab Practice
52 18AA-508P Working Drawings Lab Practice
53 18AA-509P Architectural Documentation
54 18AA-510P Project Work
SIXTH SEMESTER
55 18AA-601 Industrial Training
DIPLOMA IN ARCHITECTURAL ASSISTANTSHIP, (C -18)

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION
FIRST SEMESTER
` Cours Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

e
Instruction Total Credit Continuous Internal Semester End Total Min
Code marks
periods Period s Evaluation Examination Marks
per s per (Internal
week semes +End
T P ter Mid Mid Sesion Max Min Exam)
L
Sem I SemII als marks marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18AA- Basic English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

101F
2 18AA- Basic Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
102F Mathematics
3 18AA- Basic Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

103F
4 18AA- General Engineering
Chemistry
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
104F
5 18AA- Building Materials 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
105C
DRAWING SUBJECTS
20
6 18AA- Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
106D Drawing practice
7 18AA- Basic Design 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
107D
8 18AA- Free Hand Drawing 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
108D
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
9 18AA- Basic Science Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

109P- Practice
A+B
10 18AA- Computer 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
110P Fundamentals Lab 0
Practice
11 Skill Up gradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 Rubrics Grade-
-- A/B/C/D
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 175 1000 425
Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
21
SECOND SEMESTER
S Cours Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
N e
o Code Periods Period s Evaluation Marks marks
Examination
per s per (Internal
week semes +End
L
1 18AA- Advanced 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

201F English
2 18AA- Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
202F Mathematics
3 18AA- Applied Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

203F
4 18AA- Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Chemistry
204F &Environmental
studies
5 18AA- Advanced Building 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
205C materials
DRAWING SUBJECTS
6 18AA- Advanced 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

206D Engineering
Drawing Practice
7 18AA- Basic Architectural 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
207D Design
8 18AA- Architectural Graphics 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
208D
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
9 18AA- Applied science lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

209P- Practice
A+B
10 18AA- Information 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
210P TechnologyLab 0
Practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 Rubrics Grade-
-- A/B/C/D
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
22
THIRD SEMESTER
Instruction Total Min

Semester End Total
periods Period Credit Continuous Internal marks
S. s per s Evaluation Examination Marks (Internal
SUBJEC per
NO SUBJECT NAME week semes +End
T CODE Sesion Exam)
. Mid Mid Max Min
L T P als
Sem I SemII marks marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18 AA- APPLIED 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
301 F ENGINEERING
.MATHEMATICS
2 18 AA- ENGINEERING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
302 C MECHANICS(COMMO
N WITH CIVIL)
3 18 AA- BUILDING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
303 C SPECIFICATIONS
4 18 AA- HISTORY OF INDIAN 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

304 C ARCHITECTURE
5 18AA- CAD THEORY 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
305C
DRAWING SUBJECTS
6 18 AA- PERSPECTIVE 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
306 D DRAWING
7 18 AA- ARCHITECTURAL 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
307 D DESIGN-
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
8 18 AA- MODEL MAKING LAB

308 P PRACTICE
9 18 AA- BASIC CAD LAB 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
309 P PRACTICE
1018 AA- COMMUNICATION 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
310 P SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS 0
LAB PRACTICE
A/B/C/D
TOTAL 17 8 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 175 1000 425

23
FOURTH SEMESTER
Instruction Total Total Min
Semester End
periods Period Credits Continuous Internal Marks marks
S. per s per Evaluation Examination (Internal
SUBJECT +End
NO SUBJECT NAME week semes
CODE Sesion Exam)
. Mid Mid Max Min
L T P als
Sem I SemII marks marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18 AA-401 C BUILDING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
ESTIMATION
2 STRENGTH OF 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
18 AA-402 C MATERIALS(COMM
ON WITH CIVIL)
3 18 AA-403 C SURVEYING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
4 HISTORY OF 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
18 AA-404 C WESTERN
ARCHITECTURE
5 18 AA-405 C URBAN PLANING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
DRAWING SUBJECTS
6 BUILDING 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
18 AA-406 D CONSTRUCTION
DRAWING
7 ADVANCED 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
18 AA-407 D ARCHITECTURAL
DESIGN-
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
8 18 AA-408 P SURVEYING LAB 0 0 3 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
PRACTICE
9 18 AA-409 P CAD LAB PRACTICE 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
AND 3D MAX
10 ADVANCED 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
0
18 AA-410 P COMMUNICATION
SKILLS & LIFE SKILLS
LAB PRACTICE
11 Skill 0 0 7 105 2.5 Rubrics Grade-
Upgradation -- A/B/C/D
TOTAL 17 8 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 175 1000 425

FIFTH SEMESTER
24
perio Period s Evaluation Examination Marks marks
S. dsper s per (Internal
SUBJECT +End
CODE Exam)
. L T P Mid Mid Sessio Max Min
Sem I SemII nals marks marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18 AA- REINFORCED 2. 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
501 C CONCRETE 4
STRUCTURES
2 18 AA- ENTREPRENEURSHIP 2. 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
502 C AND PROJECT 4
MANAGEMENT
3 18 AA- 2. 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
BUILDING SERVICES 4
503 C
4 18 AA- INTERNATIONAL 2. 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

504 C ARCHITECTS 4
DRAWING SUBJECTS
5 18 AA- INTERIOR DESIGN 1 0 3 60 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
505D
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
6 18 AA- DESIGN PRACTICE LAB 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
506 P
507 P DOCUMENTATION
8 18 AA- WORKING DRAWINGS 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
508 P LAB PRACTICE 0
9 18 AA- 0 0 6 90 4.5 Semi Semina 20 40 100 50
PROJECT WORK 20
509 P nar I r II (20)
(20)
10 18 AA- PROGRAMMING IN C 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
TOTAL 1 8 179 675 24 200 200 200 400 180 1000 440
8
VI SEMESTER
18AA- 601 P INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Max Min.
S.NO Subject Duration Assessment
Marks Marks
25
1.First 150
Assessment
300
(at the end of
3rd month)
2. Second 150
Industrial 6 Months Assessment
1 300
Training (at the end
of 6th month)
3. Log Book 100 200
4.
100
Portfolio/Report
5. Seminar/viva 200
TOTAL MARKS 1000 500

FIRST SEMESTER
e
Code
periods Period s Evaluation Examination Marks marks
per s per (Internal
week semes +End
L
26
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18AA- Basic English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

101F
2 18AA- Basic Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
102F Mathematics
3 18AA- Basic Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

103F
4 18AA- General Engineering
Chemistry
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
104F
5 18AA- Building Materials 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
105C
DRAWING SUBJECTS
6 18AA- Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
106D Drawing practice
7 18AA- Basic Design 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
107D
8 18AA- Free Hand Drawing 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
108D
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
9 18AA- Basic Science Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

109P- Practice
A+B
10 18AA- Computer 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
110P Fundamentals Lab 0
Practice
-- A/B/C/D
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 175 1000 425
BASIC ENGLISH
Basic English
Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18Common-101F
Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

36:24:0
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Hours : 60 periods
Teaching + Assignments
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
27
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will have the ability to:
101.1 communicate effectively, express their likes, dislikes and feelings and make
requests
101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately
101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction
101.4 speak and write grammaticallycorrect sentences
101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material
101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters
Time Schedule
S.No Unit Name Period
1 Speaking 12
2 Listening 6
3 Vocabulary 8
4 Grammar 16
5 Reading 6
6 Writing 12
Total 60
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Need For English
2. Classroom English
3. Expressing Feelings
4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes
5. Making Requests
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. Describing Words
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to use a Dictionary
28
8. Words Often Confused
UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods
9. Tenses
10. Basic Sentence Structures
11. Voice
12. Asking Questions
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana

10. The Adventures of Toto
11. Tiller turns Engineer - An Innovation
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods
16. Paragraph Writing - I
17. Paragraph Writing - II
18. Letter Writing – I
19. Letter Writing – II
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to

 express feelings, likes and dislikes and make requests.
 communicate fluently.
 use dictionary
 use describing words and distinguish between confusing words.
 read, comprehend and answer the questions.
 use appropriate tenses, voices, structures and ask questions.
 write paragraphs and letters.
Internal evaluation
29
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking Part A 4 short answer questions
Listening 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
Suggested Student Activities
 Setting short term goals for learning English

 Identifying the suitable solutions for the skill gap
 Listen to a passage / conversations / dialogues / speeches and answer the questions
 Self introduction
 Talking about routines
 Talking about one’s emotions
 Debates
 Elocution
 Role Plays
 Quiz
 Reading a selected text / news paper for specific purpose
 Reading aloud with proper pronunciation and intonation
 Describing people
 Describing places
 Describing events
 Creating Advertisements
 Selling a product with appropriate vocabulary
 Interpreting advertisements
 Writing short messages
 Writing a bio note / paragraph / letter
30
 How to use translate using Google application
 Using a dictionary
 Vocabulary games
Textbook: English for Polytechnics
(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Games for Language Learning by Andrew Wright, David Betteridge and Michael Buckby
5. Five Minute Activities by Penny Ur
6. English Dialogues by M.
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English (app)

9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)
Model Rubrics
S.No Sub Performance

activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
31
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for the
accurately activity were activity were activity were
prepared based on accurately accurately inaccurately
the data collected prepared based on prepared based prepared
independently. the data collected on the data
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
by-step fashion by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
that could be require or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by explanation & require the activity in a
anyone & performed the explanation & poor way
performed the activity effectively. performed the
activity activity normally
effectively.
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information about information about information information
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, interesting logical sequence activity in activity
sequence with with visuals or logical sequence without
attractive visuals diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a Provided a Student Conclusions
/ summary detailed conclusion / provided a /summary was
conclusion/ summary clearly conclusion/ not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data summary less
based on the data and activity effectively
and activity
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
1
101.1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3 1,2,3,6,8,9,10
101.2 2 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 3 3 3 1,2,4,6,8,9,10
32
101.3 2 2 -- -- 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.4 2 2 2 -- 2 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.5 2 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration 1 hour)
PART A PART B PART C Total Marks
1 Marks
Marks/Question each 3 Marks each 5 Marks each
20 Marks
No. of
Questions 4 Questions 2/4 Questions 2/4 Questions
S.No
A
. Unit No. R U Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
Total Marks 4 6 10 20 Marks
MID SEM - II EXAMEXAM (Duration 1 hour)
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

SEMESTER END EXAMINATIONEXAM (Duration 2 hours)
1 Mark
No. of
40 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV 4
9(b) 13(b)
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
33
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
For theory subjects 18AA - 101 -105, 201-205, 301 -305, 401- 405, 501-504, 601-
603
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)

FIRST SEMESTER COMMON-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each carries one mark.
1. Rewrite the following as requests.
a. Pass the milk.
b. Give me your cell.
2. Write your feelings in the given situations.
a. Your mother scolded you.
b. Your friends gave you a surprise party.
3. Describe your classroom in a couple of sentences.
4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable describing words.
My friend is ________. She bought a _______ house.
(dirty, clever, rich, fat, intelligent, big)
PART – B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the followingquestions. Each question carries three marks

5. a.) What are the advantages of learning English?
(Or)
b). Write three situations in which you feel the following emotions.
i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry
34
6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.
Harry Potter series is very interesting and popular. He is very sensitive and brave. The
author was once poor. But now she has become rich.
(Or)
b) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words of description given below in brackets.
The Sun was shining brightly. It was a ___ day. The sky was ___. There were no clouds in the sky. A
__ girl came out of her house. She was very ___. Suddenly a ___ cloud loomed over. There was ___
rain.
( large, dark, pretty, young, sunny, clear, heavy. silly)
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a) Mention any five problems you faced in learning English?
(Or)
b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

8 a). Describe your friend using appropriate describing words.
(Or)
b) Use the following words and write a paragraph on your town.
(spacious, big, beautiful, narrow, clean, dirty, wide, small, tall, polluted)

BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -II
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each carries one mark.

1. Use the following pair of homonyms in your own sentences to bring out the difference in
meaning.
35
a. Watch
b. Watch
2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?
a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

b. She ___ (be) late yesterday.
3. Change the voice.

a. Cats chase mice.
b. The wires were cut by him.
4. Change the following into yes / no questions.
a. Satish likes sweets.

b. Desserts are hot.
PART – B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5 a). Write about different kinds of dictionaries.
(Or)
b). Fill in the blanks with the appropriate homophones given below in brackets.
I tell _______ (stories, storeys) to my friends. My hobby is to tell _______ ( tales, tails) with animal
characters in them. _______ (Two, Too) of my friends like to listen to my stories always. I told them
a story about a ______(bear, bare). I bought it for them at a _______ (fair, fare). I became very
_______ (week, weak) as I suffered from fever.
6 a). Frame three ‘wh-’ questions for the following passage.
One of the most famous monuments in the world, the Statue of Liberty was presented to
the U.S.A.by the people of France. It took ten years to complete it. It was made from copper with a
metal frame to support it. The sculptor Auguste Bartholdi made it.
(Or)
b). Change the voice.
a. He plays hockey.
36
b. The novel had been written by him.
c. We will be helped by them.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7 a). How will you locate a word in a dictionary?
(Or)
b). Write the following pairs of words in your own sentences.
i. Son, Sun
ii. Live, Live
iii. Hair, Hare
iv. Meet, Meat
v. Air, Heir
8 a). Write five sentences about your childhood using past tense.
(Or)
b). Write one sentence each for the given structures.
i. S.V.
ii. S.V.O.
iii. S.V.SC.
iv. S.V.O.OC.
v. S.V.IO.DO.

BASIC ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Total Marks: 40
PART – A 8 X 1 = 08
Instructions: 1. Answer all the questions.
2. Each question carries one mark.
37
1. Fill the blanks with suitable expressions of feelings:
a) I feel _________ when I get a first class in diploma first semester.
b) The teacher was ________ with me when I was late to class.
2. Use raise and rise in your own sentences.
3. Write at least four supporting sentences to the following topic sentence:
I want to become an engineer.
4. Write one sentence each for the following structures:
a. S V IO DO
b. S V SC
5. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Communication is the process of transmitting ideas from a human communicator to a
human communicate, directly or through a medium. Technical communication, which is
concerned with the transmission of technical information, uses a variety of graphics, such as
charts, diagrams, pictures and tables to illustrate the information presented in a language.
Every illustration communicates facts clearly, concisely, attractively and accurately. A
technician should shape his ideas into language as well as graphics. It must also be possible
for a technician to convert the ideas available in the form of language into graphics and vice
versa.
a) What is technical communication concerned with?
b) Why does technical communication use graphics?
6. Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions:
a) How should the technician develop his ability of communication?
b) Suggest a suitable title to the passage.
7. Write any three complimentary closures used in official letters.
8. Write a short paragraph on your long term goal.
PART- B 4 X 3 = 12
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.

2. Each question carries three marks.
9 a). Write any five expressions used by your teacher in classroom.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
38
Jalagam Vengal Rao open caste mine is located in Sathupally in Khammam district. When
coal deposits were discovered in Sathupally, it was tested by its owners – Singareni Collieries
Company Limited, to determine the quality. Surveys showed that coal available underneath
Sathupally area would last for about 50 years.
The farmers who had to leave their lands were compensated with lands elsewhere
and some of them were given jobs in mines. Open cast mining started at Sathupally in 2005.
Almost all the work at this mine are done using machines such as bulldozers, motor
graders, shovels, drills, water sprinklers, tipper trucks, dumpers and different trucks which can
carry heavy loads of coal. Shovel and bulldozers are first used to remove top soil or
overburden and rocks. Then a series of benches are made (benches are vertical sections of a
mine from where the coal or overburden is removed). Roads have been laid in the mining area
all the way down to the bottom of the mine, connecting all the benches. Over burden and
waste rocks are removed from sides of benches by blasting. Coal blasted in benches is then
lifted using shovels and dumpers and transported through tipper trucks. Coal is transported to
the coal handling plant and through railway wagons to power plants, cement factories and
other industries. Every day, about 10,000 tonnes of coal is mined and transported from JVR
Open Cast Mine.
Questions:
a) Where is Jalagam Vengal Rao Open Cast Mine located?
b) Why were the farmers compensated with land or given jobs in mines?
c) What is a bench in a coal mine?
10 a). Rewrite the following sentences changing the voice.
a) I was helped by her.
b) She cleaned the house.
c) Windows have been painted by Ramesh.
(or)
b) Write a letter to your principal requesting him to issue a duplicate hall ticket.
11 a). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Subhash Chandra Bose was born on 23 January 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa. He studied in
Cuttack and then moved to Presidency College in Calcutta for further studies. He did his B.A. in
Philosophy and went to England to appear for the Civil Services examination Although he did well in
the exam he soon resigned from the services because it meant working against the interests of his
39
country. .He returned to India and started a newspaper called Swaraj. His mentor Chittaranjan Das
was active and open in his criticism of British rule. Bose followed his footsteps and was arrested and
sent to prison in Mandalay. He joined the Indian National Congress. Later he parted ways with the
Congress. He revived the Indian National Army. He is believed to have coined the slogan Jai Hind.
Questions:
a) What was Chittaranjan Das's attitude towards the British?
b) How did Bose fight against the British?
c) Why did Bose resign from the Civil Services?
(or)
b) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
What influenced Asuthosh most was the company of the brilliant friends of his father. They
were eminent men in their several walks of life, and they fired the boy’s ambition. He was especially
impressed by Mr. Justice Dwarka Nath Mitter who often visited their house. In his heart he wanted
to emulate him in all ways. Thus at a very early age Asutosh formed the ambition of being a judge of
the Calcutta High Court. He also wanted to be a scholar and win the Premchand Roychand
Studentship which is held to be the most coveted academic distinction in Bengal. It will be seen
later how he was able to realize both his ambitions.
But he had to cut his studies short because he fell seriously ill. The doctors said that he suffered
from palpitation of the heart and advised him to have a complete rest and change. His father sent
him to Muttra for a holiday. The change had a very beneficial effect on him, for Muttra had a fine
climate and beautiful scenery, and Asutosh returned fully restored in health and sprits.
Mathematics attracted Asutosh most, and he came to be looked upon as a prodigy in this subject.
One day one of his teachers thought of testing his ability in mathematics and set the class very
difficult problem. All the other students looked blank on reading the problem, but not so Asutosh.
He solved it correctly in a few minutes and showed it to the teacher, who was amazed at the
evidence of his ability. As time went on he developed much originality in solving other
mathematical problems.
Questions:
a) What was Asutosh’s ambition?

b) What did he want to win?
c) Why did doctors advise him to take rest?
40
12 a). Write a paragraph using the hints given below.
Library in our polytechnic – a big hall – several tables and chairs – newspapers – journals –
visiting hours – two computers with internet – three cards to each student – 20000 books –
many reference books
(or)
b). Write a letter to your friend describing your first day in your institute.
PART-C 4 X 5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries five marks
13 a). List any five problems you face in learning English and suggest solutions.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the question given below it.
In1920, the Congress meeting was held at Nagpur under the leadership of Gandhiji. It
was attended by 15000 delegates and the Congress Constitution was amended and resolutions
were taken to fight Swaraj by nonviolent methods and undo the injustice done to Punjab and
Turkey.
This movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement. Renunciation of honorary

titles like ‘Sir’ given by British, boycott of legislatures, schools and colleges, courts, tendering
resignation to government jobs nonpayment of taxes to government were the important
programmes of this movement. Gandhi returned his Kaiser-i-Hind title in August, 1920. There
were strikes, hartals and burning of foreign goods all over the country. Many Indian were killed
in firings and many other were jailed.
In Kerala, a rebellion broke out by Mophlah peasants and it was suppressed brutally.
Though Gandhiji warned the people many times not to resort to violent methods, on 5 th
February, 1922 in Chauri-Chaura in Uttar Pradesh people resorted to violence. When
policemen opened fire on peaceful demonstrations, the angry people set ablaze the police
station and 22 policemen were killed. Gandhiji stopped the movement because it lost its
nonviolent nature. On 10th March, 1922 Gandhiji was arrested for six years.
Questions:
a) What resolutions were taken at the Congress meeting held at Nagpur?
b) Why was the movement called Non-Cooperation Movement?
c) Why did Gandhiji return his Kaiser-i-Hind title?
41
d) Why did people set ablaze the police station at Chauri-Chaura?
e) Why did Gandhiji stop the movement?
14 a). Write the basic uses of a dictionary.
(or)
b). Write a letter to the Principal of your institute requesting him to provide you admission into
hostel.
15 a). Read the passage given and answer the questions.
It was way back in 1972 that NASA began developing a space shuttle that could launch like a
rocket but fly and land like an airplane—a unique transportation system for deploying satellites and
payloads into outer space. It was indeed a technological wonder as it was reusable unlike the
earlier , one shot disposable rockets, which were used to place astronauts and equipment into the
Earth's orbit. Basically , a space shuttle consists of an orbiter that carries astronauts and payload
attached to solid rocket boosters and an external fuel tank.To lift the space shuttle , weighing about
2 million kg, from the launch pad to its orbit that is about 185 to 643 km above the Earth , the
shuttle uses two poweful solid rocket boosters, which provide a thrust of about 11.7 million N. In
addition the SRB's support the entire weight of the space shuttle orbiter and fuel tank on the launch
pad.
Questions:
a) Why is the space shuttle unique?
b) What are the parts of the space shuttle?
c) What are the functions of the solid rocket boosters?
d) What is the space shuttle used for?
e) Find one word in the passage that means throw away after use.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it.
Another important environmental movement is the Chipko Movement which started in the
early 1970s in the Garhwal Himalayas of Uttarakhand by Sunderlal Bahuguna. Like the tribal people
of Narmada valley, the forests are a critical resource for the subsistence of people in hilly and
mountainous areas. This is both because of their direct provision of food, fuel and fodder and
because of their role in the stabilizing soil and water resources. As these forests were being
increasingly felled for commerce and industry, villagers sought to protect their livelihoods through
42
non-violent resistance. The name of the movement comes from the word ‘chipko’ meaning
‘embrace’: the villagers hugged the trees, saving them by interposing their bodies between them
and the contractors’ axes. Village women were the main force of this movement. It inspired many
people to look closely at the issue of environment sustainability.
Questions:
1. Where was Chipko movement started?
2. Why did the villagers want to protect the trees?
3. How did the villagers protect the trees?
4. What is the synonym of the word, ‘important’?
5. What do you think of this movement?
16 a). Write a letter to your uncle about your plan to visit his place during summer.
(or)
b). Write a paragraph in 150 words about the importance of following traffic rules.
BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18COMMON102F

SEMESTER : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 36 :24: 0 ( in periods) ) Credits : 3 Credits
Type of Course : Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge ofAlgegra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:
CO 1 Solve the problems on Logarithms

CO 2 Resolve a given fraction into Partial Fractions
CO 3 Find the Sum , Product of Matrices , Value of the determinant and Inverse of a Matrix .
CO 4 Solve simple problems using concepts of Trigonometric Functions
CO 5 Solve simultaneous Linear Equations using Matrices and Determinants
CO 6 Solve a Triangle and an Inverse Trigonometric Equation .
43
TIME SCHEDULE
UNIT NAME No. of Hours
a).Logarithms 02
1
b).Partial Fractions 04
2 Matrices and determinants 12
a).Compound Angles 06
3 b)Multiple angles & Submultiple 06
angles
a).Properties of triangles 02
4 b).Hyperbolic Functions 02
c).Complex numbers 04
a).Transformations 06
5 b).Inverse Trigonometric Functions 06
a).Solutions of Simultaneous
6 Equations 06
b).Solutions of Triangles 04
TOTAL 60
Unit-I Duration: 06Periods (L: 3.6 – T: 2.4)
1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of e
and exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation – Solve some
simple problems.
2. Partial Fractions:
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to their
partial fractions covering the types mentioned below:
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c ) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) iv )
( x 2  a )( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b) 2
Unit – II Duration: 12Periods (L: 7.2 – T:4.8)
44
3. Matrices and Determinants :Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of
matrices-equality of two matrices, sum, difference , scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
Transpose of a Matrix- Symmetric, Skew symmetric matrices- Minor, cofactor of an element-
Determinant of a square matrix up to 3rd order -Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants.
Singular and non-singular matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix –related
problems.
Trigonometry:
Unit-III Duration: 12Periods (L: 7.2 – T: 4.8)
4. Compound angles: Formulae of Sin (A±B), Cos (A±B), Tan (A±B), Cot(A±B), and related
identities with problems - Derive the values of sin150, cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750
etc.-Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,
5. Multiple and sub multiple angles:Trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and
submultiples angle A/2 with problems - Derive useful allied formulas like
sin2 A= ( 1−cos2 2 A ) etc., - Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Unit – IV Duration: 08Periods (L: 4.2 – T:3.8)
6. Properties of triangles: Statements of Sine rule, Cosine rule, Tangent rule and Projection rule
7. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions - Sinh x, coshx ,tanh x etc., - identities
of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic
functions in terms of logarithms.
8. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex

number, Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form of a complex number.
Algebra & Trigonometry
Unit – V Duration: 12Periods (L: 7.2 – T:4.8)
45
9 .Transformations: Transformation of products into sums or differences and vice versa -
simpleproblems - Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of

three or more terms.
10 Inverse trigonometric functions:Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with
their domains and ranges - Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so
that given A=sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions -
with examples - State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities

like -1
sin x+cos -1
x = 2 etc - Derive formulae like
x+ y
tan−1 x + tan−1 y=tan−1 ( 1−xy ) w h ere x ≥ 0 , y ≥0 , xy <1 etc., and solve simple
problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10Periods (L: 6 – T: 4)
11.Solution of Simultaneous equations using Matrices & Determinants.: System of linear equations
in 3 Variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule, Matrix inversion method – Examples- Elementary
row operations on Matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of equations in 3
unknowns .
12. Solutions of triangles:Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS) (ii) two sides and an
Included angle (SAS) (iii) one side and two angles are given (SAA) - Simple problems.
Suggested Learning Outcomes
Algebra
UNIT – I
1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations

1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
46
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational
2. Proper and
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below into
partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii ) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c) ( x  a) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) iv )
( x 2  a )( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b) 2
UNIT – II
3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems

3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square matrices).
3.3 Compute sum, difference,scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive,
commutative properties with examples and counter examples.
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices with
examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.13 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
Trigonometry:
UNIT – III
4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles
47
4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B) and
cot(A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 , sin750 ,
cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
4.3 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2B etc.,
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- Multiple Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in terms of
angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sinA= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
UNIT – IV
6.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles

6.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
7.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
7.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
7.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
8.1 Define complex number, its modulus, conjugate and list their properties.
8.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
8.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
8.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
UNIT – V
9.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry

9.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios in to a
product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.
9.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three or
more terms.
10.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
48
10.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an appropriate
domain and range.
10.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
10.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin -1x, express
angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
10.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin -

1
x+cos-1 x = 2 etc.
10.5 Derive formulae like

tan
1
x  tan
1
y  tan
1
 
x y
1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1
etc., and solve simple problems.
UNIT – VI
11.0 Apply Matrices and Determinants in solving system of Linear Equations
11.1 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule.

11.2 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
11.3 State elementary row operations.
11.4 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method
12.0 Apply Properties of Triangles to solve a triangle.

12.1 Solve a triangle when (i) three sides(SSS), (ii) two sides and an included angle(SAS), (iii)
one side and two angles are given(SAA).
References
1. Text Book of Matrices – by Shanti Narayan
2. Plane Trigonometry - by S.L.Loney
3. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI, XII .
4. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (TeluguAcademy)
Suggested E-Learning references
49
1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
I SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT Steps
1. Mathematical concepts
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
4. Working with others
5. Mathematical errors
ACTIVITIES
1 . Prepare a presentation to explain Logarithms.
2. Prepare a list of articles purchased from a super market and arrange in a matrix form to compute
the total amount using matrix multiplication.
50
3. Prepare a presentation to resolve a Partial fraction into simpler fractions.
4. Prepare a presentation stating the applications of Trigonometry.
5.List the methods to solve system of equations using Matrices and Determinants. Describe their
features.
6. Visit the library, refer books on Mathematics and collect the detailsrelated to 2 Mathematicians.
7. Prepare a presentation to solve a triangle ABC in different cases.
CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
Rubrics for Activity assessment
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows
Concepts complete substantial some very limited
understanding of understanding of understanding of understanding of
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical the underlying
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed concepts needed
solve the solve the to solve the to solve the
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). problem(s) OR is
not written.
Procedures Typically, uses an Typically, uses an Sometimes uses an Rarely uses an
efficient and effective effective effective
effective procedure to solve procedure to solve procedure to solve
procedure to solve the problem(s). problems, but does problems.
the problem(s). not do it
consistently.
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is Explanation is a Explanation is
detailed and clear. clear. little difficult to difficult to
understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
51
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner cooperated with work effectively
listening to but had trouble others, but needed with others.
suggestions of listening to others prompting to stay
others and working and/or working on-task.
cooperatively cooperatively.
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85-89%) Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and solutions of the steps and the steps and the steps and
have no solutions have no solutions have no solutions have
mathematical mathematical mathematical mathematical
errors. errors. errors. errors.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS
AVER
S.NO PIN CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7
AGE
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration- 1 Hour)
1 Marks
20 Marks
No. of
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
MID SEM - II EXAM (Duration- 1 Hour)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration- 2 Hours)
52
1 Mark
No. of 40 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
603
C18-common-102F
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM - i EXAMINATION (C-18)
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find the value of

log8 2
2. Define Proper fraction and give an example.
[ 1 2¿]¿¿¿
3. If A= ¿ Compute 3A+ 5B.
53
4. Find the value of |13 24|
.
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
x
5 a). Resolve : in to partial fractions
( x−1 ) (x−2)
Or
+3
5 b) Find the value of log 2 16 log 8 32
2 1 2
6 a). If
( )
1 4 1 , then Compute A2 +2 A−3 I , where I is a unit matrix of order 3 .
1 3 2
Or
1 0 0
6 b). Find x , if
|2 3 4 =48
5 −6 x |
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
9
Resolve into Partial fractions : ( x  1)( x  2)
2
7 a).
Or
75 5 32
7b) . Prove that log −2 log +log =log 2
60 9 243
1 1 2 2
8 a). If A=
3 [ ] −1
2 1 −2 , t h en s h ow t h at A = A
−2 2 −1
T
54
Or
b +c a a
8 b). Show that
| b
c
c +a
c a+ b |
b =4 abc .
@@@
C18-common-102F

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM -I i EXAMINATION (C-18)
PART-A
1. Write the formulae for Sin (A - B) and Cos (A – B)
2. If Tan A = 2, Find the value of Cos2A.
3. Write the formula for Cosine rule.
2
4. Find the Modulus of 3  2i
PART-B
cos 12+sin 12
5 a). Show that = Tan570 .
cos 12−sin 12
Or
√3
5 b). Prove that Cos200 Cos300 Cos400 Cos800 = 16 .
55
6 a). Write any 3 formulae from Hyperbolic functions.
Or
1
6 b). Find the modulus of z=
2+4 i
PART C
1 1 π
7a). If TanA= ∧TanB= t h en s h ow t h at A+ B=
2 3 4
Or
7 b) If A+ B=1350 ,t h en prove t h at ( 1+ CotA ) ( 1+CotB )=2
8 a) Find the additive and multiplicative Inverse of 4 + 3i
Or
1+i
8 b) Express the complex number in Exponential form
1−i
@@@
C18-common
C18-common-102F

BOARD DIPLOMA END SEMESTER EXAMINATION (C-18)
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]
PART-A
1. Define proper fraction.
56
2. Write the formula for cos ( A+ B ) ∧cot ( A + B ) .
3. Define solution of a triangle.
4. Find the value of log 4 16.
5. Convert cos 4 A+cos 6 A into product.
−1 3
6. If sin =A , find cotA.
5
7. List the elements of a triangle ABC.
8. What is the formula for the solution of triangle ABC when three sides are given.
PART-B
1
9(a). Resolve into partial fractions.
(x +1)( x +3)
OR
sin 8 A+sin 6 A
9(b). Prove that =tan 7 A
cos 8 A+cos 6 A
9
10(a). Express in the form of a+ib .
4+ 3i
OR
10 (b). Solve the triangle ABC with a=2, A=300 , C=300 .
11 (a). Prove that sin 500−sin70 0+ sin10 0=0 .
OR
−1 2 1 17
11 (b). Prove that tan +tan −1 =tan−1 .
7 5 33
12 (a). Solve [ 32 −32 ][ xy ]=[ 47 ] .

OR
12 (b). Find the angle C in any triangle ABC if b=√ 2 ,c =√ 3 , B=450 .
PART C
57
1 2 2
[ ]
13(a). Find the inverse of the matrix 2 1 2
2 2 1
OR
13 (b). Prove that sinA +sin ( 1200 + A ) −sin ( 1200− A )=0
0 0 0 0 1
14 (a). Prove that cos 20 cos 40 cos 60 cos 80 = .
16
OR
14 (b). Solve x + y + z=6 , x+ 2 y +3 z=14 , x +4 y+ 9 z=3 6y using Gauss Jordan method.
15(a). In any triangle ABC prove that sin 2 A +sin 2 B+sin 2 C=4 sinAsinBsinC .
OR
15 (b). If tan−1 x + tan−1 y+ tan −1 z=π then prove that x + y + z=xyz .
16 (a). Solve x +2 y −z=−3 , 3 x+ y + z=4 , x− y +2 z=6 by Cramer’s Rule.
OR
16 (b). Solve the triangle ABC with a=1 b=2 c= √ 2.
@@@
BASIC PHYSICS
Course Title Basic Physics Course Code 18Common-103F

Semester Semester-I Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme in 30:15:0Hrs Credits 3
Pds/Hrs(L:T:P) 40:20:00 Pds
Type of course Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Hrs 60Pds
CIE 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
Pre requisites: Basic High school science, basic mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Engineering Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course outcomes (CO):
58
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching
Hours
Write the correct units and dimensions of physical

CO 1 quantities and know the concept of friction PO1,PO2 10
Apply knowledge of vectors as a tool to solve engineering

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of mechanics to solve engineering
CO 3 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of properties of matter to understand
CO 4 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply Heat and thermodynamic processes to solve
CO 5 PO1, PO2 10
Apply conservation laws to engineering problems and PO1, PO2,
CO 6 10
utilization of energy sources PO3,PO6
Time Schedule
Unit
Unit Name Periods
No
1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION 10

2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS 10
3 MECHANICS 10
4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER 10
5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS 10
6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGY SOURCES 10
TOTAL 60
COURSE CONTENTS
1. UNIT – 1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION
Duration: 10 periods (L: 6.0 – T: 4.0)

59
Physical quantity - Fundamental and derived quantities – Unit –definitions - S.I units -
Advantages of S.I. units - Dimensions and dimensional formula - definitions-units and
dimensional formula for physical quantities - Principle of homogeneity - Applications of
dimensional analysis–Friction – causes - types of friction - Normal reaction - Laws of static
friction - coefficients of friction - expression-rough horizontal surface - expressions for
Acceleration, Displacement, Time taken to come to rest and Work done - Advantages and
disadvantages of friction - Methods to reduce friction – Problems on friction only.
2. UNIT – 2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Scalar and vector quantities – definitions and examples –Graphical representation of a vector
- Classification of vectors (Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector,
Collinear vector and Position vector) Resolution of vector - Triangle law of vector addition –
Parallelogram law of vectors – statement- expression for magnitude and direction of
resultant vector –derivation- illustrations (working of sling and flying bird) - Representation
of a vector in unit vectors i, j and k– Scalar product of vectors-definition- application to work
done by force – properties of scalar product - Vector product of vectors –definition – Right
hand thumb rule and right hand screw rule - application to moment of force - properties of
vector product - area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of vector product - related
problems
3. UNIT – 3 MECHANICS Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Projectile motion – definition - examples - Horizontal projection – Time of flight and

Horizontal range – derivations - Oblique projection – Expression for path of a projectile in
oblique projection - derivation– Maximum height, Time of ascent, Time of descent, Time of
flight, Horizontal range and maximum horizontal range - derivations – Circular motion,
angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions–Definitions– Relation between
linear velocity and angular velocity - derivation–centripetal force – centrifugal force –
definitions and expressions only- application (banking of curved path) - angle of banking-
expression only - related problems
4. UNIT – 4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Elasticity and plasticity- definitions – examples - Stress and Strain – definitions and
expressions - elastic limit - Hooke’s law – statement - modulus of elasticity - Young’s
modulus – Derivation – Cohesive and adhesive forces - Surface tension - Illustrations -
Capillarity –angle of contact – definition- examples for capillarity- Formula for Surface
tension based on capillarity (no derivation) – Viscosity - Illustrations of viscosity - Newton’s
formula for viscous force – derivation - Coefficient of viscosity - Poiseuille’s equation - Effect
of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases– streamlines - laminar flow - turbulent flow
- Reynold’s number - equation of continuity – statement - related problems.
5. UNIT – 5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
60
Heat – expansion of gases - Boyle’s law –concept of absolute zero - Absolute scale of
temperature – Charles’ laws - Ideal gas equation – derivation - value of universal gas
constant ‘R’ –Isothermal and Adiabatic processes - Differences between isothermal and
adiabatic processes - Internal energy and external work done – Expression for work done –
derivation – first law of thermodynamics –application of first law to isothermal and adiabatic
processes - second law of thermodynamics – specific heat of a gas – molar specific heat of a
gas – definitions – derive relation between C P and Cv - related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGYSOURCES

Work and Energy - Potential Energy and kinetic energy–examples – expressions for PE and KE -
derivations - Work-Energy theorem – derivation – Law of conservation of energy – examples
- Law of conservation of energy in the case of freely falling body – proof – Illustration of
conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum– Non renewable and renewable
energy sources – definition and applications (solar cooker, wind mill and biogas) – Green
house effect - related problems
Suggested learning outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. know the concepts of units, dimensions and friction
1.1 Define Physical quantity, fundamental quantity and derived physical quantities
1.2 Define Unit.
1.3 S.I. Units. List the advantages of S.I. units.
1.4 Define dimensions and dimensional formula.
1.5 Write dimensional formulae of physical quantities.
1.6 State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
1.7 State applications of dimensional analysis.
1.8 Define friction and state its causes.
1.9 State types of friction.
1.10 Explain normal reaction.
1.11 State laws of static friction.
1.12 Define coefficients of friction.
1.13 Derive expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
1.14 Derive expressions for displacement and time taken to come to rest and work done in the
case of a body moving on a rough horizontal surface.
1.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
1.16 Solve related numerical problems on friction only.
1.17 Explain the Methods to reduce friction.
2. know the concepts of Elements of Vectors
61
2.1 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.
2.2 Represent a vector graphically.
2.3 Classify types of vectors – Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector,
Collinear vectors and Position vector.
2.4 Resolve a vector – Vector and Scalar components and relation between them.
2.5 State and explain Triangle law of vector addition.
2.6 State Parallelogram law of vectors – derive expressions for magnitude and direction of
resultant vector.
2.7 Illustrations of parallelogram law – working of sling and flying bird.
2.8 Representation of a vector in terms of unit vectors (i, j ,k)
2.9 Define Scalar product of vectors.
2.10 Application of scalar product for work done by force.
2.11 List the properties of scalar product.
2.12 Define Vector product of vectors.
2.13 Explain Right hand screw rule and right hand thumb rule.
2.14 Apply vector product in the case of moment of force.
2.15 Expressions for area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of cross product.
2.16 List the properties of vector product.
2.17 Solve related problems.
3. know the concepts of Mechanics
3.1 Define Projectile motion with examples.

3.2 Define Horizontal projection – Derive expressions for (a) Time of flight and (b)
Horizontal range
3.3 Define Oblique projection- Derive expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
3.4 Derive expressions for (a) Maximum height (b) Time of ascent (c) Time of descent
(d) Time of flight (e) Horizontal range and (f) maximum horizontal range in oblique
projection.
3.5 Define circular motion.
3.6 Define angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions in circular motion.
3.7 Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
3.8 Define centripetal and centrifugal forces. Write their expressions.
3.9 Define angle of banking.
3.10 Explain banking of curved path and write the expression for angle of banking.
3.11 Solve related numerical problems.
4. know the concepts of Properties of matter
4.1 Define the terms Elasticity and Plasticity with examples.

4.2 Define Stress and Strain and write their expressions.
4.3 Define elastic limit and state Hooke’s law.
4.4 Define modulus of elasticity.
4.5 Define Young’s modulus.
4.6 Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
4.7 Define cohesive force and adhesive force.
4.8 Define Surface tension. Give illustrations of Surface tension.
4.9 Define capillarity and angle of contact.
4.10 List the examples for capillarity.
62
4.11 Write the formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (T = ½ hdgr). Explain the terms.
4.12 Define Viscosity. Give illustrations of viscosity.
4.13 Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
4.14 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.15 Write Poiseuille’s equation for coefficient of viscosity.
4.16 Discuss effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
4.17 Define streamline flow and turbulent flow.
4.18 Define Reynold’s number.
4.19 State equation of continuity and explain the terms with diagram.
4.20 Solve related problems.
5. know the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics
5.1 Explain expansion of gases.

5.2 State and explain Boyle’s law. Mention its limitations.
5.3 Explain concept of absolute zero using the relations P t=P0(1+t/273) and Vt= V0(1+ t/273)
5.4 Define Absolute scale of temperature.
5.5 State Charles’ laws in terms of absolute temperature.
5.6 Define Ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.
5.7 Calculate the value of Universal gas constant (R).
5.8 State gas equation in terms of density.
5.9 Define Isothermal and Adiabatic processes.
5.10 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.11 Explain the terms internal energy and external work done.
5.12 Derive the expression for work done by the gas [W=P(V 2-V1)].
5.13 State first law of thermodynamics.
5.14 Application of first law of thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.15 State second law of thermodynamics.
5.16 Define specific heat of a gas.
5.17 Define molar specific heat of a gas.
5.18 Derive the relation between C P, Cv and R.
5.19 Solve related problems
6. know the concepts of conservation laws and energy sources
6.1 Define work and energy.

6.2 Define potential energy and kinetic energy with examples.
6.3 Derive the expressions for Potential energy and Kinetic energy.
6.4 State and prove Work-Energy theorem.
6.5 State law of conservation of energy with example.
6.6 Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
6.7 Illustrate law of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum.
6.8 Define non renewable and renewable energy sources. Give examples.
6.9 Explain solar cooker, wind mill and biogas.
6.10 Explain briefly Green house effect.

63
1. Student visits Library to refer Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications.
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Physics Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Seminar
5. Group discussion
6. Surprise test
References:
1. Engineering. Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
SEMESTER – I
SKILL UPGRATION – BASIC PHYSICS
TASK
LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)
LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure
LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment
LEVEL 4: Interpretation/inference/evaluation.
Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:
(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author,
publisher, edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
Activies:-
1. Discover some physical equations and apply principle of homogeneity.
2. Visit your College Physics laboratory. Collect equal amounts (mass in gm) of water and
mercury. Calculate the density of each in CGS units. Express them in SI system of units
using dimensional analysis. Infer the result.
3. Identify the bodies which have rolling objects like wheels, ball bearings. Prepare a chart
with drawings and explain the importance of rolling friction.
64
4. Identify the objects where you apply various methods of reducing friction. Make each
method as a module to one individual. Integrate all modules and generate a chart with brief
explanation by the use of drawings.
5. Take two vectors with varying angles of inclination. Find the resultant using triangle law of
vector addition by drawing the vectors in each case on a graph paper. Draw the conclusions.
Correlate the result using parallelogram law of vector addition.
6. Three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting on a body with an angles θ1, θ2, and θ3 with the
horizontal respectively. Calculate the resultant force acting on that body. Draw the
diagram.
7. Survey the places where curved paths are banked. Take photographs and reconstruct on
the chart. Prepare a report.
8. Verify Hooke’s Law by performing experiment using weights, spring and ruler.
9. Explore the internet. Prepare a power point report on surface tension and wetting.
10. Construct a model thermometer having centigrade scale and absolute scale with the help of
available simple objects. Formulate the method of development.
11. Debate on green house effect and global warming. Justify the advantage of green house
effect. Prepare a video clip and power point report with diagrams.
12. Design a mini wind mill as an application of conversion of energy.
NOTE:The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity relevant
to the course based on resources available.
Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Application of principle of homogeneity PO1, PO2 3
CO2 Conversion of one system to other system
PO1, PO2, PO3 3
using dimensions
CO3 Preparation of a chart with drawings
PO1, PO2, PO8 3
explaining the importance of friction
CO4 Preparation of a chart on reducing friction PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
PO5, PO8
CO5 Triangle law of vector addition - graphical
analysis – correlation with parallelogram law PO1, PO4, 3
of vector addition
CO6 Calculation of resultant force by component
PO1, PO2, PO4 3
method
CO7 Banking of roads – practical observations PO1, PO2, PO5 3
CO8 Verification of Hooke’s law with simple PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
materials PO4
65
CO9 Power point report on surface tension and PO1, PO2, PO7,
3
wetting by exploring internet PO9, PO10,
CO10 Construct a model thermometer having
centigrade scale and absolute scale. Formulate PO1, PO2, PO4 3
the development.
CO11 Debate ongreen house effect and global
warming. Advantage of green house effect -
PO6, PO7 3
justification. Prepare a video clip and power
point report with diagrams.
CO12 Design a wind mill as an application of
PO1, PO2,PO10 3
conversion of energy
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material was All All Data/Material
was collected one collected more than Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- were outlined in were outlined
by-step fashion that step fashion that a step-by-step were incomplete
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
Methodology/ by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
Procedure additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after
accomplish this. expert
feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
PASS SCORE: 2.
66
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
AVE
S. Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) RAG
N PIN E
O CO CO CO
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8 CO9
10 11 12
Draft committee
1. Dr V.V.M. Jagannadha Rao, Faculty of Physics and Head of General Section, Govt
Polytechnic, Narayankhed.
2. Sri M. Shyamsunder Reddy, Senior Lecturer in Physics, Govt Institute of Electronics
Secunderabad.
3. Dr V.Laxmi Narasimha Rao, Lecturer in Physics, Govt Polytechnic, Masab Tank, Hyderabad
4. Sri A. Jayakrishna Murthy, Lecturer in Physics, Govt Polytechnic, Yadagirigutta
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 Marks
20 Marks
No. of
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
MID SEM - II EXAM (Duration 1 hour)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration 2 hours)
1 Mark
Marks/Question each 3 Marks each 5 Marks each 40 Marks
No. of 8 Questions 4/8 Questions 4/8 Questions
67
Questions
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
603
C-18 COMMON-103F

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM- I EXAMINATION (C-18)
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page
1. Define unit.
2. State principle of homogeneity.
3. Define vector quantity.
4. Define position vector.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page
5 (a). State three laws of static friction.
68
(OR)
(b). State three applications of dimensional analysis.
6 (a). State and explain triangle law of vector addition.
(OR)
(b). State any three properties of scalar product of two vectors.
PART-C (2×5=10M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages
7 (a). Derive the expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
(OR)
(b). Explain any five methods of reducing friction.
8 (a). Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors using parallelogram
law of vectors.
(OR)
(b). Find the area of parallelogram formed by two vectors
^ ^j+5 k^ ∧⃗
A=2 i+3
⃗ ^
B =2 i−3 ^j + k^ as two adjacent sides.
C-18 COMMON-103F

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM-I I EXAMINATION (C-18)
BASIC PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define projectile.
2. Define centripetal force.
3. Define stress.
69
4. Write the formula for surface tension based on capillarity.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). A body is projected into air with velocity of 20 ms -1 at an angle 300 with the earth
surface. Find the maximum height reached.
(OR)
(b). Explain banking of curved path.
6 (a). Distinguish between Cohesive force and Adhesive force.

(OR)
(b). Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive the expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.

(OR)
(b). Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
8 (a). Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
(OR)
(b). Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
C-18 COMMON-103F

BOARD DIPLOMA ENID SEMESTER EXAMINATION (C-18)
BASIC PHYSICS
2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=8

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
70
1. Write dimensional formula of Pressure.
2. Define modulus of elasticity.
3. Define non renewable energy source.
4. Define absolute zero.
5. State Charles’ constant pressure law.
6. Define molar specific heat of a gas.
7. Define Energy.
8. What is basic principle of wind mill?
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). State any three laws of friction.

(or)
9(b). State first law of thermodynamics and write mathematical expression for it.
10(a). Distinguish between streamline and turbulent flow.

(or)
10(b). Derive an expression for Potential energy.
11(a). Derive formula for work done by the ideal gas.

(or)
11(b). Calculate the value of universal gas constant ( R ).
12(a). Prove work-energy theorem.

(or)
12(b). Explain briefly Green house effect.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors.
(or)
13(b). Show that Cp - Cv = R.
14(a). Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique projection.
(or)
14(b). Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
15(a). Derive Ideal gas equation PV=RT

(or)
15(b). Distinguish between Isothermal and adiabatic processes.
71
16(a). Derive an expression for kinetic energy.
(or)
16(b). Explain solar cooker with neat diagram
** *** ***
Draft committee
5. Dr M.E. Jaya Raj, Faculty of Physics and Head of General Section, Govt Polytechnic for
Women, Badangpet.
Secunderabad.
9. Sri A. Jayakrishna Murthy, Lecturer in Physics, Govt Polytechnic, Yadagirigutta.
GENERAL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Course Title:General Engineering Chemistry Course Code: 18-Common-104F

Semester :Semester I
Teaching Scheme in Hrs(L:T:P) : 30:15:0 Course Group : Foundation
Type of course : Lecture + Assignments Credits :3
CIE : 60 Marks Total Contact Hours :60Pds
SEE : 40 Marks
Prerequisite:Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome: On successful completion of of the course, the students will have ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods
CO1 Explain Bohr’s atomic model, the R/U/A 1,2,9 12

different types of chemical bonding in
certain molecules and concept of
oxidation, reduction and oxidation
number
72
CO2 Understand and explain mole, R/U/A 1,2,9 8
molarity and normality and solve the
problems and colloids and their
applications.
CO3 Explain the different theories of acids R/U/A 1,2,3,9 12
and bases , concept of pH, buffer
solutions and buffer action.
CO4 Compare the renewable and non R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10 8
renewable energy sources, to take
measures to protect the biodiversity
and also the environment.
CO5 Distinguish the temporary and R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
permanent hardness, apply the
different methods of softening of hard
water and desalination.
CO6 Explain electrolysis and applications of R/U/A 12,3, 4. 10
electrolysis, Solve the problems on
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
Total Periods 60
Cognitive levels: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I: Fundamentals of Chemistry (12Periods)
Atomic Structure: Introduction – Atomic number – Mass number- Bohr's Atomic theory - Aufbau
principle - Hund's rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals,shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configuration of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – Electronic theory of valency - Types of chemical bonds - Ionic,
covalent and co-ordinate covalent bond with examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent
compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: ElectronicConcepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations.
UNIT-II: Solutions and Colloids (8Periods)

Introduction-Classification of solutions based on physical state- Molecular weights ,Equivalent
weights- Expression of concentration – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Numerical problems on
Mole,molarityand normality - Colloids- Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic- Industrial
applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: Acids and Bases (12 Periods)

Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations - Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory
- Lewis acid base theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical problems - Buffer
solutions- buffer action - Applications of buffer solution.
UNIT-IV: Environmental Studies-I (8Periods)

Introduction - environment -scope and importance of environmental studies- important terms -
renewable and non renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers,consumers and
73
decomposers - Biodiversity, definition and threats to Biodiversity- Forest resources- Over
exploitation-Deforestation.
UNIT-V: Water Technology (10 Periods)

Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness – types of hardness -disadvantages of hard
water - degree of hardness (ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
process - drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose - Osmosis, Reverse
Osmosis - advantages of Reverse osmosis – Desalination by Electro -dialysis – Defluoridation –
Nalgonda technique.
UNIT-VI: Electrochemistry: (10 periods)
Conductors, insulators, electrolytes –Types of electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic

dissociation - Electrolysis –Electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl – applications of electrolysis-
Faraday's laws of electrolysis- numerical problems.
Reference Books :
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.

2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to
UNIT- I: FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY

1.1 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.3 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's exclusion principle with examples.
1.4 Define Orbital.
1.5 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
1.6 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.7 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.8 Define chemical bond.
1.9 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.10 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate
Covalent bond with examples.
1.11 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO.
1.12 List the Properties of Ionic compounds.
1.13 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen
Molecules using Lewis dot method.
1.14 List the Properties of Covalent compounds.
1.15 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent compounds.
74
1.16 Electronic concept of Oxidation and Reduction.
1.17 Define Oxidation Number
1.18 Calculate the Oxidation Number.
UNIT-II: SOLUTIONS AND COLLOIDS

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Calculate Molecular weight and equivalent weights of acids, bases and salts.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define Molarity and Normality.
2.7 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality.
2.8 Define Colloids .
2.9 Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic.
2.10 Industrial applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: ACIDS AND BASES

3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water.
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale.
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
3.10 Define buffer solutions and give examples of acidic and basic buffers.
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
3.12 Explain the buffer action of acidic and basic buffers.
UNIT-IV: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I

4.1 Define the term environment
4.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
4.3 Define and understand the following terms
1) Lithosphere, 2) Hydrosphere, 3) Atmosphere, 4) Biosphere, 5) Pollutant, 6) Contaminant
7) Pollution, 8) receptor, 9)sink, 10) particulates, 11) Dissolved oxygen (DO),
12) Threshold limit value (TLV),13).BOD and 14).COD
4.4 Explain the growing energy needs.
4.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable (conventional) energy sources
with examples.
4.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic components of ecosystem.
4.7 Define and explain the terms:
1) Producers, 2) Consumers and 3) Decomposers with examples.
4.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity.
4.9 Explain the uses of forests and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation..
UNIT V: WATER TECHNOLOGY

5.1 State the various Sources of water.
5.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
75
5.3 Define hardness of water.
5.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
5.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
5.6 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.7 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L) and numerical problems related
to hardness.
5.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) permutit process b).Ion-Exchange
process.
5.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
5.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
5.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis(RO).
5.12 List the applications and advantages of RO.
5.13 Desalination of sea water by Electro dialysis.
5.14 Defluoridation - Nalgonda Technique.
UNIT VI: ELECTROCHEMISTRY

6.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non - electrolyte
6.2 Types of electrolytes.- strong and weak electrolytes with examples.
6.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic conductors.
6.4 Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
6.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl
6.6 Applications of Electrolysis- Electroplating-Electrolytic refining of metal (Copper)
6.7 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
6.8 Define Chemical equivalent, Electrochemical equivalent.
6.9 Relationship between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent
6.10 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of electrolysis
Suggested Student Activities or Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1.Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2.Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3..Quiz
4.Group discussion
76
5. Seminar
6.Surprise test
E - learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in

Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities (RUBRICS)
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of orbitals and electronic configuration:
Step-1: Data collection on orbitals and rules to be followed to write the electronic
configuration .
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on shapes of orbitals and electronic
configuration
Step-3: Explain the electronic configuration with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submission of the report.
Activity – 2
Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding:
Step-1: Data collection on electronic configuration and chemical bonding.

Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding
Step-3: Explain the ionic and covalent bonding with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.
Activity – 3
Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data collected.
Step -3: Preparation/ collection of true solution, colloidal solution and suspention
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of physical properties likeNature of the solutions,
Diffusion of the solution, Sedimentation, Visibility of particles, Tyndall effect.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity
Activity – 4
77
Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample collected from various sources.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Collection of water samples from various sources.
Step-4: Recording the pH values of different water samples by using universal indicator, pH paper,
pH
meter etc.
Activity – 5
Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources.

Step -3: Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources available.
Step-4: Identify the advantages of renewable energy sources over non renewable energy sources in
protecting the environment.
Activity – 6
Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in your surroundings.

Step -3: Study of the biotic and abiotic components and effect of the pollutants if any on them.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected ecosystem and suggest measures to protect it from
pollution.
Activity – 7
Study of bio diversity in your surroundings.
Step -3: Study of the biodiversity in your surroundings, understand its advantages and threats that
affect the bio diversity.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected bio diversity and suggest measures to protect it.
Activity – 8
Importance of forests resources.
78
Step -3: Study of the nearby forest area.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the forest selected and report its importance and resources.
Activity – 9
Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis.

Step -3: Demonstrate the process of osmosis and reverse osmosis by using any semi permeable
membrane .
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
Activity – 10
Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your residence .

Step -3: Explanation of the process through oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of the process.
Activity – 11
Oral/Power point presentation on the softening of water by different methods and comparison.
Step -3: Explain the process and compare them with the help of power point presentation.
Step-4: Submit the report.
Activity – 12
Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes .

Step -3: Differentiate the electrolyte from non electrolyte through the process of electrolysis.
Step-4: Prepare a report on electrolytes and non electrolytes.
Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.
Mapping of POs to Skill Upgradation Activities
79
S.N Name of the activity Linked POs
o
1 Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of 1,2,4,8,9
orbitals and electronic configuration
2 Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent 1,2,4,8,9
bonding
3 Preparation and study of physical properties of True 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension
4 Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
collected from various sources
5 Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
sources
6 Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
your surroundings
7 Study of bio diversity in your surroundings 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Importance of forests resources 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
9 Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
10 Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your 1,2,4,5,8,9
residence
11 Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes 1,2,3,4,8,9
12 Power point presentation on the softening of water by 1,2,3,4,8,9
different methods and comparison
Model Rubrics
S. Sub Performance
N activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
o improvement
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all materials The materials and The materials
data required for and data required data required for and data
the activity were for the activity the activity were required for the
accurately were accurately accurately activity were
prepared based on prepared based on prepared based inaccurately
the data collected the data collected on the data prepared
independently. independently. collected with the
help of teacher.
that could be require explanation or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by anyone & performed the require the activity in a
& performed the activity effectively. explanation & poor way
activity effectively. performed the
activity normally
80
the activity in the activity in about the activity about the
logical, interesting logical sequence in logical activity
sequence with with visuals or sequence with without
attractive visuals or diagrams. less visuals or sequence and
diagrams. diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusio Provided a detailed Provided a Student provided Conclusions
n/ conclusion/ conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary summary clearly summary clearly summary less not relevant.
based on the data based on the data effectively
and activity and activity
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity.
Draft Committee
1. D. Ramchander, Senior Lecturer in Chemistry, GPW(M), Badangpet.

2. Dr G. Narender Reddy, Senior Lecturer in Chemistry, GPT, Yadagirigutta.
3. Smt L. Seetha, Lecturer in Chemistry, SGMGPT, Abdullapurmet.
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 Marks
20 Marks
No. of
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

Marks/Question 1 Mark 3 Marks each 5 Marks each 40 Marks
each
81
No. of
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
603
C18-common-104F

18common-104F General Engineering Chemistry
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks : 20
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. State Hund’s rule.

2. Write the electronic configuration of Cr.
3. Define mole.
4. What are colloids?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. Draw the shapes of s and d orbitals.

or
b. Explain the covalent bond formation in Nitrogen molecule by Lewis dot method.
6. a. Classify solutions based on their physical state.
or
82
b. Compare any three properties of lyophilic and lyophobic colloids.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Distinguish the ionic compounds from covalent compounds.

or
b. What is oxidation number? Find the oxidation number of ‘S’ in H 2SO4 and ‘Mn’ in KMnO4.
8. a. Define Molarity. Find the weight of H 2SO4 required to prepare 400 ml of 0.5M solution.
or
b. Define Normality. Calculate the normality of 500 ml solution containing 0.53 grams of
Na2CO3.
C18-common-104F

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM - II EXAMINATION (C-18)
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
Instructions: i. Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4X1=4
marks
1. What is conjugate acid base pair?

2. Define ionic product of water.
3. Define an ecosystem.
4. What is threshold limit value?
PART – B
5. a. What are the limitations of Arrhenius theory of acids and bases?

or
b. Explain the neutralization according to Lewis theory of acids and bases with an example.
6. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are renewable and non renewable energy sources? Give examples.
83
PART – C
7. a. Define pH. Find the pH of 0.5M NaOH solution.

or
b. What are buffer solutions? State the applications of buffer solutions.
8. a. What is Biodiversity. Explain any two threats to biodiversity.
or
b. What is deforestation? What are its consequences.
C18-common-104F

Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8X1=8
marks
1. Define atomic mass number.

2. What is biodiversity?
3. Define degree of hardness of water.
4. What are buffer solutions?
5. Define soft water and hard water.
6. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
7. Define the terms conductor and insulator.
8. What is an electrolyte?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12
Marks
9. a. State and explain Hund’ rule.

or
b. Write any six essential qualities of drinking water.
10. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are strong and weak electrolytes? Give examples.
11. a. Define reverse osmosis and state its advantages.
84
or
b. Explain defluoridation of water by Nalgonda technique
12. a. Distinguish between metallic and electrolytic conductors.
Or
b. State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.
PART – C 4 x 5 =20 Marks
Instructions:: 1.Answer the following questions.
2.Each question carries five marks
13. a. Find the molarity and normality of the solution containing 10.6 grams of Na 2CO3 in 2
litres of solution. .
or
b. Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of water containing the following salts
per litre
i. Ca(HCO3)2 =32.4 mg, ii. Mg(HCO3)2 = 29.2 mg, iii. CaSO4 =13.6 mg, iv. MgCl2 = 19 mg
14a. Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
or
b. Explain the process of electrolysis of fused NaCl.
15a. Explain the permutit process of softening of hard water with a neat diagram.
or
b. What are the disadvantages of using hard water in industries?
16a. Explain the process of electrolytic refining of copper.
Or
b. Calculate the weight of Al deposited on the cathode if 0.5 amperes of electric current is
passed through AlCl3 solution for 1 hour
Draft Committee

85
Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities (RUBRICS)
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of orbitals and electronic configuration:
Step-1: Data collection on orbitals and rules to be followed to write the electronic
configuration .
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on shapes of orbitals and electronic
configuration
Step-3: Explain the electronic configuration with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submission of the report.
Activity – 2
Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding:
Step-1: Data collection on electronic configuration and chemical bonding.

Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding
Step-3: Explain the ionic and covalent bonding with oral presentation or power point presentation
Activity – 3
Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension

Step-2: Summarization of data collected.
Step -3: Preparation/ collection of true solution, colloidal solution and suspention
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of physical properties likeNature of the solutions,
Diffusion of the solution, Sedimentation, Visibility of particles, Tyndall effect.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activit
Activity – 4
Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample collected from various sources.

Step -3: Collection of water samples from various sources.
Step-4: Recording the pH values of different water samples by using universal indicator, pH paper,
pH
meter etc.
86
Activity – 5
Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources.

Step -3: Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources available.
Step-4: Identify the advantages of renewable energy sources over non renewable energy sources in
protecting the environment.
Activity – 6
Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in your surroundings.

Step -3: Study of the biotic and abiotic components and effect of the pollutants if any on them.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected ecosystem and suggest measures to protect it from
pollution.
Activity – 7
Study of bio diversity in your surroundings.
Step -3: Study of the biodiversity in your surroundings, understand its advantages and threats that
affect the bio diversity.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected bio diversity and suggest measures to protect it.
Activity – 8
Importance of forests resources.

Step -3: Study of the nearby forest area.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the forest selected and report its importance and resources.
Activity – 9
Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
87
Step -3: Demonstrate the process of osmosis and reverse osmosis by using any semi permeable
membrane .
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
Activity – 10
Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your residence .

Step -3: Explanation of the process through oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of the process.
Activity – 11
Oral/Power point presentation on the softening of water by different methods and comparison.
Step -3: Explain the process and compare them with the help of power point presentation.
Step-4: Submit the report.
Activity – 12
Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes .

Step -3: Differentiate the electrolyte from non electrolyte through the process of electrolysis.
Step-4: Prepare a report on electrolytes and non electrolytes.
Mapping of POs to Skill Upgradation Activities

o
1 Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of 1,2,4,8,9
orbitals and electronic configuration
2 Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent 1,2,4,8,9
bonding
3 Preparation and study of physical properties of True 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension
4 Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
collected from various sources
5 Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
88
sources
6 Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
your surroundings
7 Study of bio diversity in your surroundings 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Importance of forests resources 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
9 Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
10 Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your 1,2,4,5,8,9
residence
11 Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes 1,2,3,4,8,9
12 Power point presentation on the softening of water by 1,2,3,4,8,9
different methods and comparison
Model Rubrics
S. Sub Performance
o improvement
help of teacher.
activity normally
diagrams.
89
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity.
Draft Committee

BUILDING MATERIALS
Course Title BUILDING MATERIALS Course Code 18AA-105C
Semester I Course group Core

Teaching scheme in
Hrs (L:T:P) 3:1:0 Credits 3
Total Contact
Type of Course Lecture +Assignments Hours 60
CIE 60 marks SEE 40 marks
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of English at Secondary school level
Course Outcomes
CO1 : : Identify and describe different types of building materials
CO2 : : Describe the various properties, uses and market trends of different types of materials
CO3 : Describe the suitability of different types of materials for different building parts and
constructions.
CO4 : Suggest materials for different types of construction activity
CO5 : Ask relevant questions about a new material and find out the properties, uses and market
trends of the new material by doing a market survey
Time Schedule
Unit Unit Name Hour

No
90
1 Stones 12
2 Bricks 12
3 Sand 08
4 Clay Products 08
5 Timber and timber products 08
6 Cement, mortars and concrete 12
Totals 60
Course Contents
Unit 1: Stones Duration: 12 Hours (L: T: )

Characteristics of good building stone, Common Varieties of stones, granites, marble, cuddapah-
slabs, shahbad stones, sand stone, lime stone, dressing of stones - purpose and uses.
Unit 2: Bricks Duration: 12 Hours (L: T: )

ISI specifications of bricks IS-1077-1971, Characteristics of good bricks, Uses of bricks, Uses and
properties of refractory bricks
Unit 3: Sand Duration: 08 Hours (L: T: )

River sand, Pit sand and Sea Sand.
Characteristics of the above sands, Uses of sand, Bulking of sand - Percentage of bulkage allowance
to be permitted, Crushed stone powder as substitute of sand
Unit4: Clay Products Duration: 08 Hours (L: T: )

Tiles - Types of tiles - Roofing tiles (Mangalore tiles only) Floortiles - Ceiling tiles - Wall tiles,
Characteristics of good tiles, Stoneware pipes – Uses, Porcelain and glazed tiles
Unit 5: Timber and Timber Products Duration: 08 Hours (L: T: )

Characteristics of good timber, Seasoning of timber - Importance, preservation of timber, common
varieties of timber used for different works - Doors, Windows, Framework, Centering, Flooring and
Cladding.
Wood Products - Veneer, Ply wood, Particle Board, Laminated
Board, Straw board, MDF, LDF and their uses
Unit 6: Cement, Mortars and Concrete Duration: 12 Hours (L: T: )
Ingredients of Cement, Classification of Cement - Ordinary Portland cement, quick -setting cement.
Rapid hardening cement, White cement, coloured cement, Characteristics of ordinary Portland
cement, Grades of cements , and their strength & uses, Blended cement.
Mortars and Concrete: Different types of mortars and concretes and their properties and uses,
Properties of sand, water, cement and metal in proportioning of mortars and concrete

1.0 STONES
1.1 Characteristics of good building stone.
1.2 Common Varieties of stones - granites, Marble, Cuddaph-slabs,Shahbad stones, sand stone,
lime stone.
1.3 Dressing of stones - purpose and uses.
2.0 BRICKS
2.1 ISI specifications of bricks IS-1077-1971.
91
2.2 Characteristics of good bricks.
2.3 Uses of bricks.
2.4 Uses and properties of refractory bricks, Fly ash bricks
3.0 SAND
3.1 River sand, Pit sand and Sea Sand.
3.2 Characteristics of the above sands.
3.3 Uses of sand.
3.4 Bulking of sand - Percentage of bulkage allowance to bepermitted.
3.5 Crushed stone powder as substitute of sand.
4.0 CLAY PRODUCTS
4.1 Tiles - Types of tiles - Roofing tiles (Mangalore tiles only) Floortiles - Ceiling tiles - Wall tiles.
4.2 Characteristics of good tiles.
4.3 Stoneware pipes - Uses.
4.4 Porcelain and glazed tiles.
5.0Timber and Timber Products:
5.1 Characteristics of good timber,
5.2 Seasoning of timber - Importance, preservation of timber,
5.3 Common varieties of timber used for different works - Doors, Windows, Framework,
Centering, Flooring and Cladding.
5.4 Wood Products - Veneer, Ply wood, Particle Board, Laminated
Board, Straw board, MDF, LDF and their uses
6.0 CEMENT
6.1 Ingredients of Cement
6.2 Classification of Cement - Ordinary Portland cement, quick -setting cement. Rapid hardening
cement, White cement,coloured cement.
6.3 Characteristics of ordinary Portland cement.
6.4 Grades of cements and their strength & uses.
6.5 Blended cement.
MORTARS
6.6 Classification of Mortars - Lime Mortar, Cement Mortar, SurkhiMortar, Blended mortar,
Gauged, Gypsum and Mud Motor.
6.7 Different proportions of ingredients in mortars for various works.
6.8 Preparation of cement Mortar.
6.9 Characteristics of good mortar.
CONCRETE:
6.10 State the proportions of plain and reinforced concrete for different building works.
6.11 Define the terms Fine aggregate, Coarse aggregate and workability.
6.12 Explain the importance of Hydration of cement and water cement ratio.
6.13 Explain the method of preparing concrete.
6.14 State the characteristics of Concrete.
6.15 State the advantages of ready mix concrete
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
92
1. Quiz
2. Group discussion
3. Seminar
4. Surprise tests
SKILL UPGRADATION PROJECTS
1. Make a detailed literaturestudy of the various building materials and prepare a scrap book
along with sketches, pictures and photographs.
2. A material/market survey is to be conducted to know the variety of different materials,
costing and applications. The material so collected shall be made in to a report as well as a
power point presentation.
3. Visits to industry to get familiarized with the manufacturing process. The following
industries may be visited: 1. Bricks 2. Clay products 3. Cement 4. Timber and timber
products
4. Students may visit museums where display of materials is done, and collect some of the
samples and able to analyze and explain them
5. Collect data on new materials/ alternate building materials from construction and research
organizations like CBRI, ROORKEE; NATIONAL COUNCIL FOR CEMENT AND BUILDING
MATERIALS, NCB BHAVAN; NATIOAL ACADEMY OF CONSTRUCTION; HOUSING AND
CONSTRUCTION WING OF CSIR. Visit the Research & Development wings of these
organizations if possible.
Recommneded Books:
1. Engineering Materials by S.C.Rangawala.
2. Engineering Materials by Sushilkumar.
3. Engineering Materials by G.J. Kulkarni.
4. Engineering Materials by P.C.Varghese.
Suggested E learning Resources.:
1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Building_material
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105102088/
3. http://www.journals.elsevier.com/construction-and-building-materials/
4. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/86/Building-Materials-and-Construction
CO-PO Mapping Matrix
COURSE OUTCOME CL Linked PO

CO1 Identify and describe different types of building R/U 1,2
materials
CO2 Describe the various properties, uses and market R/U/A 1,2
trends of different types of materials
CO3 Describe the suitability of different types of materials R/U/A 1,2,5
for different building parts and constructions
CO4 Suggest materials for different types of construction R/U/A 1,2,5,9
93
activity
CO5 Ask relevant questions about a new material and find R/U/A 1,2,10
out the properties, uses and market trends of the new
material by doing a market survey
Note:
1. A material museum is to be established for explaining the students, the characteristics, cost,
availability of each material.
2. Students should be sent for market survey to collect information about the materials
available in the market and update the product variations that the manufacturer has
brought in.
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 Marks
Marks/Question each 3 Marks each 5 Marks each 20 Marks
No. of Questions 4 Questions 2/4 Questions 2/4 Questions
S.No. Unit No. R U A Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

Marks/Question 1 Mark each 3 Marks each 5 Marks each
40 Marks
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
For theory subjects 18AA - 101 -105, 201-205, 301 -305, 401- 405, 501-504, 601- 603
94
MODEL QUESTION PAPERS
MID SEM 1 EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
C18-AA-105C, BUILDING MATERIALS
Time : 1 hour Max Marks: 20

Part A 4x1=4marks
Note: Answer all questions . Each question carries one mark
1. List any two common varieties of stone used in architecture.

2. Define a refractory brick
3. State any two uses of stone
4. State any two uses of brick
Part B 2x3=6marks
5. a) State any three characteristics of good building stone
OR
b) Write short notes on Lime stone.

6. a) State any three characteristics of good brick
OR
b) State the properties of refractory bricks
Part C 2x5=10marks
7. a) Describe how you will select a suitable stone for building a wall
OR
b) State the uses of Cuddapa slabs as a building material
8. a)State the IS specifications of good brick
OR
b) Describe how you will select a good brick for construction of a residence.
95
MODEL QUESTION PAPERS
MID SEM 2 EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
C18-AA-105C, BUILDING MATERIALS

Part A 4x1=4marks
1. List any two types of sand.

2. State the uses of crushed stone powder as a substitute for sand.
3. List any two types of tiles
4. State any two uses of tiles
Part B 2x3=6marks
5. a) State any three characteristics of good sand
OR
c) Write short notes on porcelain tiles.
6. a) State any three characteristics of good tile
OR
b) State the properties of glazed tiles
Part C 2x5=10marks
7. a) Describe how you will select suitable sand for building construction.
OR
b) Describe the suitability of pit sand and its disadvantages.
8. a) Describe the various uses of tiles in building industry.

OR
b) Describe how you will select good tiles for construction of a residence.

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM- II EXAMINATION (C-18)
C18-AA-105C BUILDING MATERIALS
Time: 2 hours Max marks: 40

Part A 8x1=8 marks
Note: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.
1. Draw any two surface finishes of stone
2. Define bulking of sand
3. Define seasoning of timber
96
4. List the ingredients of cement
5. List any two common varieties of timber
6. Define a veneer
7. List any two grades of cement
8. List any two types of cement
Part B 4x3=12 marks
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
9. a) Write short notes on Cuddapa slabs
OR
b) State any three advantages of seasoning of timber
10. a) State any three characteristics of good river sand
OR
b) Write short notes on white cement.
11. a) State any three characteristics of good timber
OR
b) Write short notes on teak wood
12. a) Write short notes on lime mortar
OR
b) Define hydration of cement and workability.
Part C 4x5=20 marks

Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
13. a) Describe how you would select a stone for building a retaining wall.
OR
b) What are the advantages of plywood when compared to teak wood
14. a) Describe how bulking of sand effects the use.
OR
b) Describe the process of mixing of concrete
15. a) Describe any one method of seasoning of timber
OR
b) Write short notes on block wood.
16. a) Describe the characteristics of good mortar
OR
b) Describe the characteristics of concrete.
ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE
Course Title ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE Course Code 18AA-106D
Semester I Course group Core
97
Teaching scheme
in Hrs (L:T:P) 1:0:2 Credits 1.5
Total Contact
Type of Course Lecture +Drawing Studio Hours 45
Prerequisites: The student should have basic knowledge of English and Geometry at Secondary
School level. An interest and aptitude for drawing is preferable
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Comprehend the importance of drawing as a communication tool and its relation with
architecture
CO2 : Identify, describe and select different types of drawing instruments for various drawings
and follow the methods to keep the drawing presentable.
CO3 : Identify the different grades of pencils and select them according to the type of drawing
CO4 : Identify and use different line types
CO5 : Comprehend the importance, use different styles of dimensioning and lettering and follow
the standards.
CO6 : Construct geometrical forms
CO7 Apply the knowledge of drawing on practical problems
Unit No Unit Name Hour
Introduction 3
1
Drawing instruments 3
2 Lines 6
3 Lettering 6
98
4 Dimensioning 9
5 Geometrical Constructions 9
6 Conics 9
Total 45
Course Content
Unit1: Introduction Duration: 3 hours(L: Studio: )
1.1 The importance of drawing in graphic communication.

1.2 Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of drawing
1.3 Role of drawing in architecture.
Drawing Instruments Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )

1.4 Basic tools of drawing: Straight line, curved lines, distances, T- Square, setsquare, compass,
Drawing board, French curves, inking pens ,Stencils, furniture templates, circles and ellipse
templates, parallel bar, adjustable setsquare,
1.5 Selections of pencils,
1.6 Care and maintenance of drawing sheet andinstruments.
1.7 Importance and contents of layout of sheet, title block
Unit2: Lines Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
2.1 Lines ,definition, quality of line

2.2 Line types and their uses for different purposes
2.3 Line weights
Unit3: Lettering Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )

3.1 Purpose of lettering
3.2 Guidelines for lettering
3.3 Recommended size of letters and numbers.
3.4 Types of lettering- vertical, italics, etc
3.5 Purpose of lettering
Unit4: Dimensioning Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )

4.1 Purpose of dimensioning
4.2 Size description of engineering object
4.3 Definition of dimensioning, size description, locations of features, Surface finish, fully
dimensioneddrawing.
4.4 Notation and tools for dimensioning, dimension line, extension line, leader line, arrow,
symbols, numbers and notes, rules to be observed.
4.5 Placing of dimension line- aligned, Unidirectional Arrangement of dimension- Chain, parallel,
combined, by coordinate methods.
4.6 Rules for dimensioning circles ,arcs, angles, chamfer, taperand narrow spaces.
Unit 5 : Geometrical Constructions Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )

99
5.1 Division of a line into given number of equal parts,
5.2 Bisectors, perpendiculars, parallel lines,
5.3 Tangents, tangential curves touching externally and internally, common exterior tangents,
common interior tangents, arc touching the sides of an angle,
5.4 Polygon- using set squares, using compass, circles method, inscribing and describing circles
`
Unit 6 : Conics Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )

6.1 Conics in eccentricity method, concentric circles method, rectangle method, intersecting
arcs method, parallelogram method, circles method
6.2 Non circular curves, involute, cycloid, helix,
6.3 Applications of drawing the path of a falling stone,

6.2 Movement of a point when controlled by one and two centres,
6.3 Path of a point on a bicycle wheel,
6.4 Scroll, shape of a shell.
6.5 Open belt and crossed belt, pulley arrangements
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Comprehend the importance of drawing
1.2 Drawing as an communication tool
1.3 The link between drawing and other subjects of architecture
Drawing Instruments
1.4 Select correct drawing instrument to draw horizontal, vertical and angular lines
1.5 Select correct instrument to draw small and large circles and arcs
1.6 Select correct instruments to measure the distance on a drawing
1.7 Layout of a drawing sheet and title block
2 Lines
2.1Draw correct line of definitive quality
2.2Draw lines of specified line weight
2.3Draw and use line types for different types of drawings
3 Lettering
3.2Draw drawing titles using vertical and sloping letters
3.2Select different types of lettering for a specified purpose in the drawing
3.3Use lettering stencils for creating text in the drawing
4 Dimensioning
4.1State the need for dimensioning a drawing according to specified standards
4.2Define dimensioning
4.3Select a dimensioning system
4.4 Dimensioning and notation of important features of the drawing
5 Geometrical Constructions
5.4 Construct divisors of lines,
100
5.5 Construct bisectors and tangents
5.6 Construct Parallel lines
5.7 Construct polygons
6 Conics
6.1 Construct conics
6.2Construct non circular curves.
6.3Trace the path of a falling stone
6.4 Path of a point controlled by one and two centers
6.5 Path of a point on bicycle wheel
6.6 Open belt arrangement of pulleys
6.7 Cross belt arrangement of pulleys
Student activities
1. Quiz
2. Assignments
3. Surprise Tests
Skill upgradation projects

1. Preparing posters on a. Drawing instruments b. Types of lines c. Line Weights d. types of
lettering, etc.
2. Prepare a scrap book with different geometrical forms cut in colored paper/ handmade
paper,etc.
3. Study of various geometrical forms and their properties in power point presentation..
Recommended books:
1. K.R.Gopalakrishna“Fundamentals of Drawing” Subhas Publications, 2010.
2. K.R.Gopalakrishna“Engineering Drawing” (Vol 1.), Subhas Publications, 2014.
3. Geometrical Art and Drawing - I. H.Morris.
4. Engineering Drawing – N.D.Bhatt
Suggested E-Learning resources
1. www.engineeringdrawing.org/
2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Engineering_drawing/
CO PO Mapping

CO1 : Comprehend and describe the importance R/U 1,2
of drawing as a communication tool
101
and its relation with architecture.
CO2 Identify, describe and select different R/U/A 1,2,3,4
types of drawing instruments for
various drawings and follow the
methods to keep the drawing
presentable.
CO3 Identify the different grades of pencils R/U/A 1,2,3,4,
and select them according to the type
of drawing
CO4 Identify, describe and use different line R/U/A 1,2,3
types
CO5 Comprehend the importance, describe R/U/A 1,2,3,4,7
and use different styles of
dimensioning and lettering
following the standards
CO6 Comprehend the importance, describe R/U/A 1,2,3
and use different styles of dimensioning
and lettering following the standards
CO7 Apply the knowledge of drawing on R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5
practical problems
EXAMINATION PATTERN
PART A PART B Total Marks
Marks/Question 2 Marks each 6 Marks each
No. of 20 Marks
Questions 4 Questions 2/4 Questions
S.No Unit
A
. No. U Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
Total Marks 8 12 20 Marks
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4

Marks/Question 4 Marks each 6 Marks each 40 Marks
102
No. of
S.No Unit
A
. No. U Remarks
1 UNIT I
1 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 6(a) or 6(b)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 7(a) or 7(b)
6 UNIT VI 4 8(a) or 8(b)
Total Questions 4 8
For subjects AA - 106, 107, 108, 206, 208,
C18-AA-106D

C18AA -106D, ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE
Time: 1 ½ hours Max Marks: 20
PART A 4X2=8MARKS
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries two marks.
1. Why do we need drawing?
2. What are the important points to remember while drawing?
3. Sketch and describe a T Square
4. Sketch and describe an engineering compass
PART B 6X2=12MARKS
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries six marks.
5. a) Draw a drawing board and describe it.
Or
b) State the objectives of drawing in architecture
6. a) Draw the different types of lines and describe the purpose of each line.
Or
b) How do we use lineweights in drawing..
C18-AA-106D
103

Time: 1 ½ hours Max Marks: 20

PART A 4X2=8MARKS
1. When is lettering used in a drawing?
2. Rewrite the following in 10mm height sentence case lettering.
“ Drawing is the language of architects”
3. List the parts of a dimension line
4. Redraw the following figure and dimension it in unidirectional system.
PART B 6X2=12MARKS
5. a) Rewrite the following sentence in vertical and capital letters of 12mm height.
“Form Follows Function- Frank Lloyd Wright”
Or
b) Describe various recommended sizes of letters.
6. a) Redraw the following figure and dimension it in continuous dimensioning
104
Or
b) Redraw the following figure and dimension it in the correct manner.
C18-AA-106D

Time: 2 hours Max Marks: 40

PART A 4X4=16MARKS
105
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries four marks.
1. State the objectives of drawing in architecture
2. Rewrite the following sentence in 12mm high italics
“ Less is More- Mies Van Der Rohe”
3. Divide a straight line AB of length 100mm into 11 parts using geometrical construction.
4. Draw an ellipse of major axis 120mm and minor axis 80mm using concentric circles method.
PART B 4X6=24MARKS
5. a) Draw and describe various types lines and the purpose of each line.
Or
b)Draw a neat sketch and describe the drawing board.
6. a) Rewrite the following sentence in 12mm high vertical capitals.
“ Drawing is the language of architects”

Or
b) Redraw the following figure and dimension it according to IS Codes.
7. a)Draw a circle of radius 50mm and divide its circumference into 12 equal parts.
Or
b) Draw a right angle and trisect it.
8. a)Draw an ellipse of major axis 120mm and minor axis 80mm using rectangle method.
Or
b) Draw an ellipse of major axis 100mm and minor axis 80mm using parallelogram method
when the included angle between the axii is 45 0
BASIC DESIGN
106
Course Title BASIC DESIGN Course Code 18AA -107 D
Semester I Course group core

Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of course Lecture + assignments Total Contact Hours 45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of drawing at Secondary school level
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Understanding design as a new language by sensitizing the students to the conceptual,
visual and perceptual issues involved in the design process
CO2 : Develop understanding and skillful use of the elements and principles of visual design
Learn to develop the skills to create solutions for simple elements of building in 2D/3D
CO3:

CO4 :
Society and articulation
CO5 : To know about color and its applications in design
CO6 : Scaled drawings of simple objects like different furniture pieces.
TIME SCHEDULE

1 Introduction to Art & Design 3
2 Elements of Design 6
3 Principles of Design 6
4 Color Theory 6
5 Scale & Measured Drawings 9
6 Design of building parts 15
Total 45
107
Course Contents
Unit1: Introduction to Art & Design Duration: 3 hours(L: Studio: )
1.1 Meaning of the term art and design

1.2 Definition of Graphic design
1.3 Role of design in society
2.0 Elements of Design Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
2.1 Conceptual elements: points, lines, planes and solids

2.2 Visual elements: size, shape, colour and texture
2.3 Designs may be symmetrical or asymmetrical.
2.4 Design drawings should be concept based and a composition must be prepared either floral,
Geometrical or abstract to bedone in colour.
2.5 Eg: prepare a design, using the following motifs in a rectangleof 12 X18 cm.
1) 3 circles of different sizes.
2) Three triangles of equal size.
3) Two unequal squares.
4) 3 curved lines.
3.0 Principles of Design Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
3.1 Composition, Balance, Rhythm, Proportion, Harmony, Contrast

3.2 Understand the term composition.
3.3 Composition of geometrical and non-geometrical forms
3.4 Know the design concepts and terms focal design, harmoniousdesign, contrast design and
abstract design and theirapplications in building designs.
3.5 To draw different varieties of pattern designs with aboveconcepts.
Exercises to be done for the above by considering various Geometrical and non-Geometrical
forms along with definitionand explanation of the terms.
3.6 Drawing of interior furniture, flooring Patterns, Ceiling Patternsand Wall Patterns.
3.7 Exterior Elements like masses, voids, door Patterns, WindowPatterns, Grills in plan/
elevation.
4.0 Color Theory Duration: 3 hours(L: Studio: )
4.1 Draw color wheel practicing color mixes

4.2 Rendering with color pencil, water colors
4.3 Color Schemes
5.0 : Scale & Measured Drawing Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )

5.1 Students are expected to measure and draw to a suitable scale the following in plan,
elevation and section. Also render them in color.
108
5.2 Importance and purpose of measured drawings.
5.3 Table, chair, stool
5.4 Sofa, center table, side table
5.5 Dining Table and dining chair
5.6 A double cot, single cot, wardrobe
6.0 Design of building parts Duration: 15 hours(L: Studio: )

Students are expected to measure and draw to a suitable scale the following in plan,
elevation
6.1 A compound wall
6.2 A gate
6.3 A railing
Students are expected to measure and draw to a suitable scale for the above elements

1.0 Introduction to Art & Design
1.1 Importance of design
2.0 Elements of Design
2.1 To know the spatial elements (conceptual and visual elements)
2.2 To algebraic the spatial elements
3.0 Principles of Design

3.1 To develop creative expression
3.2 To understand simple principles of design such as balance, proportion And rhythm.
3.3 To arrange multiple forms in a systematic and schematic manner
3.4 Application ofthe principles of composition in two dimensional compositions
4.0 Color Theory

4.1 To know the color schemes
4.2 To create a sense of understanding of color harmony and its effect.
5.0 Scale & Measured Drawings

5.1 Students are expected to measure and draw to a suitable scale in plan, elevation and section
various manmade objects like furniture elements stool,sofa, bed, center table, etc.
5.2 Importance and purpose of measured drawings.
6.0 Design of building parts

6.1 Students are expected to measure and draw in plan & elevation various architectural
elements like gates, grills, compound walls, railings. etc.to a suitable scale
109
Student activities
1. Assignments
2. Site visits
Skill upgradation projects
1. List out the various art forms of India and prepare a report.
2. Prepare a poster of visual elements of design, principles of design
3. Prepare a scrap book with different flowers and leafs to study visual elements of design.
4. Prepare a power point presentation on articulation of a building as to how the parts fit in to
the whole by emphasizing each part separately.
5. Explain the color scheme of any prominent building façade.
Recommended Books:
1 Design by Philip Rawson.

2 Design Basics by David Lauer.
3 Design through Discovery by Marjorie Elliott Bevlin
4 Basic principles of Design – MaierManfired
5 Architecture: form, space and order
6 Decorative designs of Frank Lloyd Wright
7 The Elements of Color – Paratore, Philip Carlo
1. http://www.designcoding.net/
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=t3kEwrNiNCQ
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=62r3UPrOS9k
CO1 Understanding design as a new language by R/U 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9

sensitizing the students to the conceptual, visual and
perceptual issues involved in the design process
CO2 Develop understanding and skillful use of the R/U/A 1,2,3,4,6
elements and principles of visual design
CO3 Learn to develop the skills to create solutions for U/A 1,2,3,4
simple elements of building in 2D/3D
CO4 Society and articulation U/A 5,6,7
CO5 To know about color and its applications in design R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10
CO6 Scaled drawings of simple objects like different R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,10
furniture pieces.
110
CO /PO mapping
Engineering tools
Basic knowledge
Discipline knowledge
Lifelong learning
Engineer and society
Ethics
practice Experiments and
sustainability Environment and
work Individual and team
Communication
Course PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 Mapped POs
0
CO1 x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,
CO2 x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,6
CO3 x x x x 1,2,3,4
CO4 x x x 5,6,7
CO5 x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,9,10
CO6 x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,10
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (DURATION : 1 HOUR)
Marks/Questio
n 2 Marks each 6 Marks each
20 Marks
No. of
S.No Unit
A
. No. U Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
MID SEM - II EXAM (DURATION : 1 HOUR)
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
111

SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (DURATION : 2 HOURS)
Marks/Questio
n 4 Marks each 6 Marks each
40 Marks
No. of
S.No Unit
A
. No. U Remarks
1 UNIT I
1 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 6(a) or 6(b)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 7(a) or 7(b)
Total Questions 4 8
For subjects AA - 106, 107, 108, 206, 208, 406
C-18 AA-107D

C-18 AA-107D BASIC DESIGN
TIME -2 HOURS MARKS -40
PART –A 4X4= 16 MARKS
Instructions --1. Answer all questions.

2. Each question carries FOUR marks.
1. Explain the role of design in society.

2. Explain the importance of Architecture to the society.
3. List the primary and secondary colours.
4. Explain the purpose of scale and
112
PART –B 4X6 =24 MARKS
Instructions –1. Answer all questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
5 (a) Draw all visual elements.
Or
(b) Prepare a design motif in a square 6x6cm with three different sizes of circles.
6 (a) Draw a flooring pattern for a room 6x8 m .
Or
(b) Draw a door pattern of size 1.00x2.00m
7 (a) Draw a colour wheel in a circle of diameter 6cm with water colours.
Or
(b) Draw a colour wheel in a circle of diameter 7cm with colour pencils.
8. (a Draw plan and elevation of a chair 0.45x0.45x0.90m.
Or
(b) Draw a compound wall design.
FREE HAND DRAWING
Course Title Free Hand Drawing Course Code 18 AA -108 D
Semester I Course group core
Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)

Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of visual arts at Secondary school level and flair for
sketching.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Emphasize visual literacy knowing the basics of two dimensional design (elements &
CO1 :
principles of art)
CO2 : Increase creativity, imaginationand expressional skills through basic geometry
113
Identify and draw various geometric and non geometric forms and patterns.
CO3 :
Develop good free hand drawing skills and spatial awareness through form properties
CO4 :
CO5 : Observe and render natural forms and motifs
Pay attention to detail of various forms sketching furniture pieces

CO6 :
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Introduction 6
2 Plane & Solid Geometry 9
3 Geometric patterns 6
4 Non-geometric patterns 9
5 Motifs 6
6 Manmade Objects -Furniture 9
Total 45
Course Contents
Unit1: Introduction Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )
1.1 Purpose and importance of free hand drawing & its relation to Architecture
1.2 Sketch elements of design-
1.3 Visual elements (size, shape, color, texture)
1.4 Conceptual elements (points, lines, planes, solids);
1.5 Principles of design- Composition, balance, symmetry & asymmetry, proportion, rhythm,
repetition, gradation, emphasis, etc
Unit2: Plane & Solid Geometry Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )
2.1Sketch primary planes: square, triangle, circle, etc.

114
2.2 Sketch primary solids: polyhedral (cube, cuboid, pyramid, prism),
2.3 Sketch solids of revolution: (cone, cylinder and sphere)
2.4 Form: relational properties of elements- position and orientation
2.5 Form and space: foreground and background, Horizontal andvertical elements of form,
Properties of enclosure
2.6 Types of forms: centralized, linear, radial and grid form.
Unit3: Geometric Patterns Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
3.1 Meaning of the term modular design,

3.2 Know the application of design principles of symmetry , asymmetry, balance, repetition and
Proportion in geometric patterns
3.3 Sketching repetitive geometric patterns for flooring, ceiling, walls,doors and windows, railings,
gates and grills.
3.4 The medium of drawing is pencil
Unit4: Non Geometric Patterns Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )
4.1 Know the application of design principles in non geometric patterns.

4.2 The importance of ‘proportion’
4.3 To draw a proportionate replica (enlarged/ reduced) of a given Ssymmetrical/ asymmetrical,
traditional ornamental design
4.4 The medium of drawing is pencil
Unit5: Motifs Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
5.1 Meaning of the term ‘motif’

5.2 Sketch different types of motifs- checker, diaper, herringbone, scallop, .guilloche, dentil band,
scroll, lotus, palmate,
Unit 6 : Manmade Objects -Furniture Duration: 9 hours(L: Studio: )
61 Know the application of geometry in various furniture pieces.

6.2 To observe and draw the detail elements of furniture
6.3 Sketch various furniture pieces like tables, chair,center table, side table, sofa (3 and single seat),
dining table and chais, a double cot, a shelf

1.0 Introduction
1.1 To emphasize on basic design abilities, visual literacy and expressional skills
1.2 Introduction to design process
2.0 Plane & Solid Geometry

2.1 To be able to recognize the various forms
2.2 Free hand drawing of various geometrical shapes/ forms
3.0 Geometric Patterns

3.1 To develop the ability to use geometry for preparing patterns.
115
3.2 To explore the different geometrical patterns
3.3 To know modular design
4.0 Non Geometric Patterns

4.1 To develop the ability to use geometry for preparing patterns.
4.2 To explore the different non geometrical patterns
4.3 To know modular design
5.0 Motifs
5.1 To develop observation skill by sketching natural and manmade motifs
6.0 Manmade Objects- Furniture

6.1 To know how the basic knowledge of geometry is applied in the creation of furniture elements
6.2 To increase observation skill doing detailing of furniture elements.
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
1. Sketching
2. Literature study
3. Assignments
1. Prepare a scrap book of different geometrical forms made with different materials like
plastic, thin wood pieces, bamboo, metal, etc. (eg. match box sticks, ice cream sticks, tooth
picks)
2. Reproduce geometrical, ornamental and natural motifs.
3. Sketch drawing room furniture of different styles eg. Classical style or Modern style
Recommended Books:
1. Moris, I.H. Geometrical Drawing for Art Students.
2. Thoms, E. French. Graphic Science and Design, New York:MC Graw Hill
3. Nichols, T.B. and Keep, Norman. - Geometry of Construction, 3 rd ed. Cleaver - Hume
Press Ltd., London, 1959.
4. Visual Thinking – De Sausmarez, Maurice
5. Wucius, Wong - Principles of two Dimensional Design. VanNostrand Reinhold 1972.
6. Maier Manfired - Basic Principles of Design, Vol.1, 2, 3 & 4, VanNostrand Reinhold
116
1. www.visualartists.co
2. www.visual-arts-cork.com/definitions
CO1 Emphasize visual literacy knowing the basics of R/U 1,2,4,5,6,9,10

two dimensional design (elements & principles
of art)
CO2 Increase creativity, imaginationand U/A 1,3,6,,9,10
expressional skills through basic geometry
CO3 Identify and draw various geometric and non R/U/A 1,2,3,4,,5,9,10
geometric forms and patterns.
CO4 Develop good free hand drawing skills and U/A 1,2,3,5,6,9
spatial awareness through form properties
CO5 Observe and render natural forms and motifs U/A 1,2,3,6,9
CO6 Pay attention to detail of various forms U/A 1,2,3,6,9,10

sketching furniture pieces
117
EXAMINATION PATTERN
No. of 20 Marks
S.No Unit
A
. No. U Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4

No. of 40 Marks
S.No Unit
A
. No. U Remarks
1 UNIT I
1 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 6(a) or 6(b)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 7(a) or 7(b)
Total Questions 4 8
For subjects AA - 106, 107, 108, 206, 208, 406
C-18 AA -108 D
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING.

BOARD DIPLOMA END- SEMESTER EXAMINATION, (C18)
118
C18-AA-108D FREE HAND DRAWING
TIME –2 HOURS MARKS –40
PART- A 4X4=16 MARKS
Instructions --- 1. Answer all questions .

2. Each carries FOUR marks.
1. Define proportion with the help of sketches.

2. Sketch the gate design.
3. Define a motif with one example.
4. Sketch a center table.
PART –B 4X6=24 MARKS

Instructions --- 1. Answer all questions .
2. Each questions carries SIX marks.
5 (a) Sketch and explain primary planes.
Or
(b) and explain visual elements.
6 (a) Sketch the wall pattern design.
Or
(b) Sketch a symmetrical pattern design.
7 (a) Sketch a motif of a scroll.
Or
(b) Sketch a motif of a palmate.
8 (a ) Sketch a double cot.
Or
(b) Sketch a side table.
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE (PHYSICS LAB)
Course Title Basic Science Lab Practice Course Code 18AA-109P(A)

(Physics Lab)
Semester I Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in 0:1:2 periods Credits 1.5/2
Pds/Hrs(L:T:P)
Type of course Tutorial & practical Total Contact Hrs 22.5Pds
119
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of basic High school science, basic mathematics
Course objectives:To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
Tutorial: 0.83 Hrs/Experiment:
1. Introduction Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 3periods/experiment.
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1. useVernier caliper to determine the volumes of objects like cylinder and sphere.
2: use Screw gauge to determine thickness /diameter of small objects like glass plate and wire.
3: prove Boyle’s law employing Quill tube.
4: determine the viscosity of liquid using capillary method.
5: verify the parallelogram law and triangle law of forces.
120
References:
1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur

2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester I
1. Vernier caliper- determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.

2. Screw gauge - determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section of a wire.
3. Boyle’s law - verification using Quill tube.
4. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid - using capillary method.
5. Parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces – verification.
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
CL
Course Outcomes Linked Teaching
POs Hours
CO 1 Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 2 Hands on practice on Screw gauge U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 3 Boyle’s law verification U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 4 Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary method U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 5 Verification of Parallelogram law of forces U/A 1,2,3,8,9
andTriangle law of forces L:P::1:2
CO 6 Related the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels: R=Remember, U=Understand, A=Apply
Suggested learning outcomes
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
121
1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
 Fix the specimen in position  Calculate the volume
Calipers – Cylinder and sphere  Read the scales of given object
 Calculate the volume of given
object
2. Hands on practice on Screw  Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge – Wire and glass plate  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass plate  Calculate cross section
and cross section of wire of wire
3. Boyle’s law verification – Quill  Find the length of air
tube column
 Find the pressure of
 Note the atmospheric pressure enclosed air
 Fix the quill tube to retort stand  Find the value P x l
 Find the length of air column
 Find the pressure of enclosed air
 Find and compare the calculated
value P x l
4. Coefficient of viscosity by  Find the least count of vernier  Find the pressure
capillary  Fix the capillary tube to aspiratory head
bottle  Calculate rate of
Method - water  Find the mass of collected water
volume of liquid
 Find the pressure head
collected
 Calculate rate of volume of liquid
collected  Find the radius of
 Find the radius of capillary tube capillary tube
 Calculate the viscosity of water  Calculate the viscosity
using capillary method of water
5. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

law of forces and Triangle law of  Note the positions of threads on equilibrium point
forces drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium point
parallelogram
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the measured diagonal  Construct triangle
 Construct triangle  Compare the ratios of
 Find the length of sides force and length
 Compare the ratios
122
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS
1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 SEMESTER END EXAMINATION EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
Scheme of Valuation of SEE
S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE (CHEMISTRY LAB)
Course Title: Basic Science Lab Practice Course Code: 18 Common-109(B)

(Chemistry Lab)
Semester: I Course group: Practical
Teaching Scheme(L:P):1:2periods Credits: 1.5/2
Type of Course: Lecture& practical Total Contact Hours: 22.5 periods
CIE: 30 Marks SEE: 20 Marks
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
123
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of preparation of chemical solutions and volumetric
analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching Hours

CO1 Prepare the standard U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
solution.
CO2 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::3:6
chemical substance in the
given sample of
solutions(HCl, NaOH&
H2SO4).
CO3 Determination of hardness U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
of water in the given
sample.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A
oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
Tutorial:
1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Hrs)
124
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Preparation of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimation of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of solution by using
Standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimation of sodium hydroxide present in 250ml of solution by using standard hydrochloric
acid solution.
4. Estimation of sulphuric acid present in 250ml of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determination of total hardness of water sample by 0.02N EDTA solution.

1. Prepare standard sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimate hydrochloric acid present given volume of solution by using
standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimate sodium hydroxide present in the given volume of solution by using standard
hydrochloric acid solution.
4. Estimate sulphuric acid present in the given volume of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determine the total hardness of water sample by using 0.02N EDTA solution.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
C-18 COMMON-109P
125
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)
MIDSEM – I
FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.
PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)
Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)
5. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

6. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using
0.02M sodium carbonate solution.
C-18 COMMON-109P

MIDSEM – II
FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.
1. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
126
2. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
3. Estimate the amount of NaOH present in 500 ml solution using 0.02M HCl solution
4. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in 250 ml solution
using 0.01M NaOH solution.
C18 – COMMON 109P

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
5. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
6. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
7. Verify parallelogram law of forces.
8. Verify triangle law of forces.
9. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

127
12. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of NaOH present in 100 ml of the given solution
using 0.01M HCl solution.
13. Estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in a litre of solution using 0.01M NaOH
solution.
14. Determine the total hardness of the given water sample using 0.02N EDTA solution
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB Course Code : 18 AA-110P

PRACTICE Course Group : Core
Semester :I Credits :3
Teaching Scheme in Hrs (L:T:P) :7.5:0:37.5 Total Contact Hours : 45 Pds
Type of course : Tutorial + Practicals SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of English comprehension , Basic Computer operation and IO devices.
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching
Hours
CO1 Identify hardware and software components R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
and work with DOS OS
CO2 Operate the computer system with Windows OS R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO3 Access the internet R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
CO4 Draft the documents using word processing R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20
software
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Contents
COMPUTER BASICS
1. Identify the various components of a Computer system

2. Differentiate between hardware and software
3. State the configuration of a computer system
4. Practice on DOS Internal and External commands.
5. Create and use Batch Files.
6. Know the usage of Editors.
WINDOWS Operating System
128
7. Exercise on creation of text Files using Notepad, WordPad
8. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp files using MS Paint
9. Exercise how to use calculator
10. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different folders
11. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin, My Computer and My Documents
12. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other folders) on Desktop
13. Exercise on arranging of icons – name wise, size, type, Modified
14. Exercise on searching, accessing and organizing files / folders
15. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display, date and time
INTERNET
16. Importance of web browser software
17. Structure of URL
18. Create an E-mail account
19. Send & Receive an E-mail
20. Browse the Internet using various search engines
WORD Processing Software
21. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen

22. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
23. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
24. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
25. Convert text into table & table into text.
26. Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and changing background colour in
Table
27. Merge and split cells in a Table
28. Change the font of a text
29. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar
30. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
31. Printing a document , page setting, different views of a document
32. Import & export files to & from Word.
33. Create a letter and send to multiple users using mail merge tool of MS-word
34. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns. Insert a Clip Art in the
Newsletter.
35. Create a Resume for a Job Application.
36. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
37. Prepare the class time table of your class.
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
129
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Software Tool
Any open source tool or equivalent proprietary tools
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Lab

Sessions
CO1 Identify hardware and 1,2,3,4,5,6 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R, U, A 5
software components and
work with DOS OS
CO2 Operate the computer system 7,8,9,10,11,12,13, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R, U, A 15
with Windows OS 14,15
CO3 Access the internet 16,17,18,19,20 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R,U, A 5
CO4 Draft the documents using 21,22,23,24,25,26, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 U, A 20
word processing 27,28,29,30,31,32,
software 33,34,35,36,37
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Student Activity
1. Observe newspaper pattern of printing.
2. Submit a report of one page
3. Collection of data
Internal Assesment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
130
e
Code marks
periods Period s Evaluation Examination Marks
per s per (Internal
week semes +End
L
1 18AA- Advanced 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

201F English
2 18AA- Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
202F Mathematics
3 18AA- Applied Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

203F
4 18AA- EngineeringChemistry 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
&Environmental
204F studies
5 18AA- Advanced Building 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
205C materials
131
6 18AA- Advanced 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
206D Engineering
Drawing Practice
7 18AA- Basic Architectural 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
207D Design
8 18AA- Architectural Graphics 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
208D
9 18AA- Applied science lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
209P- Practice
A+B
10 18AA- Information 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
210P TechnologyLabPractic 0
e
-- A/B/C/D
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
SECOND SEMESTER
132
ADVANCED ENGLISH
Course Title :Advanced English Course Code : 18 Common-201F
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

36:24:0
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Hours : 60 periods
Teaching + Assignments
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
201.1 Communicate effectively in English
201.2 Listen for specific details and use prepositions appropriately.
201.3 Learn vocabulary and use them in professional interaction
201.4 Analyze errors and make communication flawless
201.5 Comprehend central idea and minute details
201.6 Make notes, write resumes, prepare cover letters and draft reports
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1 SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Expressing Obligation
2. Fixing and Cancelling Appointments
3. Extending and Accepting Invitations
4. Giving Instructions
5. Asking for and Giving Directions
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. The Here and Now!
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to Learn a New Word

8. Synonyms, Antonyms and One word Substitutes
133
UNIT -4: GRAMMAR Duration: 12 Periods
9. Reported Speech
10. Error Analysis - I
11. Error Analysis - II
12. Error Analysis - III
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
13. An Environmental challenge

14. The Will to Succeed
15. Waiting for Mr. Clean
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 16 Periods
16. Data Interpretation- I
17. Data Interpretation- II
18. Data Interpretation- III
19. Writing a Resume
20. Writing a Cover Letter
21. Note Making
22. Writing a Report
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to:
 express obligation, fix and cancel appointments

 extend, accept and decline invitations.
 give instructions and directions
134
 identify and use prepositions
 enhance their vocabulary
 learn synonyms, antonyms and use one word substitutes
 read and understand main ideas and answer the questions
 write in reported speech
 identify and correct common errors
 interpret data and write a paragraph
 learn to prepare cover letter and resume
 make notes and write reports
Model Rubrics
S.No Sub Performance

activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for the
accurately activity were activity were activity were
prepared based on accurately accurately inaccurately
the data collected prepared based on prepared based prepared
independently. the data collected on the data
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
that could be require or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by explanation & require the activity in a
anyone & performed the explanation & poor way
performed the activity effectively. performed the
activity activity normally
effectively.
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, interesting logical sequence activity in activity
sequence with with visuals or logical sequence without
attractive visuals diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a Provided a Student Conclusions
/ summary detailed conclusion / provided a /summary was
135
conclusion/ summary clearly conclusion/ not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data summary less
based on the data and activity effectively
and activity
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking 20 Part A 4 short answer questions

Listening Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary 20 Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
 Listen to a passage /conversation / dialogue / speech and answer the questions

 Group Discussions
 Seminars
 Review a movie
 Review a book
 Narrating a story
 Chain stories
 JAM
 Speak about incidents /events /memories /dreams /role model
136
 Interview with famous personalities
 Reading for main ideas and specific details
 Summarizing
 Picture description
 Writing a recipe
 Describing a process
 Giving directions using maps
 Surveys
 Filling forms
 e-mail etiquette
 Preparing reports on field visits, experiments, projects
Textbook: English for Polytechnics
(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Keep Talking by Friederike Klippel
5. More Grammar Games by Mario Rinvolucri and Paul Davis
6. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy
7. Spoken English-A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice by V Sasi Kumar
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English(app)
9. mooc.org
137
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
201.1 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9,10
201.2 2 2 1 2 -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
201.3 2 2 -- 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
201.4 2 2 2 2 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10
201.5 2 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,57,8,9,10
201.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
138
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM(Duration 1 hour)
Marks/Question 1 Marks each 3 Marks each 5 Marks each 20 Marks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
MID SEM - II EXAM(Duration 1 hour)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION EXAM(Duration 2 hours)

Marks/Question 1 Mark each 3 Marks each 5 Marks each 40 Marks
1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - I
PART-A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each question carries one mark.
1. I strongly recommend you to read this novel. (Rewrite the sentence using suitable words of
obligation).
139
2. Invite your friend to attend a seminar on Yoga.
3. Fill in the blanks using suitable prepositions.
a. I usually go to polytechnic _______ foot.
b. Suman has been suffering ___________ malaria.
4. Fill in the blanks using suitable preposition.

a. She is jealous ______________ her best friend.
b. Madhu jumped __________ the well.
PART-B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the followingquestions. Each question carries three marks.
5. a) Extend an invitation to your friend to attend your brother’s marriage and write
expressions showing his / her acceptance or inability.
Or
b) Give directions to your sister on how to reach the nearest branch office of State Bank of
India from your house.
6. a) Give directions to your house from polytechnic using at least three prepositions.
Or
b) Complete the paragraph using suitable prepositions.
We went _____the zoo ____ Sunday. We saw a python ____ a branch of a tree. There
were several parrots _______ the cages. In the zoo, we boarded a train that passed -
__________ a tunnel. There we saw a lion going ______ its cave.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7. a) Write on how to send an image from your mobile to another mobile number using
WhatsApp.
Or
b) Write a dialogue to fix an appointment with an orthopedic surgeon on 5 th January at
10.00 a.m.
8. a) Use the following words or phrases in your own sentences.
i) across ii) against iii) in front of iv) since v) along
Or
b) Correct the words in italics.
140
i. I’ve got the key on my pocket.
ii. She was sitting among her two friends.
iii. There is a tree besides the house.
iv. I was born in Monday.
v. He came in the room.
Skill Upgradation
Subject related activities:
1. Case study of existing projects

2. Market survey
3. Material survey
4. Data collection
5. Site visits
6. Group Discussions
7. Attending workshops
8. Visiting material and technology exhibitions
9. Seminars
10. Presentations
11. Outdoor sketching
12. Slip tests
13. Surprise tests
14. Time Problems
15. Desktop surveys
16. Model making
17. 3D Renderings
18. Walk through
Extra Curricular:
1. Newspaper reading
2. Debates
3. Elocution
4. Recitation
5. Dumb Charades
141
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - II
PART - A 4 X1=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each question carries one mark.
5. Write the synonym and antonym of lazy.

6. Write any two different forms of the word, ‘beauty’.
7. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.
a) She travelled to her village every week.
b) Raghu returned the money back.
8. Change as directed.
a) Sita said, “She is a teacher.” (Change it into indirect speech)
b) He told me that she was going to market. (Change it into direct speech.)
PART – B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
9. a. Write down the one word substitutes of the following.

a) A person who does not believe in God.
b) The study of planets.
c) A person who loves reading books.
(Or)
b. Write antonyms for the words in italics.

My friend Rani is young and attractive. She is very sharp and loves to eat fresh food.
10. a. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.

I go to college everyday by walk. I am getting up late every morning. I work very hardly.
(Or)
b. Change the following as directed.
i. He said to her, “I will teach you Chemistry today.” (Change it into Reported
speech)
ii. She said to him, “Take me to Central Library now.” (Change it into reported
speech)
iii. Gopal said to Mamatha, “ Please lend me your calculator.”
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
11. a) What are the five aspects you learn when you learn a new word?
142
(Or)
b) Suggest any five ways to improve your vocabulary.

12. a) Rewrite the following making necessary changes.
a. My luggage were in the store room.
b. The teacher stressed on the importance of team work.
c. My friend and I gone for a movie.
d. The team is loving the food.
e. I have three son –in –laws.
(Or)
b) Rewrite the following sentences as directed.
i. He said that he was not feeling well. (Change to direct speech).
ii. Amala said that she would visit us the next day. (Change to direct speech).
iii. She said that their team had won the match. (Change to direct speech).
iv. The teacher said, “Australia is an island.” (Change to reported speech).
v. She says, “They will help us.” (Change to reported speech).

SECOND SEMESTER 18 COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks
143
PART-A 8X1=8
Instructions: Answer all questions.
Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill in the blanks with appropriate prepositions.

1. They went___ a walk.
2. He went to college____bus.
1. Write one word substitutes for the given meanings.
1. Study of planets.
2. Something that cannot be heard.
1. What will you write under achievements secton in your resume?
2. Fill in the blanks with words of obligation.
1. I ____wear a helmet when I drive a two wheeler.
2. We ____- respect our elders.
1. Answer the questions given in 5 and 6 after reading the passage,
Mammals are among the most successful animals to have lived. Because they are warm
blooded, they can survive in almost any environment. To take advantage of different
environments mammals have evolved different body shapes.
a) Why do mammals have different body shapes?
1. How can mammals survive in any environment?
3. Make notes for the given passage.
About 40 million years ago new kinds of primates — monkeys and apes—- began to take over
lemurs. Today, there are two groups of monkeys: the old world monkeys which live in Africa and
Asia and the New world monkeys which live only in Central America.
1. Write a short paragraph

based on the flowchart
given.
Finding a lost
Item
144
Part -B 3 X4 = 12
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
9.(a) Invite a celebrity to your college sports day. The celebrity accepts your invitation. Write a
conversation.
(Or)
(b) Answer the questions after reading the passage
There are almost 2,400 species of snake. From the 20 cm long thread snake to the gaint
anaconda, which can reach 36 feet. Snakes have many colours, patterns and ways of killing their
prey. They eat everything from ants, eggs , snails to animals as big as goats.
1. What is the largest snake?

2. What do snakes eat?
3. Are all snakes similar?
10 (a). Write three things you learn when you learn a new word?
OR
10 (b) Write a paragraph based on the tree diagram
145
11. (a). Read the following passage and answer the questions given in 11 a or 11 b
Humans communicate with each other everyday using sounds and body movements .Most
commonly , we share information about the world around us through spoken languages. These are
in special sounds we make to represent objects, actions, numbers, colours and other features. We
use our brains to remember words, put them in the correct order and make the larynx, or voice
,box,produce the correct sounds. If a person is unable to speak they can communicate by using sign
language. We also have written and pictorial languages.
1. How do human beings communicate?

2. What is the larynx?
3. When do we use sign language?
(Or)
(b) 1. What do we use to remember words?
2. How do we share information?
3. What are some forms of communication mentioned in the passage ?
12 (a). Make notes for the given passage
Sleep is as important to healthy life style as eating and exercising. On an average healthy adult
requires just over eight hours of sleep at night. Yet polls show that the increasing numbers of people
are suffering from sleep disorder or significant sleep loss. A study shows that 29% of Indians sleep
only after midnight and 61% slept for seven hours or less. Sleep is crucial to maintain one’s health.
Without it, you increase your susceptibility to a wide range of health problems .including heart
disease, stroke, diabetes, obesity and depression. Not sleeping enough can affect the immune
system. The immune system works when you are asleep. That is when natural killer cells are
generated in the bone marrow. These killer cells help in protecting the body against the viruses,
bacteria and even cancer.
(Or)
146
12 (b) Write a paragraph based on the table given
Apes Country Habitat

Orangutan Sumatra live in trees
Gorilla Africa live on ground
Chimpanzee Africa live on ground
Part-C 5X4=20M
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks.
13(a) Take an appointment with a doctor for your grandmother.
(Or)
(b) Read the passage and answer the questions.
Reading skills are considered the most important tools for academic success. Printed materials
serve as a source of information and entertainment. Reading is an important activity in life with
which one can update one’s knowledge . Speech precedes reading and reading is the input for
writing. Reading is an active process which involves recognition and comprehension. A reader can
understand a text only when he or she uses his or her mental faculties. A reader should have the
knowledge of the writing system, the knowledge of the language , the ability to interpret , the
knowledge of the world, a reason for reading and a reading style.
1. What are the advantages of reading?

2. What comes before reading?
3. What does the process of reading involve?
4. What are the inputs required by a reader to read something?
5. What is the purpose of printed information?
14 (a). Correct the following sentences.
1. My friend like me very much.

2. This is the best if the two.
3. He sat among the two girls.
4. He is running daily.
5. This is the boy which won the race.
OR
(b) Write a cover letter applying for the post of a software engineer at an MNC.
15 ( a). Read the given passage and answer questions given in 15 a or 15 b
147
The first elephants were pig-sized creatures without tusks or trunks that lived in Northern Africa
about 150 million years ago. Today there are only two species of elephant: the Indian Elephant and
the African elephant - the largest mammal living on land. Both species live in family groups, which
sometimes join to from herds of hundreds of animals. Elephants spend upto twenty on hours a day
eating as much as 320kgs of leaves ,bark , fruit and grass. An adult elephant needs to drink 90 litres
of water a day. Elephants travel through forests on traditional paths called elephants’ roads .These
intelligent animals have good memories and can live for more than 60 years. Both Indian and
African elephants are endangered because humans take over their habitats for farming and
poachers kill them for their tusks.
1. What is the largest mammal on land?

2. What is an elephant road?
3. Which word in the passage means home?
4. Do elephants live alone?
5. Why are elephants killed?
(Or)
(b)
1. What do elephants eat?

2. How long does an elephant live?
3. Who is putting elephants in danger?
4. What was the size of the first elephants?
5. Elephants have tusks and_______.
16 (a). Write your resume for the post of an Assistant Engineer at TESCO Company.
(Or)
(b) Write a report about an industry you visited.
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18COMMON202F

SEMESTER : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 36 :24 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level and Basic Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 1st Semester level
148
Course Outcomes: COs
CO 1 Formulate the equations of Straight Line, Circle and Conic Sections

CO 2 Evaluate the Limits of different Functions
CO 3 Determine the Derivatives of Various Functions
CO 4 Find the Successive Derivatives and Partial Derivatives of Functions
CO 5 Use Differentiation in Geometrical and Physical Applications
CO 6 Use Differentiation for finding Maxima and Minima.
Course Contents:
Co-ordinate geometry
Unit – I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
1. Straight lines: Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point
form, intercept form, normal form and general form - Find distance of a point from a line, acute
angle between two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between two
parallel lines - perpendicular distance from a point to a line - Solve simple problems on the above
forms
2. Circle: Define locus of a point, circle and its equation. Find equation of the Circle given (i) Centre
and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three
non collinear points and (v) Centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle - finding
Centre, radius - tangent, normal to circle at a point on it - simple problems.
Unit – II Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8 – T:3.2)
3. Conic Sections: Define a conic section, focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum – Find
equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are given. Properties of parabola,
ellipse and hyperbola - standard forms with Vertex (Centre) at the Origin and Axis (Axes) along
Co – Ordinate Axes only – Simple Problems.
Differential Calculus
Unit-III Duration: 12 Periods (L: 7.2 – T:4.8)
149
4. Functions & Limits : Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits
1
xn  a n sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim , lim (1  x) x ,
xa x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x x 0
( without proof ) -
x
 1 a x2  b x  c
lim 1   lim
x   x  - Simple Problems . Evaluate the limits of the type x  l  x 2   x   and
f ( x)
lim
x  g ( x)
5. Differentiation – I : Concept of derivative - definition from first principle as

f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h - different notations - derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex,
log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cotx. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Derivative of function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2
x2  1 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) (iv) .
Unit – IV Duration: 12 Periods (L: 7.2 – T:4.8)
6. Differentiation – II: Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with

respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic,
implicit functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives
- examples – functions of several variables – partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple
problems.
Applications of Derivatives:
Unit – V Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8 – T:3.2)
7. Geometrical Applications: Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and

normal to a curve at any point on the curve.Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and
subnormal to the curve at any point on it. Angle between two intersecting curves - problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6 – T:4)
150
8. Physical Applications: Physical applications of the derivative – Explain the derivative as a rate of
change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with
examples. Explain the derivative as a rate measure in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples– Simple Problems.
9. Maxima & Minima: Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and
decreasing functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.
References
1. Co - Ordinate Geometry – by S.L. Loney
2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison – Wesley Publications
3. Calculus – I by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachagam Pillai, S.V Publications.
4. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI,XII.
5. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (Telugu Academy)
Coordinate Geometry
Unit – I
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form, intercept
form, normal form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles

2.1 Define locus of a point, circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Centre and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
151
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
Unit – II
3.0 Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
3.1 Define a conic section.
3.2 Understand the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with
illustrations.
3.3 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
3.4 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
3.5 Solve problems in simple cases of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.
Differential Calculus
UNIT - III
4.0 Use the concept of Limit for solving the problems

lim f ( x)  l
xa
4.1 Understand the concept of limit and meaning of and state the properties
of limits.
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
lim , lim , lim , lim ,
x a x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x
4.2 Mention the Standard limits
1 x
ex 1  1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1  
x0 x x 0 x   x  (All without proof).
4.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits
a x2  b x  c f ( x)
lim 2 lim
x l  x   x   x  g ( x )
4.4 Evaluate the limits of the type and
5.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations

5.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
152
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a
function.
5.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
5.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like x n , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx,
Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
5.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
5.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product and
quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
5.6 Understand the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2
x2  1 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) (iv) .
Unit – IV
6.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
6.1 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples.
6.2 Understand the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another function
and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
6.3 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.

6.4 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with examples.
6.5 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples
like [f(x)]g(x).
6.6 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order with
examples.
6.7 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and difference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
6.8 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
6.9 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple
problems.
Applications of Differentiation
UNIT - V
7.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives

153
7.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the curve
y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
7.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of
tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
7.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the
curve y=f(x) .
7.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the angle
between two given curves with illustrative examples.
Unit – VI
8.0 Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives

8.1 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity
and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
8.2 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
9.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
9.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
9.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing
with illustrative examples.
9.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of
single variable - simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
9.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes, etc.
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
154
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
II SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
6.
ACTIVITIES
1 . Prepare a presentation to describe various types of Straight lines.
2 . Identify the geometrical shapes in and around your locality and give the details about them.
3. Prepare a comparative study of conic sections and their uses in engineering applications.
3. Prepare a detailed study report on differentiation using different methods.
4. List out and explain the applications of Differentiation.
5. Apply the differentiation in geometrical problems.
6. Apply the differentiation in rate measure problems.
7. Apply the differentiation to problem solving in finding maxima minima.
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
155
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
not written.
procedure to solve the problem(s). problems, but does problems.
the problem(s). not do it
consistently.
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner cooperated with work effectively
listening to but had trouble others, but needed with others.
suggestions of listening to others prompting to stay
others and working and/or working on-task.
cooperatively cooperatively.
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85-89%) Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and solutions of the steps and the steps and the steps and
have no solutions have no solutions have no solutions have
mathematical mathematical mathematical mathematical
errors. errors. errors. errors.
PASS SCORE: 2.5

STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS
156
CO AVERAGE
S.NO PIN CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6
7
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION(Duration 2 hours)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
157
Code: C18-Common-202F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A

2. Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find the slope of the straight line 3x + 4y + 9 = 0

2. Write the equation of circle whose centre (h,k) and radius r given.
3. Define conic section.
x2 y2
4. Find the Length of major and minor axes of the Ellipse + =1
16 9
PART-B

. 5 a) Find the distance between parallel lines 2x + 3y + 5 =0 and 2x + 3y + 9 = 0

Or
5 b) Find the centre and radius of the circle x 2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0.
6 a) Find the vertex , focus ,equation of directrix and length of latus-rectum of the parabola y 2 =
20x
Or
x2 y2
7 b) Find the centre, vertices and foci of Ellipse + =1
25 16
PART C
7 a) Find the angle between the lines 2x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 2 = 0
Or
7b) Find the equation of the Circle passing through the points (0, 0), (1,0) and (0,2)
8 a) Find the equation of the Parabola with focus at (2 , -3 ) and whose directrix is
158
3x – 4y + 16 = 0
Or
8 b) Find the Centre,Vertices, Eccentricity, Foci, Lengths of axes, Length of Latus Rectum,
x2 y2
and equations of directrices of the Hyperbola − =1
16 9
@@@
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A

3 2
Lt 29xx −3 x +1
2
+ 8 x +7
1. Evaluate x →0
3
2. Differentiate x + Tanx w.r.t. x
3. Differentiate log(sinx) w.r.t x
∂u
4. Find if U=x 3 + y 3
∂x
PART-B

1+2+3+… .+ n
5 a). Evaluate ; lim
n→∞ ( n2 )
Or
dy
5 b). If y = ex.cotx, find dx
dy
6 a). Find if x=at2 , y=2 at .
dx
Or
159
dy
6 b) If x2 + y2 + 3xy = 7, then find dx
PART C
dy 1+ x 2
log
7 a). Find dx , If y = 1−x 2
Or
7 b) Differentiate log[log(logx)] w. r. t. x
8 a). If y=sin ( logx ) , prove that x 2 y 2 + x y 1+ y =0.
Or
x 2+ y2 ∂u ∂u
8 b) If U =sin−1 ( x+ y )
then prove that x
∂x
+y
∂y
=tanu
C18-common 202F
MODEL PAPER
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)

II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A

9. Write the intercept form of a straight line ax +by +c=0
x 3−8
10. Evaluate lim
x →2 x−2
11. Write the conditions for an increasing function and a decreasing function of f (x) in the
interval [ a , b ]
12. Write the equation of a circle whose centre is ( h , k ) and radius is r .
13. Write the slope of a curve y=f ( x ) at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
14. Define Orthogonal curves.
15. Write the conditions for a point to be a maximum point on the curve y=f ( x ) .
16. Write the quantities to denote the rate of change of volume and area with respect to t.
PART-B
160
9(a). Find the perpendicular distance of the point (2, 4) from the line 4 x−3 y−6=0.
OR
9(b). Find the length of the tangent to the curve y=x 2 +2 x+1 at (1,4).
10(a). Differentiate log ⁡(tanx) with respect to x.

OR
1 3 2
10 (b). A particle is moving along a line such that s= t −3t +8 t+5. Find its velocity and
3
acceleration at t=2 sec .
11 (a). Find the equation of the normal to the curve y 2=16 x at (2,4).
OR
11 (b). Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x 3−2 x +5 at (1,4).
12 (a). Find the rate of change of Area of the circle with respect to the radius when r =6 cm.
OR
12 (b). Find the maximum value of 2 x3 −9 x 2+12 x+ 5.
PART C

13(a). Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (3, -4) and directrix is the line
x− y +5=0.
OR
13 (b). Find the angle between the curves y 2=2 x , x + y = 8 at their point of intersection
(2, 2)
dy
14 (a). Find , if x=a ( θ−sinθ ) , y=a ( 1−cosθ ) .
dx
OR
14 (b). The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them if their product is maximum
15(a). Find the lengths of the normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve
y=x 3−3 x +2 at ( 0,2 ) .
OR
2 k
15 (b). show that the curves y =x∧ y = cut at right angles if 8 k 2−1=0.
x
16 (a). A circular metal plate expands by heat so that its radius is increasing at the rate of 0.02
cm/sec. At what rate its area is increasing when the radius is 10 cms.
OR
16 (b). A wire of length 40 cm is bent so that to has to form a rectangle. Find the maximum
area that can be enclosed by the wire.
APPLIED PHYSICS
161
Course Title Applied Physics Course Code 18Common-203F
Semester II Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme in 30:15:0 Hrs Credits 3
Pds/Hrs(L:T:P) 40:20:00 Pds
Type of course Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Hrs 60Pds
Pre requisites: Basic High school science, basic mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Engineering Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Hours
Apply knowledge of waves and sound in engineering

CO 1 problems. PO1,PO2 10
Apply knowledge of Simple Harmonic Motion to solve

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
PO1,
CO 3 Use modern instruments in engineering PO2,PO3, 10
PO4
Use various magnetic materials in engineering PO1,
CO 4 10
equipments PO2,PO3
PO1,
Use various electrical measuring instruments as tools in
CO 5 PO2,PO3,PO 10
engineering
4
PO1,
CO 6 Apply Electronics principles in engineering problems PO2,PO3,PO 10
4
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 WAVES AND SOUND Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Wave motion – definition and characteristics – audible range – infrasonic and ultrasonic –
longitudinal and transverse waves – examples – Relation between wavelength, frequency
and velocity of a wave – derivation –stationary waves- beats - applications of beats -
Doppler effect – list of applications – ultrasound and radar in medicine and engineering as
162
special emphasis- echo –definition - applications - relation between time of echo and
distance of obstacle –derivation- Reverberation and time of reverberation - Sabine’s formula
- Free and forced vibrations - Resonance - Conditions of good auditorium - noise pollution –
definition – causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution - problems
1. UNIT – 2 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Periodic motion - Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)– definition - examples - Conditions for
SHM –Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM - Expressions for
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing SHM – derivations - Time
period, frequency, amplitude and phase of a particle in SHM - Ideal simple pendulum – time
period of simple pendulum –derivation - laws of simple pendulum-Seconds pendulum-
problems.
2. UNIT – 3 MODERN PHYSICS Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Photo electric effect - Einstein’s photo electric equation – Work function and threshold
frequency - laws of photo electric effect - applications of photo electric effect – photo cell -
concept of Refraction of light - critical angle and total internal reflection - principle of
Optical fiber - Applications of optical fiber – LASER – definition and characteristics – principle
of LASER - spontaneous emission and stimulated emission - population inversion - examples
of LASER – Uses.
3. UNIT-4 MAGNETISM Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Magnetic field - magnetic lines of force -properties - Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field
– Magnetic length, pole strength – magnetic induction field strength- definition - Coulomb’s
inverse square law of magnetism - expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed
in a uniform magnetic field – derivation - expression for magnetic induction field strength at
a point on the axial line of a bar magnet –derivation - Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials
– examples - related problems.
4.UNIT-5 ELECTRICITY AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Ohm’s law – Ohmic and non ohmic conductors – examples - Temperature dependence of
resistance – coefficients of resistance with examples - Specific resistance – units –
conductance- series and parallel combination of resistors - moving coil galvanometer -
conversion of galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter with diagram (qualitatively) –
Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity – Expression for balancing condition of
Wheatstone’s bridge – derivation – Meter bridge –working with neat diagram –
Superconductivity-definition-superconductors - definition and examples – applications -
related problems.
163
5. UNIT – 6 ELECTRONICS Duration: 10 periods (L:6.0 – T: 4.0)
Solids – definition – energy bands in solids- valence band, conduction band and forbidden
band – Energy band diagram of conductors, insulators and semiconductors – concept of
Fermi level - Intrinsic semiconductors - examples - Concept of holes in semiconductors -
Doping - Extrinsic semiconductor - P-type and N-type semiconductors - PN Junction diode –
Forward Bias and Reverse Bias - Applications of PN diode - Diode as rectifier – principle –
principle of Light Emitting Diode and solar cell.
Specific learning outcomes:
1. know the concept of Waves and Sound
1.1 Define wave. Explain the characteristics of wave (frequency, wavelength, amplitude)
1.2 Explain audibility range of sound.
1.3 Define infrasonic and ultrasonic sounds.
1.4 Define longitudinal and transverse wave motion. Write examples for each. Distinguish
between them.
1.5 Derive the relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of wave (v ꞊ nλ)
1.6 Define stationary waves.
1.7 Explain the phenomenon of beats. List the applications of beats.
1.8 Explain Doppler Effect. List the applications of Doppler Effect.
1.9 Application of Doppler effect in medicine and engineering - ultrasound and radar.
1.10 Define echo. List the applications of echo.
1.11 Derive the relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
1.12 Explain Reverberation and time of reverberation.
1.13 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the terms.
1.14 Define free and forced vibrations.
1.15 Define resonance with examples.
1.16 State the conditions of a good auditorium
1.17 Define noise pollution.
1.18 List the effects and methods to minimize noise pollution.
2. know the concept of Simple Harmonic Motion
2.1 Define periodic motion

2.2 Define Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)
2.3 List the examples of SHM.
2.4 State the conditions of simple harmonic motion
2.5 Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM.
2.6 Derive the expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing
SHM.
2.7 Define the terms time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of particle in SHM
2.8 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive the expression for time period of simple
pendulum.
2.9 State the laws of simple pendulum.
164
2.10 Define seconds pendulum.
3. know the concept of Modern Physics

3.1 Explain Photo electric effect.
3.2 Define the terms work function and threshold frequency.
3.3 State Einstein’s photo electric equation and explain the terms.
3.4 State laws of photo electric effect.
3.5 List the applications of photo electric effect.
3.6 Explain working of photocell.
3.7 Explain the concept of refraction of light.
3.8 Define critical angle.
3.9 Define Total internal reflection.
3.10 State conditions for Total internal reflection.
3.11 Explain principle and working of optical fiber.
3.12 List the applications of optical fiber.
3.13 Define LASER. State the characteristics of LASER.
3.14 Explain the principle of LASER.
3.15 Define spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3.16 Define population inversion.
3.17 List the examples of LASER.
3.18 List the uses of LASER.
4 know the concept of Magnetism
4.1 Define magnetic field.

4.2 Define magnetic lines of force.
4.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.
4.4 Define Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field.
4.5 Define the terms magnetic length and pole strength of a bar magnet.
4.6 Define magnetic induction field strength.
4.7 State and explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
4.8 Derive the expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
4.9 Derive the formula for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar
magnet.
4.10 Define Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials with examples.
4.11 Solve related nu
5 know the concept of Electricity and measuring instruments
5.1 State Ohm’s law – Define ohmic and non ohmic conductors with examples
5.2 Explain temperature dependence of resistance – types of temperature coefficients with
examples
5.3 Define specific resistance. Write its units.
5.4 Define conductance.
5.5 Write the formulae for effective resistance in series and parallel combination of resistors with
diagram.
5.6 Explain moving coil galvanometer.
165
5.7 Conversion of a galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. Explain with diagram.
5.8 State and explain Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity.
5.9 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
5.10 Explain briefly Meter Bridge with neat diagram.
5.11 Define superconductivity.
5.12 Define superconductor. Give examples.
5.13 List the applications of superconductors.
6 know the concepts of Electronics and applications
6.1 Define solid.

6.2 Define valence band, conduction band and forbidden band in solids.
6.3 Explain conductors, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of energy band diagram.
6.4 Explain the concept of Fermi level.
6.5 Define intrinsic semiconductors.
6.6.1 List the examples for intrinsic semiconductors.
6.7 Explain the concept of hole in semiconductors.
6.8 Define doping.
6.9 Define extrinsic semiconductors.
6.10 Explain P-type and N-type semiconductors.
6.11 Explain PN Junction Diode (formation only).
6.12 Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode (biasing and flow of majority and minority
carriers with diagram only)
6.13 List the applications of PN Diode.
6.14 Explain the principle of diode as a rectifier.
6.15 Explain working principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
6.19 Explain the working principle of solar cell.
1. Student visits Library to refer Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications.
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Physics Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4.Seminar
5. Group discussion
6. Surprise tes
References:
1. Engineering Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
SEMESTER – II
SKILL UPGRATION – APPLIED PHYSICS

166
TASK
LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)
LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure
LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment
LEVEL 4: Interpretation/inference/evaluation.
Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:
(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author,
publisher, edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
Activities:-
1. Construct a blowing pipe to detect dangerous gases in mines.
2. Construct model stethoscope with known materials.
3. Conduct awareness program on noise pollution in your college, colony. Prepare a video
report.
4. Hypothesize seconds’ pendulum timer.
5. Prepare a power point presentation on photosensitive materials with detailed specifications.
6. Prepare a report on Lasers where they are practically used.
7. Prepare a power point presentation on application of optical fibers in medical and

engineering field.
8. How can you produce electricity with a magnet? – (a) Develop a working model/ prepare a
power point presentation with animation/ prepare drawings on a chart.
9. Construct an electric calling bell.
10. Setup a circuit on breadboard to verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
11. Prepare a power point presentation on Superconductors and their practical applications
with motion pictures embedded.
12. Collect various resistors, diodes and LEDs with specifications and compile on a card board.
NOTE:The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity
relevant
to the course based on resources available.
167
Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity
Hours
CO1 Construction of a blowing pipe to detect PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
dangerous gases in mines PO4, PO5, PO6
CO2 Construction of model stethoscope with PO1, PO2, PO5,
3
known materials PO7
CO3 Conduct of awareness program on noise PO1, PO2, PO5,
pollution in the college, colony and PO6, PO7, PO8, 3
preparation of a video report. PO9
CO4 Construction of a seconds’ pendulum timer PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO5 Preparation of PPT on photosensitive materials
PO1, PO2 3
with detailed specifications
CO6 Preparation of report on lasers practically PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
used PO5, PO10
CO7 Preparation of PPT on application of optical PO1, PO2,PO4,
fibers in medical and engineering field PO5, PO6, PO9, 3
PO10
CO8 Production of electricity with a magnet –
PO1, PO2,
working model, PPT with animation and 3
PO3,PO4
drawings on a chart.
CO9 Construction of an electric calling bell PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO10 Construction of a circuit on breadboard to PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law PO4
CO11 Preparation of PPT on Superconductors and
PO1, PO2, PO3,
their practical applications with motion 3
PO4, PO9, PO10
pictures.
CO12 Collection of various resistors, diodes and
LEDs with specifications and installation on a PO1, PO2 3
card board
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material was All All Data/Material
was collected one collected more than Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
Methodology/ Procedures were Procedures were Procedures Procedures that
Procedure outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- were outlined in were outlined
by-step fashion that step fashion that a step-by-step were incomplete
168
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after
accomplish this. expert
feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
AVE
S. Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) RAG
N PIN E
O CO CO CO
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8 CO9
10 11 12
169
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
170
C-18 COMMON-203F
MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Write the Sabine’s formula.

2. Define longitudinal wave.
3. Define Second’s pendulum.
4. Define SHM.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). Write any three applications of Beats.

(OR)
(b). Write any three effects of noise pollution.
6 (a). Write the conditions for SHM.

(OR)
(b). The displacement of a particle executing SHM is given by
Y=8Sin( πt + π /4 ) m. Find i) Amplitude ii) Angular velocity
and iii) Time period
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.

(OR)
(b). State five conditions of a good auditorium.
8 (a). Derive the expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

(OR)
(b). Derive the expressions for velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM.
171
C-18 COMMON-203F

MIDSEM – II
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define photoelectric effect.

2. Define total internal reflection.
3. Define magnetic field.
4. Write the formula for magnetic moment of a bar magnet.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). State three laws of photo electric effect.

(OR)
(b). Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission.
6 (a). Write three properties of magnetic lines of force.

(OR)
(b). Explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Explain the principle of LASER.

(OR)
(b). Explain working principle of optical fiber.
8 (a). Derive the formula for moment of couple acting on a bar magnet placed in uniform
magnetic field.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
172
of a bar magnet.
** *** **
.
C18 – COMMON 203F

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
Time: 2 Hours] Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=08

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Define an echo.
2. Write any two uses of optical fiber.
3. State Ohm’s law.
4. Write any two laws of Reflection.
5. Write SI unit of specific resistance
6. Define non ohmic conductors and give one example.
7. Define Fermi level.
8. Write any two advantages of LED’s.
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). Derive V= nλ.

(or)
9(b). Explain the temperature dependence of resistance on conductor.
10(a). Explain photo cell with neat diagram.

(or)
10(b). Define magnetic induction field strength, write its formula and SI unit.
11(a). State and explain Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

(or)
11(b). Write any three applications of Superconductors.
12(a). Explain principle of diode as a rectifier.

(or)
173
12(b). Write any three applications of p-n diode.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive the relation between time of an echo and distance obstacle
(or)
13(b). Derive the expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge.
14(a). Explain working principle of optical fiber with neat diagram.

(or)
14(b). Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode.
15(a). Explain briefly with neat diagram .

(or)
15(b). Explain moving coil galvanometer.
16(a). Explain the working principle of LED with neat diagram.

(or)
16(b). Explain the working principle of solar cell.
*** ** ***
Draft committee
1. Dr M.E. Jaya Raj, Faculty of Physics and Head of General Section, Govt Polytechnic for
Women, Badangpet.
Secunderabad.
Sri A. Jayakrishna Murthy, Lecturer in Physics, Govt Polytechnic, Yadagirigutta
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies Course Code : 18-AA-204F
Semester : Semester II Course Group : Foundation

Teaching Scheme in hours (L:T:P) : 30:15:00 Credits :3
Type of course : Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Hours : 60 periods
Prerequisite:
174
Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome:
On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below Course
Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods
CO Understand and explain the different metallurgical R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
1 processes, alloys and applications of alloys
CO Understand and explain corrosion and preventive methods R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
2 of corrosion
CO List out the different methods of preparation and industrial R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7, 12
10
3 uses of plastics, rubber and fibers. vulcanization of rubber
and its applications
CO Classify the fuels and explain basic terms of fuel, outline R/U/A 1,2,10 8
4 the composition and industrial use of gaseous fuels
CO Under stand and Explain Galvanic cell, emf of cell -electro R/U/A 1,2,5 12
5 chemical series-Applications of Galvanic cells, batteries and
cells and distinguish the Galvanic and electrolytic cell
CO Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of air R/U/A 1,2,5,7 8
6 and water pollutions.
Total Periods 60
Legends: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT - I: Metallurgy: (10 periods)

Characteristics of Metals - distinguish between Metals and Non Metals- Ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag -
Concentration of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal - Roasting,
Calcination, Smelting – Alloys-purpose of making alloys - Composition of Brass, German silver,
Nichrome, Stainless steel and Duralumin
UNIT – II: Corrosion: (10 periods)

Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion -
composition, stress and concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism - prevention of
corrosion - coating methods, Paints-constituents and characteristics of paints-cathodic protection.
UNIT – III: Polymers: (12 periods)
Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition, condensation with examples -

plastics - types of plastics - advantages of plastics over traditional materials - Disadvantages of using
plastics - preparation and uses of the following plastics: 1. Polythene 2. PVC 3.Teflon 4.
Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber - Elastomers –Preparartionof Butyl rubber,
Buna-s, Neoprene rubber and their uses-Fibres-Preparation and uses of fibres-Nylon 6,6-Polyester.
175
UNIT – IV: Fuels: (8 periods)
Definition and classification of fuels- characteristics of good fuel - Calorific value-HCV and LCV-
Calculation of oxygen required for combustion of methane and ethane - composition and uses of
gaseous fuels- a) water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas
and f) acetylene.
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force (12 periods)
Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential –electro chemical series -emf of cell-Batteries-Types of
batteries-Fuel cells.
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II : ( 8 periods)
Introduction- classification of air pollutants based on origin and states of matter-Air pollution -
causes-Effects - control methods - Water pollution - causes - effects - control measures.
UNIT – I: METALLURGY
1.1. List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2. Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3. Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.Slag
1.4. Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5. Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
1.6. Define an Alloy
1.7. Explain the purpose of making of alloys
1.8. Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German silver, 3.Nichrome
4. Stainless steel, 5. Duralumin
1.9. List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel,
Duralumin
UNIT – II: CORROSION
2.1. Define the term corrosion
2.2. Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
2.3. Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
2.4. Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c) concentration cell
2.5. Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical reactions.
2.6. Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion:
a) Protective Coatings i) Metallic coatings (Anodic and cathodic coatings) ii) Inorganic
coatings iii) Organic coatings, paint, constituent of paint and characteristics of good paint.
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed - voltage process).
UNIT – III: POLYMERS

3.1. Explain the concept of polymerization
3.2. Describe the methods of polymerization a) addition polymerization
b) condensation polymerization with examples.
176
3.3. Define the term plastic
3.4. List the Characteristics of plastics.
3.5. State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
3.6. State the disadvantages of using plastics.
3.7. Types of plastics with examples.
3.8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
3.9. Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4.Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite
(only flow chart for Bakelite i.e. without chemical equations).
3.10. Define the term natural rubber
3.11. Explain preparation of natural rubber
3.12. State the structural formula of Natural rubber
3.13. List the Characteristics of natural rubber
3.14. Explain the process of Vulcanization
3.15. List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
3.16. Define the term Elastomer
3.17. Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber,
b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber.
3.18. Define fibre.
3.19. Explain the preparation and uses of fibres –Nylon 6,6 and Polyester
UNIT – IV: FUELS

4.1. Define the term fuel
4.2. Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and gaseous fuels with examples.
4.3. Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels with examples.
4.4. List the characteristics of a good fuel
4.5.Advantages of gaseous fuels
4.6. Define Calorific value- HCV and LCV.
4.7. Calculate the oxygen required for the combustion of Methane and Ethane fuel gases.
4.8. State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force

5.1. Define Galvanic cell
5.2. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.3. Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.4. Explain standard electrode potential
5.5. Explain standard hydrogen electrode
5.6. Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
5.7. Define and explain emf of a cell.
5.8. Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
5.9. Explain Batteries (Cells) and types of batteries with examples –working and applications of
Dry cell (Leclanche cell), Lead storage battery, Ni-Cd cell
5.10. Explain working and advantages of Fuel cell (Hydrogen - Oxygen Fuel Cell)
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

6.1. Define air pollution
6.2. Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
177
6.3. Explain the causes of air pollution
6.4. Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
6.5. Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
6.6. Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.7. Define water pollution
6.8. Explain the causes of water pollution
6.9. Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
6.10. Explain the methods of control of water pollution.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
Reference Books :
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – DhanpatRai Publishing Company.

2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
E learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies

Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities
178
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different methods of concentration of ore :
Step-1: Data collection on the ores and different methods of concentration of ore.
Step -2: Prepare for oral/a power point presentation on different methods of concentration of ore.
Step-3: Explain the methods of concentration of ore with oral presentation/ power point
presentation
Activity – 2
Corrosion of a metal under different conditions:
Step-1: Collection of data related to the factors effecting the corrosion.

Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment under different conditions such as
i. Metal exposed to air only
ii. Metal exposed to dry air
iii. Metal partially dipped in salt water
iv. Metal completely dipped in water
v. Metal partially dipped in pure water
Note: This experiment may be conducted in other conditions also.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion under different conditions
after one week with explanation
Step-5: overall presentation of the activity
Activity – 3
Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys exposed to the same environmental

conditions:
Step-1: Data collection.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with different metals/alloys such as Iron, stainless
steel,
aluminum, copper etc. under the same conditions
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after
one
week with explanation
Activity – 4
Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes and surfaces under same environmental
conditions:
179
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal having different shapes and surfaces
under
the same conditions.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after
one
week with explanation
Activity – 5
Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using different coating materials

Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal coated with different materials like oil,
paint, plastic, rubber etc
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on the metals after one
week
with explanation
Activity – 6
Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages and disadvantages

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on recycling, advantages and disadvantages of
platsics
Step-4: Explain about the recycling, advantages and disadvantages of plastics and suggest the
measures to protect the environment
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 7
Study on natural rubber and its uses

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on processing of natural rubber from natural
source
and vulcanization..
Step-4: Explain about the properties and uses of natural and vulcanized rubber.
Activity – 8
180
Power point presentation on fossil fuels

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on fossil fuels.
Step-4: Explain about the advantages and disadvantages of solid , liquid and gaseous fuels.
Activity – 9
Study and analysis of environment related air pollution

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of air.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of air and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Activity – 10
Study and analysis of environment related water pollution

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of water body.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of water body and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Activity – 11
Study and analysis of college environment

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the environment of the institution.
Step-4: Explain about the existing environment and suggest the measures to improve it through ppt.
Activity – 12
Construction of Galvanic cell

Step -3: Construction of any galvanic cell.
Step-4: Explain about the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell through ppt.
Mapping of POs to Student activities
181
o
1 Power point presentation on the different methods of 1,2,4,8,9
concentration of ore
2 Corrosion of a metal under different conditions 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
3 Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
exposed to the same environmental conditions
4 Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
and surfaces under same environmental conditions
5 Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
different coating materials
6 Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

advantages and disadvantages
7 Study on natural rubber and its uses 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Power point presentation on fossil fuels 1,2,4,5,7,8,9,10
9 Study and analysis of environment related air pollution 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
10 Study and analysis of environment related water 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

pollution
11 Study and analysis of college environment 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
12 Construction of Galvanic cell 1,2,3,4,5,8,9
Model Rubrics
S. Sub Performance
o improvement
help of teacher.
182
activity normally
diagrams.
Draft Committee

183
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
Model Question Papers
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Sub. Code: 18common-204F
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks : 20
PART – A

184
Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. Define the terms mineral and ore.
2. Define an alloy.
3. Define corrosion.
4. What is paint?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. List any six characteristics of metals.

or
b. Explain the process of roasting of ore with an example.
6. a. List any six factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
or
b. Explain the formation of stress cell with an example.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Explain the froth floatation process of concentration of ore .

or
b. Write the composition and uses of Brass, German silver .
8. a. Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical equations.
or
b. Explain sacrificial anode method of prevention of corrosion with a neat diagram.
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Sub. Code: 18common-204F
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A

1. What is the chemical name of natural rubber?
2. Define polymerization.
3. What are fuels?
4. Mention any two characteristics of good fuel.
PART – B
5. a. Write any three advantages of plastics over traditional materials.

185
or
b. Write a method of preparation and uses of Nylon-6,6 .
6. a. Define colorific value and differentiate lower and higher calorific values .
or
b. Classify the fuels based on their physical state.
PART – C
7. a. What is vulcanization of rubber and explain with chemical equations.

or
b. Distinguish thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
8. a. Write the composition and uses of water gas and producer gas.
or
b. Calculate the mass and volume of the oxygen required for the complete combustion of 8
grams of CH4
C-18COMMON-204F
II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks : 40
PART – A

1. Define gangue.
2. What are the different types of plastics?
3. Define Galvanic cell.
4. What is the chemical formula of rust?
5. What is electrochemical series?
6. What are the different types of batteries?
7. Define air pollution.
8. Define water pollution.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions.

Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12 Marks
9. a. Write any three differences between metals and non-metals.
or
b. Write any three significances of electrochemical series.
186
10. a. Write a method of preparation and two uses of polystyrene.
or
b. Classify the pollutants based on origin and give examples.
11. a. Write any three differences between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
or
b. Write the electrode reaction of lead storage battery during discharging.
12. a. Write a short note on Green house effect.
or
b. Write a note on Ozone layer depletion.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions.

Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20 Marks
13. a. Explain the formation of composition cell and stress cell.
or
b. Describe the construction and working principle of Leclanche cell.
14. a. Calculate the mass and volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 15 gm
of
ethane( C2H6).
or
b. Explain the causes of water pollution.
15. a. Explain the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell.
or
b. Explain working principle of H2-O2 fuel cell.
16. a. Explain the control methods of water pollution.
Or
b. Explain the causes of air pollution.
Draft Committee

12. Smt L. Seetha, Lecturer in Chemistry, SGMGPT, Abdullapurmet
ADVANCED BUILDING MATERIALS
Course Title ADVANCED BUILDING MATERIALS Course Code 18AA-205C
Semester II Course group Core

Teaching scheme in
Total Contact
187
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic English at Secondary school level
Course Outcomes
CO1 : : Identify and describe different types of building materials
CO2 : : Describe the various properties, uses and market trends of different types of materials
CO3 : Describe the suitability of different types of materials for different building parts and
constructions.
CO4 : Suggest materials for different types of construction activity
CO5 : Ask relevant questions about a new material and find out the properties, uses and market
trends of the new material by doing a market survey
1 Glass 8
2 Metals 12
Paints and 12
3
Varnishes
4 Plastics 8
5 Modern materials 12
6 Applications 8
Totals 60
Course Contents
Unit 1: Glass Duration: 12 Hours (L: T: )

Properties and uses of glasses, Types and uses of glass available in market - Soda lime glass, Sheet
glass, Fibre glass, Structural glass, Wired glass and, Bullet proof glass, float glass.
Unit 2: Metals Duration: 12 Hours(L: T: )

Properties and Uses of - Copper, lead, zinc, Aluminium, Cast -Iron, Brass, Steel & Stainless steel,
Unit 3: Paints and Varnishes Duration: 12 Hours(L: T: )
188
Characteristics of Paints - Varnishes. Different types of paints on different wall surfaces – White
cement, Cement primer- Oil bound distempers – Emulsion, Paints, Varnishes, Polyurethane coating,
Touchwood, Wood seals, Melamine finishes.
Unit4: Plastics Duration: 08 Hours(L: T: )

Uses of Plastics - Fibre reinforced plastics, Alkalythene,
Polythene, PVC, Perspex, Thermo-plastics, Thermo setting plastics.
Unit 5: Modern Materials Duration: 12 Hours(L: T: )
Uses of Thermocole, Plaster of paris, Glass wool, Fibreglass,

Asbestos sheets, Fibre sheets, Cork, Rubber. Uses and Properties of the above materials
Unit 6: Applications Duration: 08 Hours(L: T: )
Uses of of different metals in buildings, painting of woodwork and metal work
1.0 Glass
1.1 State the important uses of glass in modern buildings
1.2 State the types of glass available in the market and their uses
1.3 Describe the different types of glass available in the market
2.0 Metals
2.1 State the characteristics of different metals
2.2 State the uses of different metals in building industry
2.3 Copper, lead, Zinc, Cast Iron, Aluminium, Steel, Stainless steel and Brass
3.0 Paints and varnishes
3.1 State the characteristics of good paint and varnish
3.2 Describe the different types of paints and varnishes available in the market.
4.0 Plastics
4.1 State the characteristics of plastics
4.2 Thermo dynamic and thermo setting plastics
4.3 Properties of different types of plastics
4.4 Use of plastics in building construction.
5.0 Modern Materials:
5.1 List out modern materials of construction
5.2 Thermacole, Plaster of Paris, Glass wool, Fibre glass, Asbestos, Cork, Rubber
5.3 Properties and uses of the above materials.
6.0 Applications
6.1 State the use of different metals in the building industry
6.2 Describe the process of painting the wood work old and new
6.3 Describe the process of painting metal work old and new

189
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
1. Quiz
2. Group discussion
3. Seminar
4. Surprise tests
1. Make a detailed literaturestudy of the various building materials and prepare a scrap book
along with sketches, pictures and photographs.
2. A material/market survey is to be conducted to know the variety of different materials,
costing and applications. The material so collected shall be made in to a report as well as a
power point presentation.
3. Visits to industry to get familiarized with the manufacturing process. The following
industries may be visited: 1. Glass 2. Metals 3. Paints &varnishes 4. Plastics 5. Modern
materials
4. Students may visit museums where display of materials is done, andcollect some of the
samples and able to analyze and explain them.
5. Collect data on new materials/ alternate building materials from construction and research
organizations like CBRI, ROORKEE; NATIONAL COUNCIL FOR CEMENT AND BUILDING
MATERIALS, NCB BHAVAN; NATIOAL ACADEMY OF CONSTRUCTION; HOUSING AND
CONSTRUCTION WING OF CSIR. Visit the Research & Development wings of these
organizations if possible.
Recommneded Books:
1. Engineering Materials by S.C.Rangawala.
2. Engineering Materials by Sushilkumar.
3. Engineering Materials by G.J. Kulkarni.
4. Engineering Materials by P.C.Varghese
1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Building_material
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105102088/
3. http://www.journals.elsevier.com/construction-and-building-materials/
4. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/86/Building-Materials-and-Construction
NOTE: Material museum is to be established for explaining the students, the characteristics,
cost, availability of each material
2.Students should be sent for market survey to collect information about the materials available
in the market and update the product variations that the manufacturer has brought in.
CO-PO Mapping
190
CO1 Identify and describe different types of building R/U 1,2

materials
CO2 Describe the various properties, uses and R/U/A 1,2

market trends of different types of
materials
EXAMINATION PATTERN
CO3 Describe theMID
suitability
SEM - of different types of
I EXAM(Duration 1 hour) R/U/A 1,2,5
materials
PART A for different building
PART B parts and
PART C Total Marks
constructions
No.CO4
of Questions
Suggest4 materials
Questionsfor different
2/4 Questions
types of 2/4 Questions
R/U/A 1,2,5,9
S.No. Unit No. construction R activity U A Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 Ask
UNIT II relevant questions
3,4 about a new material
6(a) or 6(b) and
8(a) orR/U/A
8(b) 1,2,10
find out the properties,
Total Questions 4 uses and 4market trends 4
CO5 of the material by
Total Marks 4 doing a market survey
6 10 20 Marks
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS, (C18)
191
Engineering tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Ethics

Communication
Building
Materials- 3 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
II
MID SEM 1
C18AA205C- ADVANCED BUILDING MATERIALS.

Part A 4x1=4marks
1. List any two types of glass

2. State any two uses of glass
3. List any two types of metals used in building industry
4. State any two uses of metals in construction.
Part B 2x3=6marks
5. a) Describe the characteristics of on any one type of glass
OR
d) Write short notes on any one type of glass
6. a) Write short notes on Copper

OR
b) Write short notes on Aluminium.
Part C 2x5=10marks
7. a) Describe how you will select glass for a residence window.
OR
b) State the properties of glass that make it suitable for construction industry.
8. a)State the advantages of stainless steel over cast iron

OR
b) State the advantages and disadvantages of lead as a building material.
192
MID SEM 2

Part A 4x1=4marks
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark
1. Define thermosetting plastics.
2. List any two types of plastic products available in the market.
3. List any two types of paints
4. List any two types of varnishes
Part B 2x3=6marks
5. a) State the characteristics of a good paint
OR
e) State the characteristics of good varnish
6. a) State any three uses of plastics

OR
b) State any three differences between thermo and thermosetting plastics
Part C 2x5=10marks
7. a) Describe the method in which you will select the paint for a building
OR
b) Describe the process of selection of a varnish for a wood product
8. a) State the advantages and disadvantages of plastics

OR
b) Describe the environmental impact of plastics


Part A 8x1=8 marks
10. State any two uses of glass
11. List any two types of plastic products available in the market
12. List any two modern materials used in construction industry.
13. State the advantages of glass
14. Write short notes on thermacole
15. Write short notes on Asbestos
193
16. Write short notes on cleaning of old woodwork before painting.
17. Describe the characteristics of good paintwork.
Part B 4x3=12 marks
18. a)Describe the demerits of asbestos
OR
b) Define galvanization.
10. a) State the precautions to be taken when doing paintwork
OR
b) Write short notes on painting of new wood work.
11. a)State the uses of rubber
OR
b) Define vulcanization.
12. a) State the uses of painting wood.
OR
b) State the uses of painting iron work.
Part C 4x5=20 marks
13. a) Write short notes on the uses of brass in building industry
OR
b) Describe how glass wool is used in building industry.
14. a) State the advantages of distemper over white washing.
OR
b) State the precautions to be taken before painting old iron work.
15. a) Write short notes on plaster of Paris

OR
b) Write short notes on cork
16. a) Describe the method of painting old wood work
OR
b) Describe the method of painting old iron work.
ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE
Course Title ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING Course Code 18AA-206P

PRACTICE
Semester II Course group Core
Teaching scheme in 1:0:2 Credits 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Drawing Studio Total Contact 45
Hours
194
Prerequisites: The student should have basic knowledge of English and Mathematics at Secondary
School level. An interest and aptitude for drawing is preferable
CO1 : Comprehend the concept of scales and draw different scales given RF and maximum length
of the scale
CO2 : Comprehend the fundamental concepts and draw orthographic projections of different
positions of pints and lines
geometrical planes
engineering solids
CO5 : Comprehend the concept and draw sections of different engineering objects
CO6 : Comprehend and draw pictorial views of engineering solids
Unit Unit Name Hour

No
1 Scales 6
2 Ortho graphic projection of points and lines 6
3 Orthographic projection of planes 6
4 Orthographic projection of solids 9
5 Sections 9
6 Pictorial views 9
Total 45
Course Content
Unit1: Scales Duration: 9 hours (L: Studio: )

Explanation of scales, R.F. importance of scales constructionof plain scale, diagonal scale.
Unit2: Orthographic projection of points and lines Duration: 6 hours (L: Studio: )
The concept of orthographic projection, the division of space into quadrants, XY line and X plane and
Y plane, HP, VP, First angle projection, Position of points in space and their projections.
Unit3: Orthographic projection of planes Duration: 6 hours (L: Studio: )
195
Identification of different geometrical planes, orthographic projections of planes in different relative
positions to XY line
Unit4: Orthographic projection of solids Duration: 6 hours (L: Studio: )

Identification of different types of solids- polyhedra, prisms, pyramids, solids of revolution and
frustums
Orthographic projection of engineering solids in various relative positions with respect to HP and VP
Unit5: Sections Duration: 9 hours (L: Studio: )
Need to draw a section, Importance of section plane, Relative positions of section plane, position for
maximum information, orthographic projections of engineering solids under sectioning, true shape
of the section.
Unit 6 : Pictorial views Duration: 9 hours (L: Studio: )
Need for drawing pictorial views, types of pictorial views, projection of isometric, oblique and
axonometric views of engineering objects.
1.0 Scales
1.1 Define the concept of scales
1.2 Comprehending enlarging and reducing scales
1.3 Construct plain scales
1.4 Construct Diagonal scales
1.5 Define the use of scales in drawing
2.0 Orthographic projections of points and lines
2.1 The concept of orthographic projection,
2.2 the division of space into quadrants, XY line and X plane and Y plane, HP, VP,
2.3 First angle projection,
2.4 Position of points in space and their projections
3.0 Orthographic projection of planes
3.1 List the different types of geometrical planes
3.2 Projections of different planes in different relative positions
4.0 Orthographic projection of solids
4.1 List and describe different types of engineering solids
4.2 Projections of different solids in different relative positions
5.0 Sections
5.1 Need to draw a section,
5.2 Importance of section plane, selection for maximum information
5.3 Relative positions of section plane,
5.4 orthographic projections of engineering solids under sectioning,
5.5 true shape of the section.
6.0 Pictorial views
6.1 Need for drawing pictorial views,
6.2 types of pictorial views,
6.3 projection of isometric,
6.4 Projection of oblique and
6.5 Projection of axonometric views
196
Suggested Student Activities 7.0
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
1. Quiz
2. Assignments
3. Seminars
4. Surprise Tests
1. Construct scale models (1:1; 1:2; 1:5) of simple geometrical forms like a square, rectangle,
circle, etc. with mount board/foam sheet.
2. Construct models of simple geometrical solids like cube/ cuboid / cone/cylinder etc. with
card board/wood/polystyrene, etc.
3. Construct section models of a cube/ cuboid /cone/cylinder.
Recommended Books:
1.K.R.Gopalakrishna“Fundamentals of Drawing” Subhas Publications, 2010.
2.K.R.Gopalakrishna“Engineering Drawing” (Vol 1.), Subhas Publications, 2014.
3. Geometrical Art and Drawing - I. H.Morris.
4. Engineering Drawing – N.D.Bhatt.
Suggested E-Learning resources
1. www.engineeringdrawing.org/
2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Engineering_drawing/
CO PO Mapping Matrix
CO1 Comprehend the concept of scales R/U 1,2,3,4

and draw different scales given RF
and maximum length of the scale
CO2 Comprehend the fundamental R/U/A 1,2,3,4
concepts and draw orthographic
projections of different positions of
pints and lines
CO3 Comprehend the fundamental R/U/A 1,2,3,4,
projections of different geometrical
planes
CO4 Comprehend the fundamental R/U/A 1,2,3,4
projections of different engineering
solids
197
CO5 Comprehend the concept and draw R/U/A 1,2,3,4
sections of different engineering
objects
CO6 Comprehend and draw pictorial R/U/A 1,2,3,4
views of engineering solids
EXAMINATION PATTERN
No. of Questions 4 Questions 2/4 Questions
S.No. Unit No. U A Remarks
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4

1 UNIT I 1 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 6(a) or 6(b)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 7(a) or 7(b)
Total Questions 4 8
For subjects AA - 106, 107, 108, 206, 208, 406
C18-AA-206D

C18AA 206D-ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE.
Time: 1 hour Max Marks: 20
198
PART A 4X2=8MARKS
1. List the different types of scales used in drawing.
2. Draw a plain scale of RF1:4 showing centimeters and long enough to measure upto 5
decimeters.
3. Define first angle projection.
4. A point is 25mm above HP and 30mm in front of VP. Draw its projections.
PART B 6X2=12MARKS
5. a) Construct a diagonal scale of RF 3:200 showing meters, decimeters and centimeters and
can measure up to 6meters. Show a distance of 3.25 meters on it.
Or
b) Construct a diagonal scale of RF 1:4000 to show meters and long enough to measure up
to 500 meters. Show a distance of 256meters on it.
6. a) Draw the projections of a point ‘A’ 40mm above HP and 25mm in front of VP.
Or
b)A line PQ 90mm long is in the HP and makes an angle of 30 0 to VP. Its end P is 25mm in
front of VP. Draw its projections.
C18-AA-206P

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM -I i EXAMINATION (C-18)
C18AA 206P-ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE.

PART A 4X2=8MARKS
1. An equilateral triangle of side 50mm is lying on HP with one of its sides making an angle of
450 to the VP. Draw its projections.
2. A square of side 40mm has a corner on HP and 20mm in front of VP. All the sides are equally
inclined to HP and parallel to VP. Draw its projections.
3. List the different types of engineering solids
4. Draw the projections of a triangular prism of base side 40mm and axis 50mm long, resting
on one of its bases on HP with a vertical face perpendicular to VP
PART B 6X2=12MARKS
5. a) A regular pentagon of side 25mm has one side on the ground. . It plane is inclined at 45 0
to HP and perpendicular to VP. Draw its projections.
199
Or
b) Draw the projections of a circle 50mm in diameter have its plane vertical and inclined at
0
30 to VP. Its centre is 30mm above HP and 20mmm in front of VP.
6. a) Draw the projections of a cube with 50mm long edges. It is resting on HP such that all its
vertical faces are equally inclined to VP.
Or
b) Draw the projections of pentagonal prism base side 25mm and axis 50mm long, resting
on one of its rectangular faces on HP with the axis inclined at 45 0 to VP.
C18-AA-206P

C18AA 206P-ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE.
Time: 3 hours Max Marks: 40

PART A 4X4=16MARKS
1. Draw and describe different types of lines used in drawing.

2. Draw the projections of as hexagonal pyramid base 30mm side and axis 60mm long having
its base on HP and one of the edges of the base inclined at 45 0 to VP.
3. A triangular prism base side 30mm and axis 50mmlong is lying on HP on one of its
rectangular faces with its axis inclined at 300 to VP. It is cut by a horizontal section plane at a
distance of 12mm above the ground. Draw its sectional top view and front view.
4. Draw the isometric projection shown in the figure below.
PART B 4X6=24MARKS
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries six marks.
5. a) ) Construct a diagonal scale of RF 1:4000 to show meters and long enough to measure up
to 500 meters. Show a distance of 256meters on it
Or
200
b) A line PQ 90mm long is in the HP and makes an angle of 30 0 to VP. Its end P is 25mm in
front of VP. Draw its projections.
6. a) Draw the projections of a cylinder of radius 30mm and 75mm length of axis. Its axis is
perpendicular to VP and 50mm above HP with one end of the cylinder 20mm in front of VP.
Or
b) An equilateral triangle of side 50mm is lying on HP with one of its sides making an angle
of 450 to the VP. Draw its projections
7. a) A hexagonal prism has a face on HP and axis parallel to VP. It is cut by a vertical plane
making an angle of 450 to HP and cuts the axis at a point 20mm from one of the ends of the
prism. Draw the sectional front view and true shape of the section. The side of the prism is
25mm and 65mm length of axis.
Or
b) A pentagonal pyramid base 30mm side and axis 65mm long has its base on HP and axis
perpendicular to HP and an edge of the base parallel to VP. A horizontal section plane cuts
it at a distance of 25mm above base. Draw its front view and sectional top view.
8. a)Draw the isometric view of the object the OP of the object are given below.
or
b) Draw the isometric view of the object the OP of the object are given below.
201
BASIC ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Course Title Basic Architectural Design Course Code 18 AA -207 P
Semester II Course group core
Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Lecture , Site visits, Studio work

Type of course Total Contact Hours 45
& assignments
Pre requisites
This course requires knowledge of elements and principles of design.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Know graphical representation of architectural elements
CO2 : Apply anthropometric data in the design of furniture and building design problems.
Impart knowledge related to design process

CO3:
202
Ability to prepare floor plans and elevations of two/three rooms to different scales
CO4 :
.
Develop the ability to translate the abstract principles of design into architectural
CO5 :
solutions for small problems.
Demonstrate artistic growth that solve design problems using creative thinking and
CO6 : analytical skills
TIME SCHEDULE
Architectural symbols 6
1
Anthropometric Data 3
2 Design process 3
3 Scale and measured Drawings 9
4 Design of Small Kiosks 9
5 Design of EWS house 7
5 &6 Design of LIG Houses 8
Total 45
Course Contents:
Unit1: Architectural Symbols Duration: 6 hours

1.1 Meaning of the term architectural symbols
1.2 Symbols for building materials
1.3 Symbols for building elements like doors, windows, chajjas, steps, etc.
1.4 Electrical symbols like switch board, light, fan etc.
1.5 Plumbing symbols like wash basin, water closet, bath tub, etc.
1.6 Furniture symbols like bed, sofa, dining chair and table.
1.7 Plant material symbols like trees, shrubs and ground covers.
Anthropometric Data Duration: 3 hours
1.8 Basic measurements of an average adult human being in different postures

1.9 Proportions of body parts and graphic presentation
Unit2: Design Process Duration: 3 hours
2.1 Study of functional spaces, areas and furniture arrangements

2.2 Study of human considerations like privacy, convenience, light, ventilation, view, etc.
2.3 Study of design considerations like culture, context, circulation.
2.4 Case study of a small house and critical appraisal of the spaces
2.12 Pre design study- user requirements and study of site and its environs.
Unit3: Scale and Measured Drawings Duration: 9 hours

203
3.1 Brief enlarged and reduced scales
3.2 Measure an EWS/LIG house and prepare measured drawings in plan, elevation and section
Unit4: Design of Kiosks Duration: 9 hours
4.1 Design of a Kiosks – milk booth, watchman’s room, flower stall, ATM Center, traffic police kiosk.
4.2 Draw plan and elevation
Unit 5 : DESIGN OF EWS house Duration: 7 hours

5.1 Integration of form and function in the design of EWS
5.2 Importance of circulation diagrams as graphic tools
Unit 6: Design of LIG House
6.1 Draw the plan elevation and section of a LIG House

1.0 Architectural symbols
1.1 Learn to draw specific architectural symbols as per Indian Standard Code books.
1.2 know to draw symbols for building materials. Electrical and plumbing fixtures, doors and
windows, etc.
Anthropometric Data
2.1Anthropometric data in various postures like standing, sitting, bending, reach of the hands,
etc.
2.0 Design Process

2.1 Study of the design process- human, functional, design and circulation aspects are dealt with
2.2 Study of the site environment
3.0Scale and measured Drawings

3.1 Importance and purpose of scale & measured drawngs.
3.2 To be able to draw architectural drawngs to scale for a given problem.
4.0 Design of small Kiosks

4.1 Given a single line diagram, should be able to draw to scale floor plan and elevation
4.2 Able to measure and draw to scale floor plans and elevations of small rooms.
5.0 Design of EWS Houses

5.1 Should be able to design & draw a complete set of drawings with the following aspects:
a) Circulation diagram
b) Conceptual Floor Plan
c) Single line Floor Plan
d) Floor Plan Drawings
e) Elevations
f) Sections
6.0 Design of LIG House

a) Circulation diagram
b) Conceptual Floor Plan
c) Single line Floor Plan
d) Floor Plan Drawings
204
e) Elevations
f) Sections
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
2. Assignments
3. Quiz
1. Prepare a chart of Anthropometric data.

2. Prepare a chart of different architectural symbols.
3. Measure different furniture pieces and sketch them.
Recommended Books:
1. Shah, M.G., Kale, C.M. and Patki, S.Y. Building Drawing: withan integrated approach to built
environment, 7th ed. TataMcGraw Hill Pub., Delhi, 2000.
2. Building drawing by Shaw, Kale &Patki
3. Architecture: Drafting & Design by Donald E Helper
4. Time Savers Standards – Building Types by Joseph De Chiara and others
5. Neufert Architect’s Data by Neufert, Erst
6. Relevant Indian Standard Code Books
Web links
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Architectural_drawing/
https://www.bing.com/videos/search?
q=architectural+drawing+&&view=detail&mid=B19C818345A0669
19125B19C818345A066919125&FORM=VRDGAR/
q=Floor+Plans&&view=detail&mid=39E9A2D856D40FB4BEE039E9
A2D856D40FB4BEE0&FORM=VRDGAR/
q=Floor+Plans&&view=detail&mid=DEA8EC5DFCDBEA7E3CDDDEA
8EC5DFCDBEA7E3CDD&rvsmid=39E9A2D856D40FB4BEE039E9A2D856D40FB4BEE0&FORM=VDQVA
P&fs
scr=0/
http://www.designingbuildings.co.uk/wiki/Concept_architectural_design/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YeKPt1oVjVE
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vmHoGicPQQQ
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BjyGHjAwuP0/
EXAMINATION PATTERN
205
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4

1 UNIT I 1
2 UNIT II 2
3 UNIT III 3
4 UNIT IV 4
5 UNIT V 5(a) or 5 (b)
6 UNIT VI 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
For subjects AA- 207
C-18 AA-207P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS (C- 18 )
D A A - II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
18 AA -207P BASIC ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
TIME—3 HOURS MAX. MARKS -40
PART -A
4X4 =16 MARKS.
Instructions - 1. Answer all questions .
2. Each carries FOUR marks.
1. Draw the conventional symbols for the following building materials.

(a) cement mortar (b) brick (c) stone (d) wood
2. Draw an anthropometric data of a women working at kitchen platform.
3. Explain ventilation and draw the sketches of cross ventilation.
4. Draw a room plan of 4x4m and wall thickness is 0.30m.
206
PART – B 2X12=24MARKS
Instructions - 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Assume data where ever necessary.
5 (a) Draw the plan and elevation of watchman cabin . scale—1:50
Or
(b) Draw the plan and elevation of flower stall. Scale -1:50
6. ( a) Draw the plan and elevation with the following requirements ---------
(a) Multipurpose hall 8x4m
( b) Kitchen 3x3m
(c) Toilet 2x2m
Drawings required --------
Plan Scale ----1:50 8marks
Sectional Elevation scale ---1:50 4marks
(b) Draw the LIG plan , elevation and section with the following requirements-----
1. Living room 4x4m
2. Bed room 4x4m
3. Kitchen 3x3m
4. Toilet 3x2m
Drawings required -----
Plan scale-1:50 8marks
Sectional Elevation scale-1:50 4marks
ARCHITECTURAL GRAPHICS
Course Title ARCHITECTURAL GRAPHICS Course Code 18 AA -208 D
Semester II Course group core
Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skill and interest in the fields of art and design.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The focus is on studying and using layout and design concepts used in visual design
CO1 :

CO2 :
Visual design learnt in the context of time and place influences
.
CO3: Students will employ analog media (drawing with pencil and paper, etc.)
207

CO4 :
Employing a variety of media, materials & techniques.
CO5 : To develop the mental faculties of observation, imagination and creation
To develop skills and sensitivity towards the use of visual elements for an effective visual
CO6 :
communication of problem solving for the wellbeing of society and individuals.
1 Rendering 6
2 Still Life 9
3 Nature Drawing 6
4 Man-made environment 9
5 Landscapes 6
6 Memory Drawing 9
Total 45
Course Contents
Unit1: Rendering
1.1 Rendering techniques for various materials used in buildings
1.1 Techniques for various floor finishes
1.2 Rendering windows and shadows
1.3 Rendering rocks, water bodies, plant material
1.4 Rendering human beings and cars
Unit2: Still Life

2.1 Sketch a group of 1/2/3 to 5 simple objects placed in front of the students.
2.2 Objects should be of good form based on basic geometric/ non geometric shapes
2.3 Students should be able to render tonal values in colour or gray scale.
2.4 The objects may be arranged on the floor or above at some suitable height.
2.5 Medium of drawing is pencil/water or poster colour, crayons or colour pencil
Unit3: Nature Drawing

1.1 Sketching plant material in various forms- trees, shrubs
1.2 Sketching foliage, flowers and fruits and render them
3.3 To make an enlarged drawing of parts of a plant such as joints, stems, knots, petals, etc.
3.4 The medium of drawing is pencil and water colour
Unit4: Man made Environment
4.1 Architectural graphics - drawing human figures in various postures

4.2 Buildings- sloping roof, heritage building and a modern building
4.2 Cars in relation to a building and surroundings
Unit5: Landscapes
5.1 Landscape graphics – elements like sky, water, plant material, rockery,buildings, bridges
208
Unit 6 : Memory Drawing
6.1 To draw simple familiar objects (animate and inanimate)in pencil and color).
6.2 Visit to a park, fair, circus
6.3 Scene related to family festivities- a birthday party, a festival
6.4 National festivals
6.5 Public spaces like a railway station or a bus stand
6.6 The medium of drawing is pencil or wax crayons
SPECIFIC LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Rendering
1.1 To make the drawing appear more realistic
1.2 To know the various techniques of rendering
1.3 To know various media of rendering
1.4 Adding textures to building materials
1.5 Establish shade and shadow patterns
2.0 Still Life

2.1 Develop the ability to draw the shapes of objects in pencil and colour.
2.2 Understand tones and gray scale theory
2.3 Understand forms and relative proportions
2.4 To develop an idea of space organization
2.5 To handle various mediums of colour
2.6 To incorporate textures
2.7 Know the importance of composition
3.0 Nature Drawing

3.1 Develop the ability to observe and render a simple natural forms.
3.2 Study natural forms and their growth and structure
4.0 Man made Environment

4.1 Able to sketch human figure, cars and buildings.
5.0 Landscapes
5.1 Importance of composition
5.2 Foreground/ background effects
5.3 To understand the perspective effect
6.0 Memory Drawing

6.1 To illustrate any familiar incident from our daily life.
6.2 To create a picture based on a number of given animate and inanimate objects
6.3 Activities from our day to day life are to be sketched
For example, three children playing in a garden, a woman working in a kitchen, an Indian
festival, A scene at railway station or bus stand, etc.

1. Literature study through books
209
2. You tube videos
3. Sketches
4. Rendering
Skill Up Gradation Projects:

1. Outdoor sketching- Students should be taken to different locations to experience and sketch
various scenes from our day to day activities and learn to draw detailing by looking at
real/natural things.
Recommended Books:
1. Rendering with Pen & Ink - Robert W Gill
2. Learn Pencil shading (Sketching) – I by Navneet Publications of India Limited
3. Learn Pencil shading (Landscapes & Objects) – I by Navneet Publications of India Limited
4. Drawing for Pleasure -- Search Press
5. Art and Visual Perception – Arnheim, R
www.austincc.edu/viscom
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
1 UNIT III 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b)
Total Questions 4 4
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION Duration 2 hours)

1 UNIT I 1 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 210 7(a) or 7(b)
Total Questions 4 8
For subjects AA - 106, 107, 108, 206, 208, 406
C -18 (18 AA -208D)
DAA- SECOND SEMESTER END EXAMINATION,
18AA -208D ARCHITECTURAL GRAPHICS

Time : 2 Hours Max Marks: 40
PART – A Marks : 4x4=16
Note: Answer all questions

Each question carries 4 marks
1. Draw any four rendering techniques of building materials

2. Sketch any two different leaf patterns
3. Draw a small building with a sloping roof.
4. Sketch a bridge or a culvert
PART – B Marks: 4x6=24
Note: Answer all the questions

Each question carries 6 marks.
5. a) Sketch a car under a tree

OR
b) Sketch a pond and render the same.
6. Sketch any two types of shrubs.
OR
b) Sketch a still life showing three different types of objects in gray scale.
7. a) Sketch a village landscape.

OR
b) Sketch and render an evergreen tree.
8. a) Sketch a scene at a railway station.

OR
b) Sketch two children playing in a park.
Applied Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab)
Course Title Applied Science Lab Course Code 18AA-209P(A)

Practice (Physics Lab)
Semester II Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in 0:1:2 periods Credits 1.5/2
Pds/Hrs(L:T:P)
Type of course Tutorial & practical Total Contact Hrs 22.5Pds
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of basic High school science, basic mathematics
Course objectives:To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
211
and calculations/measurements.
Tutorial: 0.83 Hrs/Experiment:

8. Introduction Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of
equipment in the laboratory.
10. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
13. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 3periods/experiment.
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1: Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V and
graphical method.
2: Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-locating neutral points.
References:
3. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur
4. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII – NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester II
1. Convex lens-Determination of Focal length and focal power using U-V and graphical method.
2: Simple Pendulum-Determination of the value of acceleration due to gravity and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Resonance apparatus-Determination of velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Travelling microscope-Determination of refractive index of a solid.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-location of neutral points
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
212
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
CL
Course Outcomes Linked POs
CO 1 Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & U/A 1,2,3,8,9
Combination)
CO 2 Acceleration due to gravity using simple pendulum U/A 1,2,3,8,9
CO 3 Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method) U/A 1,2,3,8,9
CO 4 Refractive index of solid using traveling microscope U/A 1,2,3,8,9
CO 5 Mapping of magnet lines of force-locating neutral points U/A 1,2,3,8,9
CO 6 Related the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels: R=Remember, U=Understand, A=Apply
Scheme of Valuation of SEE

S.No Particulars Marks
1. Identification of apparatus/equipment/etc 01
2. Writing procedure 04
3. Conducting of experiment 10
4. Results 01
5. Viva-voce 04
Total 20
Suggested learning outcomes
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
1. Focal length and Focal power of  Fix the object distance  Calculate the focal
 Find the Image distance length and power of
convex lens (Separate &
 Calculate the focal length and convex lens
Combination) power of convex lens and  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
2. Simple pendulum – acceleration due to  combination
Fix the simpleofpendulum
convex lenses
to  graph
Find the time for number
gravity – length of seconds pendulum the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of  Find the time period
pendulum  Calculate the acceleration
 Find the time for number of due to gravity
oscillations  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Find the time period
 Calculate the acceleration
due to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
213
3. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir level
 Arrange the resonance
 Find the first and second
–Resonance method apparatus
resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level for
 Calculate velocity of
booming sound
sound
 Find the first and second
 Calculate velocity of
resonanting lengths
sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound
4. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of vernier  Read the scale
on microscope  Calculate the refractive
traveling microscope
 Place the graph paper below index of glass slab
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive index
of glass slab
5. Mapping of magnet lines of  Draw magnetic meridian

 Place the bar magnet in
Force – neutral points NN(North pole of bar  Draw magnetic lines
magnet pointing North) of
and NS (South pole of bar force
magnet pointing North)
directions  Locate the neutral
 Draw magnetic lines of points
force along equatorial and
 Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial axial lines
lines
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE (CHEMISTRY LAB)
Course Title: Applied Science Lab Practice Course Code: 18 AA-209(B)

(Chemistry Lab)
Semester: II Core/Elective: core
Teaching Scheme(L:P):1:2periods Credits: 1.5/2
Type of Course: Lecture& practical Total Contact Hours: 22.5 periods
CIE: 30 Marks SEE: 20 Marks
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of volumetric analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
214
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Periods
mohr’s salt in the given
solution
CO2 Determination of acidity , U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::3:6
alkalinity and pH of given
water samples/
solutions.
chlorides in the given
solution.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A
oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
Tutorial:
1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Hrs)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by using 0.02M potassium permanganate
solution.
2. Determination of acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
215
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.
1. Estimate Mohr’s salt by using standard potassium permanganate solution.
2. Determine the partial and total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N
NaOH solution.
3. Determine the partial and total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N
H2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE

Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB Course Code : 18AA-210P

PRACTICE Course Group : Core
Semester : II Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme in Hrs (L:T:P) : 0:1:2 Total Contact Hours : 37.5Hrs/45Pds
Type of course : Tutorial + Practical SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Computer basics and DOS
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Practical hrs
216
CO1 Demonstrate skills using spreadsheet software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO2 Demonstrate skills using presentation software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO3 Demonstrate skills using database software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Total Sessions 45
Course Content
Spread Sheet
1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx format
3. Inserting column and row in Excel
4. Creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel Book file
5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formula
7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
8. Protecting a worksheet, working with multiple sheets
9.
Presentation Software
10. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and saving in .ppt or pptx
format
11. Inserting a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
12. Inserting chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
13. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
14. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
15. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts
Database Management System
16. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
17. Add, Delete and rename fields
18. Use the Primary key field
19. Enter and edit data
20. Use Relationships option
21. Create forms
22. Modify and save forms
23. Create and use queries
24. Sort data
25. Display data
26. Create and print reports
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Sl. No. Bloom’s Category %
217
1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Practical

Sessions
CO1 Demonstrate skills using 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
spreadsheet software
CO2 Demonstrate skills using 9,10,11,12,13,14 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
presentation software
CO3 Demonstrate skills using 15,16,17,18,19,20,21, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
database software 22,23,24,25
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Course-PO Attainment Matrix
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed.
Course Delivery
The course will be delivered through tutorial of one hour and one & half hours of hands on practice
per week.
Suggested Student Activities:

1. Create a spreadsheet for the class
2. Create power point presentation for a course
3. Create a database for the class
Format for Student Activity Assessment

Internal Assesment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
Model Question Bank
Course Title:INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18AA-210P
1. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet with five columns. Enter ten
records and find the sum of all columns using auto sum feature.
2. You have a monthly income of Rs.10000. Your monthly expenditures are Rent- Rs
3000, Food- Rs. 1500, Electricity- Rs.100, Phone- Rs. 150, and Cable TV-Rs. 200.
Prepare a worksheet with the Monthly Income, the Monthly Expenditures listed and
218
summed, monthly savings amount (what’s left over each month) calculated, and the
amount saved per day (assuming 30 days in a month). Use Spreadsheet Application.
3. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet containing the pay details
(containing Basic pay, DA, HRA ,Other Allowance , Deductions- PF, PT, Insurance,
Gross and Net salary) of the employees using formulas.
4. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the results of your
institute for three years.
5. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
6. Using presentation tool, Create a simple Presentation consisting of 4-5 slides about
Input and Output Devices.
7. Create a presentation about a book containing Title, Author, Publisher and Contents.
8. Create an automated (timings & animation) Presentation with five slides about
Different Models of Computers. Use Presentation tool.
Skill Upgradation

2. Market survey
3. Material survey
4. Data collection
5. Site visits
9. Seminars
10. Presentations
12. Slip tests
13. Surprise tests
14. Time Problems
15. Desktop surveys
16. Model making
17. 3D Renderings
18. Walk through
Extra Curricular:
2. Debates
3. Elocution
4. Recitation
219
5. Dumb Charades
C -18 CURRICULLUM
DIPLOMA IN ARCHITECTURAL ASSISTANTSHIP
III SEMESTER

periods Period s Evaluation Examination Marks marks
S. per s per (Internal
SUBJEC +End
T CODE Exam)
. L T P ter Mid Mid Sesion Max Min
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18 AA- APPLIED 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

301 F ENGINEERING
.MATHEMATICS
2 18 AA- ENGINEERING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
302 C MECHANICS
3 18 AA- BUILDING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

303 C SPECIFICATIONS
4 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

18 AA- HISTORY OF INDIAN
304 C ARCHITECTURE
220
5 18AA- CAD THEORY 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
305C
DRAWING SUBJECTS
6 18 AA- PERSPECTIVE 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
306 P DRAWING
307 P DESIGN-
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
8 18 AA- MODEL MAKING LAB

308 P PRACTICE
9 18 AA- BASIC CAD LAB 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
309 P PRACTICE
1018 AA- COMMUNICATION 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
310 P SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS 0
LAB PRACTICE
A/B/C/D
TOTAL 17 8 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 175 1000 425
THIRD SEMESTER
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18COMMON301F

SEMESTER : III Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 36 :24 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Programmes : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Basic Engg. Mathematics and Engg. Mathematics at Diploma
1st and 2nd Semester level.
Course Outcomes: COs
CO 1 Integrate different kinds of functions
221
CO 2 Integrate functions using different methods
CO 3 Find the values of definite integrals.
CO 4 Solve simple problems of Areas, Volumes.
CO 5 Find the Mean and RMS values of various functions and Approximate values of Definite integrals
using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3rd rule
CO 6 Form the Differential Equation and Solve Simple DEs of 1st order and 1stdegree.
Course Content:
Unit-I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
Indefinite Integration-I
Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions. Properties of

indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form sin m.
cosn. where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x and powers of
tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a + x √a −x √ x 2−a2
2 2 2 2
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
Unit – II Duration: 08 Periods (L: 4.8 – T:3.2)
Indefinite Integration-II
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions. Integration
by parts, Bernoulli’s rule.
Unit-III Duration: 06 Periods (L: 3.6 – T:2.4)
Definite Integral and its Properties:
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum.
Unit – IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
Applications of Definite Integrals:
Areas under plane curves – Sign of the Area – Area enclosed between two curves. Solid of
revolution – Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit – V Duration: 08 Periods (L: 4.8 – T:3.2)
222
Mean, RMS values and Numerical Integration:
Mean values and Root Mean Square values of a function on a given interval.
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a definite integral.
Unit – VI Duration: 18 Periods (L: 10.8 – T:7.2)

Differential Equations of First Order:
Definition of a differential equation – order and degree of a differential equation – formation of

differential equations – solution of differential equation of first order, first degree : variables
-separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Unit-I
1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.

1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals  (u + v) dx and
ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) f(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii)  [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii) f(x)/[f(x)] dx
iv) f {g(x)} g (x) dx
1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x usingthe above.
1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the form SinmCosn. d where m and n are positive integers.
1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a + x √a −x √ x 2−a2
2 2 2 2
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos  d and  a cos   b sin   c d .
Unit-II
2.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems

2.1 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
2.2 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
2.3 State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .
223
2.4 Evaluate the integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-III
3.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
3.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
3.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.
3.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
3.4 State various properties of definite integrals.
3.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
3.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
Unit –IV
4.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
4.1 Find the Areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
4.2 Obtain the Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit –V
5.0 Understand Mean, RMS values and Numerical Methods
5.1 Obtain the Mean value and Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the functions in any given
Interval.
5.2 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rules for approximation of definite integrals and
provide some examples.
Unit –VI
6.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
6.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
6.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
6.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:
i. Variables Separable.
ii. Homogeneous Equations.
iii. Exact Differential Equations
iv. Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
v. Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
6.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications by using above methods.
224
Reference Books:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
2. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material
2.Quiz
3.Group discussion
4.Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignment
CO / PO - MAPPING
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
ACTIVITIES
225
1 .Write a short notes on different types of integrals.
2. Prepare a notes on different methods to evaluate integrals.
3. List out Properties of definite integrals.
4. List out and explain various applications of definite integrals.
5. Explain the procedure to solve problems on Areas using integration
6. Explain the procedure to find volumes of irregular shapes of solids of revolution using integration.
7. Prepare a presentation to find Mean values and R.M.S values of any given function.
8. Explain the procedure to calculate approximate area by using Trapezoidal rule.
9. Explain the procedure to calculate approximate area by Simpson’s 1/3 rule
10. Prepare a presentation on solving 1st order differential equations using any suitable method.
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO8 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO9 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO10 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
226
not written.
procedure to solve the problem(s). problems, but problems.
the problem(s). does not do it
consistently.
EXAMINATION PATTERN was not included.
Working with MID
Student was an SEM - I EXAM(Duration
Student was an 1 hour)
Student Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner cooperated with workMarks
PART A PART B PART C Total effectively
Marks/Question 1 Marks
listening to each but had 3 Marks each others,
trouble 5 Marksbuteach
needed 20 Marks
with others.
suggestions
No. of Questions of
4 Questions listening to others prompting
2/4 Questions to stay
2/4 Questions
S.No. Unit No. others and R and/or working U on-task. A Remarks
1 UNIT I working 1,2 cooperatively.
5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
cooperatively
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and solutions 89%) of the steps the steps and the steps and
have no MID SEMand - II EXAM(Duration 1 hour) have no solutions have
solutions have solutions
1 UNIT III
mathematical1,2 no mathematical
5(a) or 5 (b) mathematical
7(a) or 7(b) mathematical
2 UNIT IVerrors. 3,4 errors. 6(a) or 6(b) errors. 8(a) or 8(b) errors.

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
22712(b) 16(b)
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A

1. Integrate: ex– sinx + x4

dx
2. Find : ∫ 5 x+7 dx
3. Write Bernoulli’s rule of integration
4. Find : ∫ xlogx dx
PART-B

x5
5 a). Evaluate :∫ dx .
1+ x 12
Or
5 b) Evaluate : ∫
dx
¿
¿¿
6 a). Evaluate :∫ x sinxdx
Or
3 x +2
6 b). Evaluate :∫ dx .
( x−1 ) ( 2 x +3)
PART C

2
7 a). Evaluate∫ √ x + 2 x +5dx
Or
7 b) Evaluate : ∫ cosxcos 2 xdx .
8 a). Find ∫ x tan−1 xdx .

Or
228
8 b) Find ∫ x 4 cos 2 xdx .
@@@
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A

1
1. Integrate : ∫ (x ¿¿ 4+1)dx ¿
0
π
2. Evaluate : ∫ sin 3 xdx
0
1
3. Evaluate : ∫ 1+1x 2 dx
0
4. Write the formula to find area bounded by the curve y= f(x) , x-axis,between the limits x=a
and x =b
PART-B

Find the Mean value of the function y = logx on [ 1 , e ]

π
2
5 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
π
2
5 b) Evaluate :
∫ sin 2 xdx
0
6 a). Find the area bounded by the line 2x + y =8, x-axis and the lines x = 2 and x = 4.
229
Or
6 b). Find the Volume of the Solid generated by revolving the part of the Circle x 2+ y 2=36
From x = 0 to x = 4 about x – axis.
PART C

π
2
7 a). Evaluate: √ Sinx dx
∫ √ Sinx+ √ Cosx
0
Or
π
2
7 b). Evaluate :
∫ logsin xdx
0
8 a) Find the area enclosed between the Parabolas y=3 x−x 2 andy=x 2−x .
Or
8 b). Find the Volume of the Solid generated by the revolution of the area bounded by the
x2 y2
Ellipse + =1 , about x- axis.
25 16
@@@
C18-common-301F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
III SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 08 X 01 = 08Marks

230
1. Integrate: x7 – 3/x
1
2
2.Evaluate: ∫ ( x +1 )dx
0
3. Write the formula to find mean value of y = f(x), in the interval (a, b)
2
dy dy
4. Find the Order and Degree of the Differential Equation x
dx √
= 1+( )
dx
.
b
5 Write Trapezoidal Rule to find the approximate value of ∫ f ( x ) dx .
a
6. Write the formula to find RMS value of y = f(x) over the range x=a and x = b.
dy
7. Solve: =e 2 x+ y
dx
8. Write the condition for exactness of the differential equation M(x,y)dx + N(x,y)dy =0
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12 Marks

π
2
9 a). Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
6
dx
9 b) Find the approximate value of ∫ by taking n = 6 using Trapezoidal rule.
0 1+ x
10 a) Find the area bounded by the Parabola y = x 2 – 2x + 1 and x-axis.
Or
10 b) Form the Differential Equation from y= A e x + B e 3 x where A, B are arbitrary
Constants.
11 a) Find the RMS value of √ log x over the range x= 1 and x= e
Or
4
dx
11 b) Calculate approximate value of ∫ by taking n= 4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
0 1+ x
dy
12 a) Solve: x +2 y =logx .
dx
Or
2 2
12 b) Solve: x ( 1− y ) dx+ y ( 1−x ) dy =0
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20 Marks

231
1
13 a) Evaluate: ∫ 2 dx
x + 2 x +2
Or
13 b) Find the RMS value of y = √ 8−4 x 2 between x = 0 and x = 2
x2 y 2
14 a) Find the volume of solid generated by revolving the Ellipse + =1 about Major axis
a2 b 2
Or
dy
14 b) Solve: =sin( x + y )
dx
15 a) A curve is drawn to passing through the points given by the following table:
x 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

y 3 3.4 3.7 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.1
Calculate the approximate area bounded by the curve , x-axis and the lines x= 1 and x= 4
using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
Or
1
15 b) Evaluate: ∫ √( 1−x2 ) dx approximately by taking n = 4 using
0
Simpson’s 1/3 rd Rule.
16 a) Solve : ( y 2−xy ) dx =x2 dy .
Or
dy
16 b) . Solve: + yCosx= y 3Sin2x.
dx
@@@
Department of Technical Education
State Board of Technical Education &Training (TS)

Course Title Engineering Mechanics Course Code 18AA-302C
Semester III Semester Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P) 45:15:0 Credits 3
Methodology Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods 60 Periods
232
Pre requisites
Course Outcomes
Knowledge of Fundamentals of Engineering Physics.
Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to
CO1 Evaluate resultant force, its importance and calculation

CO2 Illustrate the concept of centroids for various shapes and its calculation
CO3 Calculate Moment of Inertia of standard sections.
CO4 Explain Simple stresses and strains and its effect on simple sections and composite
sections.
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Unit
No Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
R U A
I Principles of Mechanics
10 Q9A Q13A
and Force system Q1
II Beams and Supports 10
III Centroid 10 Q10A Q14A
Q2
IV Moment of Inertia 10
V Simple Stresses and Q4 Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
12 Q5,Q6 Q11(b) Q15(b)
Strains
VI Composite sections Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),
Q14(b),Q16(a),
and Mechanical 08 Q7,Q8 Q12(b)
Q16(b)
properties
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT - 1: Principles of Mechanics and Force system Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
233
Mechanics – Engineering Mechanics – Applications and branches of Engineering Mechanics
– Statics, Dynamics, Kinetics and Kinematics – Systems of measurements and Units – S.I and
M.K.S units of physical quantities used in Civil Engineering-Definition of force – vectors and
scalars – systems of forces – co-planar forces - Resultant of forces at a point – Parallelogram
Law and Triangle Law of forces – Lami’s theorem – Polygon law of forces – Resolution of
forces - Parallel forces – like and unlike – moment of force –couple- Conditions of
equilibrium of a rigid body subjected to a number of co-planar forces - Structural members
supporting co-planar forces
UNIT - 2: Beams and Supports Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Types of supports –Simple support, fixed support, hinged support, roller support
Types of beams –simply supported beams, cantilever, fixedbeams, overhanging beams,
continuous beams
Types of loading -point load, uniformly distributed load, Calculation of Reactions
UNIT - 3:Centroid Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Definitions – Centroid, Centre of gravity - Position of Centroid of standard figures like
rectangle, triangle, circle, semi-circle, parallelogram and trapezium - Determination of
location of Centroid of standard steel sections – T, L, I, Channel section, Z section
andunsymmetrical I section - built up sections and plane figures having hollow portion.
UNIT - 4:Moment of Inertia Duration: 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Definition of Moment of Inertia - Perpendicular and parallel axes theorems - Moment of
Inertia of standard sections like rectangle, triangle, circle and hallow circular sections -
Moment of Inertia – T, L, I, Channel section,Z sections and unsymmetrical I section using
parallel axis theorem - Moment of Inertia and radius of gyration of built-up sections -
Polar Moment of Inertia of solid and hollow circular sections using Perpendicular axis
theorem
UNIT - 5: Simple Stresses and Strains Duration: 12Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

Stress and strain – type of stresses and strains - Stress strain curves for ductile materials
(like mild steel)–Hooke’s law – Young’s modulus – deformation under axial load - Shear
stress and Shear Strain – Modulus of rigidity - Longitudinal and lateral strain – Poisson’s
234
ratio, Bulk Modulus – relationship between elastic constants (proof not required, only
problems).
UNIT - 6: Composite sections and Mechanical properties

Duration: 08Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Composite sections – effect of axial loads - Temperature stresses and strains – hoop
stress – Temperature stresses in compositesections - Mechanical properties of materials
Reference Books
1. Engineering Mechanics – N.H. Dubey (Tata Mc Graw Hill)
2. Engineering Mechanics – R.S.Khurmi
3. Engineering Mechanics – P.K. AbdulLatheef
4. Engineering Mechanics& Statics – Dayaratnam
5. Engineering Mechanics – N. Srinivasulu
6. Engineering Mechanics – S.S. Bavikatti
7. Engineering Mechanics – A.K. Tayal
Suggested E-learning references
1.www.elearning.com/survey
2. http://nptel.ac.in
1.1 Define Mechanics and Engineering Mechanics

1.2 State the applications of Engineering Mechanics
1.3 State the branches of Engineering Mechanics
1.4 Define the terms 1. Statics 2. Dynamics 3. Kinetics 4. Kinematics
1.5 State the systems of measurements and Units
1.6 State S.I and M.K.S units of physical quantities used in Civil Engineering
1.7 Define the following terms
a) Force
b) Moment
235
c) Resultant
d) Equilibrium of forces
e) Equilibrant
f) Moment of a couple
1.8 Distinguish between
1.8.1 Scalar and Vector quantities
1.8.2 Co-planar and Non co-planar forces
1.8.3 Parallel and non-parallel forces
1.8.4 Like and unlike parallel forces
1.9 Compute the resultant of two co-planar forces acting at a point by
1.9.1 Law of parallelogram of forces
1.9.2 Triangle law of forces
1.10 Explain and Solve simple problems using Lami’s Theorem
1.11 Solve problems on computation of the resultant of a system of coplanar concurrent
forces by
2.1.1 Law of polygon of forces
2.1.2 Resolution of forces
1.12 Solve problems on computation of the resultant of a system of coplanar parallel
forces.
1.13 Explain the properties of a couple.
1.14 State the conditions of equilibrium of rigid body subjected to a number of co- planar
forces.
1.15 Determine resultant of co-planar concurrent forces by analytical methods.
2.1 List and describe various types of supports (Simple support, fixed support, hinged
support, roller support)
2.2 List and sketch various types of beams(simply supported beams, cantilever, fixed
beams, overhanging beams, continuous beams)
2.3 List various types of loading (point load, uniformly distributed load, uniformly varying
load
2.4 To determine support reactions for cantilever, simply supported and overhanging
beams with point loads and uniformly distributed loads
3.1 Define Centroid and Centre of gravity.

236
3.2 Distinguish between Centroid and Centre of gravity.
3.3 State the need for finding the Centroid and Centre of gravity for various engineering
applications.
3.4 Calculate the positions of Centroid for simple plane figures from first principles.
3.5 Explain the method of determining the Centroid by ‘Method of moments.
3.6 Determine the position of Centroid of standard sections-T, L, I, Channel section, Z
section, unsymmetrical I section.
3.7 Determine the position of Centroid of built up sections consisting of RSJs, flange plates
and Plane figures having hollow portions
4.1 Define Moment of Inertia (MI), Polar Moment of Inertia, Radius of gyration.
4.2 State the necessity of finding Moment of Inertia for various engineering applications.
4.3 Determine Moment of Inertia and Radius of gyration for regular geometrical sections
like T, L, I, Channel section, Z section, unsymmetrical I section.
4.4 State 1. Parallel axes theorem 2. Perpendicular axes theorem to determine MI.
4.5 Determine MI of standard sections by applying Parallel axes theorem.
4.6 Determine MI of built-up sections by applying Parallel axes theorem.
4.7 Calculate radius of gyration of standard sections.
4.8 Determine the polar M.I for solid and hollow circular section applying Perpendicular
axes theorem.
5.1 Define the following terms
a) Stress
b) Strain
c) Modulus of Elasticity
d) Longitudinal Strain
e) Lateral Strain
f) Poisson’s ratio
g) Modulus of rigidity
h) Bulk Modulus
i) Factor of safety
j) Resilience
k) Strain Energy
l) Proof resilience
m) Modulus of Resilience
237
5.2 Distinguish between different kinds of stresses and strains.
5.3 Draw the stress-strain curve for ductile materials (Mild steel) and explain the
salient points in the curve.
5.4 State Hooke’s law and limit of proportionality.
5.5 Solve problems on relationship between simple stress and simple strain under axial
loading on uniform bars and stepped bars.
5.6 State the relationship among the elastic constants.
5.7 Solve problems on relationship between elastic constants.
6.1 Calculate stresses in simple and composite members under axial loading.
6.2 Explain and calculate temperature stress, strain, hoop stress, temperature stresses in
composite sections.
6.3 Explain the mechanical properties of materials
6.4 Elasticity, plasticity, ductility, brittleness, malleability, stiffness, hardness, toughness,
creep,fatigue – examples of materials which exhibit the above properties.

1. Prepare a program in MS Excel to find centre of gravity; IZZ and IYY of I, L,T and channel
sections.
2. Prepare a report on calculation of tensile stress induced in the rope made with any material
3. Demonstrate the stresses developed in composite sections using AUTO CAD

Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge
Communication
sustainabilityEnvironment &
practiceExperiments and
workIndividual and Team
Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1,2,3,4,8
CO2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1,2,3,4,6,8
CO3 1 3 2 1 1,2,3,4
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 1 1,2,3,4,6,10
238
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
239
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each
question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit No R U A Remarks
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Questions each
question
Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
240
State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DAA III Semester
Mid Semester-I Examination
Corse Code: 18AA-302C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Max.Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Define Engineering Mechanics

2) State “Parallelogram law of forces”.
3) Draw the sketch of a) overhanging beam b) Cantilever beam
4) List types of loads.
PART-B
Answer twoquestions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5) a) Write any three applications of Engineering Mechanics

(OR)
b)Two forces acting at angle of 120o. The bigger force is 80N and Resultant is perpendicular to
smaller one. Find the magnitude of the smaller force
6) a) Draw the sketch of a cantilever beam of 4m length with a central point load of 9kN and udl
of 5kN/m over the left half portion.
(OR)
b) List the types of loads to which a beam can be subjected and show with a neat sketch.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks
7) a) A string 2m long is tied to the ends of a uniform rod that weighs 60N and is 1.6m long. The
string passes over a nail, so that the rod hangs horizontally. Calculate the tension in the string.
(OR)
b) Determine the resultant, both in magnitude and direction, of the four forces acting on the
body as shown in the fig. given below

241
8) a) A cantilever 1.75m length is subjected to two point loads of 2kN and 3kN at 0.75m and 1.5m
from the free end. It also carries a udl of 3kN/m over a length of 1 m from free end. Draw a
neat sketch of the beam and Calculate Support reactions of the beam.
(OR)
b) Draw the neat sketch and Determine the support reactions of a beam of 9m length simply
supported at the right end and at 6m from the right end. It carries a udl of 5kN/m over a length
of 6m from right end and a concentrated load of 10kN at 1m from left end.
242
DAA III Semester
Mid Semester-IIExamination
Corse Code: 18AA-302C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Max.Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark. 4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Locate the centroid of T-section as shown in fig. below.
80mm
10mm
150mm
2) Give the position of centroid of a semi-circular section

3) Define Moment of Inertia
4) State perpendicular axis theorem.
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5) a) Find the Centroid of an inverted T-section with flange 60mm x 10mm and web 50mm x
10mm.
(OR)
b) Differentiate between the Centroid and Centre of gravity
6) a) The moment of inertia of rectangular section beam about x-x and y-y axes passing through
the centroid are250 x 106 mm4 and 40 x106 mm4 respectively. Calculate the size of the section.
(OR)
b) Find the radius of gyration of hollow circular plate of 60mm inner diameter and 100 mm
outer diameter.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks
243
7) a) A uniform lamina is shown in fig. Determinethe centroid of the lamina. All dimensions are in
mm.
(OR)
b) A semi- circular area is removed from a trapezium as shown in fig. Determine the centroid of
the remaining area
8(a) A section is built- up of two 225mm x 85mm channels placed back to back at a distance of x
mm apart as shown in Fig. which are connected by battens. Determine the value of x so that
Ixxofbuilt up section is equal to Iyy of built –up section. Given the properties of each channel
section as below: A= 3301 mm2 ;Cyy=23mm; Ixx=2694.6 x 104 mm4; Iyy= 187.2 x 104 mm4
244
8
(OR)
b) Find the moment of inertia of the section about AB as shown in Fig. Take diameter of the
hole as 30 mm.
245
DAA III Semester
Corse Code: 18AA-302C Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Maximum .Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8x1 = 8 Marks
1) State the classification of Engineering Mechanics

2) Define “Radius of gyration”
3) State “Hooke’s law”
4) State “Lami’s Theorem”.
5) Define “Stress”
6) Define “Strain Energy”
7) List the Elastic Constants.
8) Define the term “Fatigue”
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks. 4x3= 12 Marks
9)
a) State any three characteristics of couple.
(OR)
b) A steel bar 5 meters long and 25mm in diameter is stretched by 2.0mm by a load of 80kN in
pulling it axially. Determine the modulus of elasticity of the bar.
10)
a) The M.I of a triangle about its base is 1526.5 x 10 4 mm4, width of base is 120mm. Find the
height of the triangle
(OR)
b) Define i) Ductility ii) Brittleness
11)
a) Define the terms
i. Linear strain
ii. Lateral strain
(OR)
b) A material has Young’s modulus of 1.25 x 10 5 N/mm2 and Poisson’s ratio of 0.25. Calculate
the modulus of rigidity and bulk modulus
12)
a) Define i) Toughness ii) Malleability
(OR)
246
b) Define i) Ductility ii) Brittleness
PART-C
Answer fourquestions. Each question carries five marks 4x 5=20 Marks
13)
a) Calculate the tensile force in the cables AB and BC as shown in fig. The pulleys are
frictionless.
(OR)
b) A tensile test is carried out on a steel bar of 10 mm diameter over a gauge length of 50mm.
The bar yields at a load 22 kN, reaches a maximum load of 43 kN and breaks at 27 kN. The
diameter of ruptured neck is 7.5mm and final gauge length is 64mm. Determine
(a) Yield strength
(b) Ultimate strength
( c) Percentage reduction in area and
(d) percentage elongation.
14)
a) A mild steel R.S. Joist 200mm x 140mm with one 200mm x 10 mm plate symmetrically
riveted to each flange is used as a stanchion. Find I xx, Iyy and least radius of gyration for the
compound section. Properties of R.S. Joist are,
Area of section = 3670 mm2; Ixx= 2624.5 x 104 mm4; Iyy=329 x 104 mm4
247
(OR)
b) An R.C. C column has square cross-section 400mm x 400mm. If it is reinforced with six steel
bars each of 20 mm diameter. The column carries an axial compressive load of 630 kN.
Determine stress in each material. Modular ratio is 15.
15)
a) A cylindrical bar is 25mm dia of 1.2m long. During a tensile test it is found that the linear
strain is 4 times the lateral strain. Calculate the shear and bulk modulus if the bar is
elongated 0.06mm under axial tensile load of 50kN.
(OR)
b) A steel bar 1.6 long is acted upon by forces as shown in fig. below. Find the elongation of the
bar. Given E=200GPa.
90kN 40kN 60kN 30mm 110kN

30mm 
35mm
500mm 600 mm 500 mm
16)
a) Following are the details of a composite member formed by enclosing a copper rod in a
steel tube:
Dia. of copper rod = 36mm

Internal dia. of steel tube = 40mm
External dia. of steel tube = 50mm
E for steel = 200 GPa, E for copper = 110 GPa, for steel 12 x 10-6 per 0C; for copper =16 x
10-6 Per 0C. Calculate the stress developed in each material if the combination is heated
through 30°C.
(OR)
248
b) A copper rod 80mm in diameter is co-axially enclosed in a copper tube of internal dia. 90mm
and external dia. 110mm, both of same length 480mm. The combination carries total axial
thrust F. If the stress in the copper rod is 12 MPa compressive, find
(a) The stress in the tube (b) The value of F
BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS
Course Title Building Specifications Course Code 18 AA -303 C

Semester III Course group core
Teaching Scheme in
3:1:0 Credit 03
Hrs (L:T:P)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of building materials and various building activities..
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Know the nature and class of work, materials used in building construction.
CO2 : To be able to write the specifications for different building materials.
Know the workmanship for various building activities for satisfactory execution of works.
CO3:
CO4 : Able to specify the equipment, tools and plants to be engaged for a work
CO5 : To verify and check the strength of materials for a work
To know that specifications is an essential part of a contract document required for

CO6 :
arbitration purposes.
Time Schedule
249
Introduction to
3
1 Specifications
General Specifications 3
Specifications for
2 12
Building Materials
Detailed Specifications
3 12
for Building activities upto flooring
4 10
for Building activities for final finishes
5 12
for RCC Works
Specifications for Water Supply, Plumbing &
6 8
sanitary fittings.
Course Contents:
Unit1: Introduction to Specifications
1.1 What is specification?

1.2 Necessity of specification
1.3 How to write specifications?
1.4 Types of specifications
General Specifications
1.5 General specifications for Ist class buildings.

1.6 General specifications for IInd class buildings.
Unit2: Specifications for Building Materials
2.1 Specifications for various building materials: Stone for masonry,Brick, Surkhi, Natural Sand,
Coarse aggregates for concrete, Water, Stone Dust, Fly ash, Soil, Wood
2.2 Specifications for various building materials: Lime,PortlandCement, Reinforcement, Paint, G.I.
Sheets, AC sheets, Glass.
2.3 Specifications for mortars (cement, lime)
2.4 Carriage, Stacking & Storage of materials
Unit3: Detailed Specifications for Building Activities
3.1 Clearing and leveling of site -

3.2 Marking of lines and Earth work in excavation in trenches for foundations, filling excavated
earth in foundation trenches, sand filling in plinth, measurement, rate
3.3 Laying P.C concrete bed and construction of footings and Plinth with R.R. Masonry-
materials, laying, joints, curing, measurement, rate
250
3.4 Filling in Trenches and basement
3.5 Laying of DPC at Plinth level
3.6 Construction of superstructure with Brick Masonry in C.M- materials, laying, joints, curing,
measurement, rate
3.7 Flooring - Cement concrete flooring, Natural stone (Marble) flooring, Tile flooring, Mosaic
flooring – Materials, workmanship, Laying, joints, Curing, Finishing, measurement, rate
Unit4: Detailed Specifications for Building Activitiesfor final finishes
4.1 Wood work- materials for frames and shutters for doors and windows, Workmanship,
measurement, rate
4.2 Steel & Iron work – Structural steel, Doors & window, measurement, rate
4.3 Plastering- Materials, workmanship, measurement , rate
4.4 White washing, color washing, & distempering- Materials, workmanship,
measurement , rate
4.5 Painting and Polishing- Materials, workmanship, measurement , rate
4.6 Glazing – materials ( sheet glass, plate glass & wired Glass), Putty, beading,, measurement,
rate
Unit5: Detailed specifications for RCC works
5.1 Cement Concrete -Formwork, proportions for materials, ,Grades of Cement, proportion,
Mixing-hand and machine mixing, Slump, Laying,, Curing, Measurement, Rate
5.2 Reinforced Cement Concrete- Materials, Form work (Centering & Shuttering), Preparation
and laying of Steel reinforcement, Proportions, Mixing, Laying & curing, Expansion Joints,
Finishing, Measurement, Rate
5.3 Precast Concrete – Materials & workmanship
5.4 Ready Mix Concrete
Unit 6 : Specifications for Water supply, Plumbing & Sanitary fittings

6.1 Specifications for Water supply, Plumbing – Materials- Asbestos cement pressure pipes,
Cast iron, PVC pipes
6.2 Workmanship- General -Water supply- Galvanized mild steel tubes, PVC, Sluice Valve
6.3 Workmanship- Plumbing- soil waste pipes, ventilating pipes, fittings and floor traps, joints,
ferrules, Lead connection pipe
6.4 Sanitary Fittings – general, fixing of water closet ( Indian and European), flushing cistern,
overflow pipe, wash basin, Kitchen sink, measurement and rate.
6.5 Manholes – materials, workmanship, measurement and rate.
Introduction to Specifications
1.1 Understand the necessity of specifications.
1.2 State the procedure of writing specifications
1.3 State the types of specifications.
251
1.0General Specifications
2.1 To know the procedure of writing general specifications.
2.0 Specifications for Building Materials

2.1 Understand the specifications for building materials
2.2 Write specifications for the following building materials stone, brick, sand, gravel, cement,
Lime water, glass, wood, paints, ,G.I. sheets and AC sheets
3.0 DetailedSpecifications for Building Activities upto flooring

3.1 Write detailed specifications for clearing and levelling site
3.2 Write detailed specifications for Excavation of Trenches forfoundations.
3.3 Write detailed specifications for laying plain cement concrete bed, footings and plinth with
R.R. Masonry and Brick Masonry.
3.4 Write detailed specifications for filling in foundation and Plinth.
3.5 Write detailed specifications for laying Damp Proof course at plinth level.
3.6 Write detailed specifications for super structure with brick masonry in Cement Mortar..
3.7 Write detailed specifications for plastering works
3.8 Write detailed specifications for Cement concrete flooring, natural stone tile flooring, tile
flooring, Mosaic flooring.
4.0 Detailed Specifications for Building Activities for final finishes

4.1 Write detailed specifications for Wood work for doors and windows.
4.2 Write detailed specifications for Decorative and protective finishes for Walls, Ceilings, Wood
works and Iron works
5.0 Detailed Specifications for RCC Works

5.1 Write detailed specifications for RCC works
5.2 Write detailed specifications for steel.
5.3 Write detailed specifications for centering and shuttering
5.4 Write detailed specifications for materials and proportions for cement concrete.
5.5 Write detailed specifications for mixing and laying cement concrete.
5.6 Write detailed specifications for curing and finishing cement concrete work.
5.7 Know the measurement of RCC work.
6.0 Specifications for Water supply, Plumbing & Sanitary fittings

6.1 Write detailed specifications for water supply works.
6.2 Write detailed specifications for plumbing works
6.3 Write detailed specifications for drainage works
1. Market survey of material specifications

2. Assignments
252
3. Site visits
Skill Upgradation Projects

1. As this subject is a market oriented subject, students are made to prepare a separate REPORT
consisting of specifications of various building materials as part of their assignments.
2. This site visits should RECORD the sequence and workmanship of various building activities.
It should be supplemented with site photographs.
Recommended Books
1. Estimating & Costing in Civil Engineering – BN Dutta
2. Estimating, Costing, Specifictin& Valuation in Civil Engineering – MChakraborti
3. All India Standard Schedule of Rates 1. Standard Specifications National Buildings
Organisation
4. Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications – Govt. of Andhra Pradesh
1. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/316750635_E-learning_standards
2. https://www.researchgate.net/.../224085435_Standards_and_specifications_for_e-
learnin...
CO /PO mapping
CO1 Know the nature and class of work, materials used U 1,2,5,6
in building construction.
CO2 To be able to write the specifications for different U 1,2,5,6,7
building materials.
CO3 Know the workmanship for various building U/A 1,2,5,6,7,10
activities for satisfactory execution of works.
CO4 Able to specify the equipment, tools and plants to U/A 1,2,4,5,10
be engaged for a work
CO5To verify and check the strength of materials for a R/U/A 1,2,3,8,10
work
CO6 To know that specifications is an essential part of a U/A 2,7,9
contract document required for arbitration
purposes.
CO/PO MAPPING MATRIX
Engineering tools
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Discipline
Engineer and
Ethics
Experiments and
Environment and
Individual and
Communication
253
knowledge
practice
society
team work
sustainability
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped POs
CO1 x x x x 1256
CO2 x x x x x x 12567
CO3 x x x x x x 1 2 5 6 7 10
CO4 x x x x x 1 2 4 5 10
CO5 x x x EXAMINATION PATTERN x x 1 2 3 8 10

CO6 x of Questions
No. 4 Questions 2/4 Questionsx 2/4 Questionsx 279
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration 2 Hours)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 254
7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
C18-AA-303C

C18-AA-303C, BUILDING SPECIFICATIONS
Time : 1 hour Max. Marks: 20

Part A 4x1=4marks
Instructions: 1.Answer all questions .
2. Each question carries one mark
1. What is a specification?
2. State the specification for stone to be used for ashlar masonry.
3. What are the different types of specifications?
4. Write specification for sand used in building construction activity.
Part B 2x3=6marks
Instructions: 1.Answer the following questions .

2. Each question carries three marks
5. a) State the procedure for writing specification.
OR
b) State the importance of specifications in building construction.
6. a) Write the specifications for cement
OR
b) Write specifications for bricks for construction of superstructure
Part C 2x5=10marks

7. a) Write the general specifications for first class buildings.
OR
b) Explain detailed specifications.
8. Write specifications for water in construction activity.
OR
b) State specifications for glass for window panes.
255
C18-AA-303C

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM II EXAMINATION (C-18)
Time : 1 hour Max.Marks: 20
Part A 4x1=4marks
1. What are the materials used in DPC?

2. What is the measurement of excavation of trenches.
3. List the various proportions of mortar.
4. What is curing
Part B 2x3=6marks

5. a) Name the protective and decorative finishes

OR
b) List various activities of building construction for detailed specifications
6. a) Write detailed specifications for painting an iron work.
OR
b)What is the method of applying cement mortar to masonry walls?
Part C 2x5=10marks

2. Each question carries five marks.
8. a) Write specification for laying 2cm. thick damp proof course at plinth level.
OR
b) Write detailed specification for natural stone flooring on a cement concrete base.
8.a)Write detailed specification for preparation of cement mortar 1:5.
OR
b) State the specifications for painting woodwork.
C18-AA-303C
256

BOARD DIPLOMA END SEMESTER EXAMINATION, (C18)
Time: 2 hours Max. Marks: 40
Part A 8x1=8 marks
Instructions: 1. Answer all questions .

1. Write specifications for gravel.

2. Write specifications for lime.
3. What are the different types of glasses?
4. What is ready mix concrete?
5. Name the various sanitary fittings.
6. What are materials used for plumbing pipes.
7. Name the different grades of cement.
8. What is centering
Part B 4x3=12 marks
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions .

9. a)What is the importance of specifications

OR
b) What is form work?
10. a) Write detailed specifications for painting an iron work.
OR
b) Name any six sanitary fixtures
11. a) Write the units of measurement of RCC, steel and cement
OR
b) write short notes on centering.
12. a) what is an overflow pipe?
OR
b) what is the purpose of a manhole?
Part C 4x5=20 marks

13. a) Write detailed specifications for first class bricks,

257
OR
b) Write detailed specification for laying RCC roof slab
14. a) Write specifications for marking out of lines.
OR
b) write about sanitary fittings.
15. a) Write detailed specification for steel in RCC work.
OR
b) Write detailed specification for laying and curing RCC work.
16. a) Write specifications for water supply requirements.
OR
b) Write specifications for plumbing requirement
HISTORY OF INDIAN ARCHITECTURE
Course Title HISTORY OF INDIAN Course Code 18AA-304C

ARCHITECTURE
Semester III Course group Core
Teaching scheme in 3:1:0 Credits 3
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Assignments Total Contact 60
Hours
Prerequisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of historic events, their chronological orderand
also good sketching abilities
Course Outcomes
CO1 Define the technical terms.
CO2 Explain the influences on different styles of Indian Architecture.
CO3 Explain Architectural characters of various styles of Indian Architecture.
CO4 Sketch plan, elevation and section of various important examples of Indian
Architecture.
Time Schedule
258
Influences on Indian Architecture 2
1 Vedic Architecture 3
Indus Valley Architecture 3
2 Buddhist Architecture 12
3 Hindu Rock cut Architecture 3
4 Dravidian Architecture 17
5 Indo-Aryan Architecture 6
Indo- Islamic Architecture 6
6
Moghul Architecture 8
Total 60
Course Contents
1.0 Influences on Indian Architecture
1.1 Geographical , geological, climatic, religious and historical influences on Indian

architecture .
Vedic Architecture
1.2 Architecture and planning of vedic houses.

1.3 Vedic town planning
Indus valley Architecture

1.4 Residential planning ,
1.5 Town planningofMohenjadaroandHarappa
1.6 Drainage and water supply systems.
2.0 Buddhist Architecture
2.1 Development of rock –cut architecture by Buddhists

2.2 Sanchistupa – planning and elevation features, gateways at Sanchi.
2.3 Chaitya hall at Karli – planning and elevation features, interior columns, ceiling and
the stupa.
2.4 Vihara at Ajantha.
3.0 Hindu Rock –cut Architecture
3.1 Architectural features of Hindu rock- cut architecture.

3.2 Planning and elevation features of Kailasa temple at Ellora.
4.0 Dravidian Architecture

4.1 Pallavas –Rock-cut phase-Monolithic rathas of Dharma raja ratha, Arjunaratha at
Mamallapuram.
4.2 Structural phase – Shore temple of Mamallapuram.
4.3 Cholas- Architecture of Brihadeswara temple at Tanjore.
4.4 Pandyas – Design and development of Gopurams.
4.5 Vijayanagar dynasty –Architecture of Vittala temple at Hampi.
4.6 Madurai style – Architecture of Meenakshi temple at Madurai.
5.0 Indo-Aryan Architecture

5.1 Orissan style –prinicipal parts of an Orissan temple
259
5.2 Lingaraja temple at Bhuvaneswer.
5.3 Khujuraho style –KandareoMahadeo temple.
6.0 Indo- Islamic Architecture

6.1 Imperial style- Architectural features , method of construction
6.2 Planning and elevation features of Alai Darwaza
6.3 Planning and elevation features of an Indian mosque.
6.4 Provincial style-planning and architectural characters of Jama Masjid at
Ahmedabad.
Mughal Architecture
6.5 Architectural characters of Fathehpursikri,

6.6 Diwan-i-khas, Diwn –i- am. Jodhbai palace
6.7 Tajmahal at Agra.
Unit 1: Influences on Indian Architecture

1.1 State and explain the factors influenced on the formation and development of
Indian Architectue.
Vedic Architecture
1.2 Comprehend the knowledge of Vedic Architecture.

1.3 Explain the planning of Vedic houses and town planning.
1.4 Sketch types of houses.
Indus Valley Architecture
1.5 Understand the development of Indus Valley Architecture.
1.6 Explain the planning of courtyard houses, towns and drainage system.
Unit2: Buddhist Architecture

2.1 Understand the development features.
2.2 Explain the Architectural features.
2.3 Sketch and describe Sanchistupa.
2.4 Explain the planning features and elevation features of Sanchistupa.
2.5 Explain the interior columns of Chaitya Hall at Karli.
2.6 Explain the Vihara at Ajanta.
2.7 Sketch the plan and section of Chaitya hall at Karli.
2.8 Sketch the plan and section of Vihara at Ajanta.
Unit3: Hindu Rock cut Architecture

3.1. Comprehend the development.
a. Sketch and explain the Kailasa Temple.
Unit 4Dravidian Architecture

4.1 Sketch the rathas of Mamallapuram –Dharma Raja andArjunarathas.
4.2 Describe the structural examples of Shore temple at Mamallapuram.
260
4.3 Choladynasty , describe the structure of Brihadeswara temple at Mamallapuram.
4.4 Sketch the sikara of Brihadeswra temple
4.5 Pandyas ,sketch and describe the plan and elevation of Gopuram.
4.6 Comprehend the design development of mandapas and hypostyle hall of Vittala
temple, Hampi ,Vijayanagardyanasty.
4.7 Vijayanagar dynasty- Sketch the plan of Vittala temple, Hampi.
4.8 Describe the planning development of Madurai temple.
4.9 Sketch and describe the Meenakshi temple.
UNIT -5 Indo- Aryan Architecture
5.1 State the architectural character of Orissan temple.
5.2 Describe with a sketch ,theprinicipal parts of typical Orissan temple.
5.3 Sketch and describe temple of Lingaraja at Bhuvaneswar.
5.4 State the architectural features of Khajuraho temple.
5.5 Sketch and describe the KandariaMahadeo temple
UNIT -6 Indo- Islamic Architecture
6.1 Indo –Islamic Architecture
6.2 Understand distinct features and Architectural characters.
6.3 Sketch and describe Alai Darwaja.
6.4 Explain the general features of Indian Mosque.
6.5 Sketch and describe the Jama masjid of Ahmedabad.
Mughal Architecture
6.6 Comprehend the development of Mughal Architecture.

6.7 State the Architectural characters.
6.8 Sketch and describe the structures of FatehpurSikri.
6.9 Sketch and describe Diwan –i- khas.
6.10 Sketch and describe the Jodhbai palace.
6.11 Sketch and describe Tajmahal at Agra.
1. Quiz
2. Assignments &Sketch book
3. Group discussions
4. Watching you tube videos
5. A study tour to local historic buildings
Assignments
A sketch book with following neat labeled sketches is to be maintained and Submitted:
1. Vedic houses
2. Vedic town plan
3. Theplanandelevationof Sanchistupa
4. Theplanand section ofchaityahallatkarli
5. Theplanandsectionofviharaat Ajanta.
6. The kailasatempleat Ellora.
7. The Dharmarajaand Arjunarathasof Mamallapuram
8. Theplanandelevationofthe Shoretempleat M amallapuram
261
9. The sikhara of Brihadeswaratemple, Tanjore
10. Theplanandelevationofgopuram
11. Planandelevationof thevithalatemple,Hampi
12. Theplanandviewof Meenakshitempleat Madurai
13. The principal parts of typical Orissantemple.
14. The temple of Lingaraja, Bhuvaneswar.
15. The kandariamahadeotemple.
16. Theplanandelevationof Alaidarwaja.
17. Parts of a typical Indianmosque
18. The Jama Masjidof Ahmedabad.
19. TheplanandelevationofDiwan-i-khas
20. Theplanandelevationof Jodhabaipalace
21. Theplanandelevationofthe Tajmahalat Agra.

1. Students shall be taken to a one day tour to visit local historic buildings to study the
architectural features of different styles
Recommended Books:
1. Indian Architecture ( Buddhist and Hindu) by Percy Brown.

2. Indian Architecture (Islamic ) by Percy Brown.
3. Indian Architecture by Satish Grover.
4. History of Architecture by Banister Flecher.
5. World Architecture by Hiraskar
Suggested E learning Resources.
1. www.all-art.org
2. www.digi Libraries.com/history of architecture.
CO /PO mapping
CO1 Define technical terms U 1,2,5
CO2 Explain the influences on different R/U/A 1,2,5,6,9

styles of Indian Architecture
CO3 Explain Architectural characters of R/U/A 1,2,5,6,9

various styles of Indian
architecture.
CO4 Sketch plan, elevation and section R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10

of various important examples
of Indian architecture.
CO /PO Mapping Matrix
262
Engineering tools
Individual and team work

Basic knowledge
Experiments and practice
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
CO1 x x x x 125
CO2 x x x x x 12569
CO3 x x x x x 12569
CO4 x x x x x x 1 2 3 8 9 10
EXAMINATION PATTERN
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
C18- 4 UNIT IV AA-
304C
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 26310(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM -I EXAMINATION (C-18)
C18-AA-304C, HISTORY OF INDIAN ARCHITECTURE
Time : 1 hour Max.Marks: 20

Part A 4x1=4marks
2.Each question carries one mark
1. Sketch a vedic hut

2. What are the factors influencing Indian Architecture
3. What is rock cut architecture
4. Sketch a village gate
Part B 2x3=6marks
5a) Write the geographical influences on Indian Architecture.

OR
b) What are the town planning aspects of ancient India.
6a) Sketch a vihara and name its parts.
OR
b) Write the elevation features of a chaitya hall
Part C 2x5=10marks

7. a) Explain Indus valley civilization

OR
b) Write about the water supply and drainage facilities that were existing during Indus Valley
civilization.
8. a)Sketch and name the parts of Sanchi stupa in elevation.

OR
b) Sketch and name the parts of Karli Chaitya hall.
C18-AA-304C

264
C18-AA-304C, HISTORY OF INDIAN ARCHITECTURE
Part A 8x1=8 marks

1. Sketch a vedic hut

2. List the rock-cut rathas
3. Write about kalas.
4. Sketch a vihara.
5. what is the meaning of “pida”
6. What is a mandapa
7. List the elements of Islamic architecture.
8. Write the parts of a mosque.
Part B 4x3=12 marks

9. a) Write about Vedic town planning

OR
b) skech the an orissan temple in elevation and name the parts
10. a) Write about Dharma raja ratha
OR
b) Write about the development of Moghul architecture.
11. a) Write the characteristics of an Orissan temple.
OR
b) Sketch the elevation of Kandareo Mahadeo temple.
12. a) Sketch the plan of Alai Darwaza and name its parts.
OR
b) Sketch and indicate the elevation features of Alai Darwaza.
Part C 4x5=20 marks
Instructions: 1.Answer the following questions.

13. a) Explain the features of Sanchi stupa in detail.

OR
b) Describe Lingaraja temple.
265
14. a) Describe the great tower of Brihadeswara temple, Tanjore.
OR
b) Describe the planning features of a mosque.
15. a) Explain the features of aKhajuraho Temple.
OR
b) Sketch the plan of Lingaraja temple.
16. a) Explain the characteristics of Fateh pur Sikri
OR
b) Sketch the plan of Taj Mahal and name its parts.
Course Title CAD THEORY Course Code 18AA-305C
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Tutorials Total Contact 60
Hours
CAD THEORY
This course requires the basic knowledge of engineering drawing and architectural graphics.
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 : Use AutoCAD to generate 2D drawings suitable for architecture
CO2 : Use the draw, edit commands and create text and tables and dimensioning.
CO3 : Draw engineering objects and architectural graphics in orthographic projections in
AutoCAD
CO4 Create layers in CAD drawing
Pre requisites
Time Schedule
1 Draw commands in AutoCAD 10
2 Drawing aids 10
3 Editing commands 12
4 Creating text and tables 8
5 Dimensioning 10
6 Layers 10
Total 60
266
Course Contents
Unit 1: Draw commands

Draw lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, ellipses, regular polygons, polylines, points, infinite lines,
construction lines, x lines, single and multiline text
Unit 2: Drawing aids
Layers, object properties, drafting settings dialogue box, modes, object snaps, control and function
keys
Unit 3: Editing commands
Move, copy, multiple copy, single copy, offset, rotate, scale, fillet, chamfer, trim, extend, stretch,
lengthen, array-rectangular and polar, mirror, text mirroring.
Grips, Design centre, zoom, pan, properties palette, match properties
Unit4: Creating text and tables
Annotative objects, annotative scale, assigning annotative scales and properties, customizing
annotative scale. Multiple annotative scales, text, edit text, tables
Unit 5: Dimensioning
Need for dimensioning, dimension line, dimension text, arrow heads, extension lines, leader, centre
mark, centerlines, alternate units, tolerances, limits, associative dimensions, definition points,
dimension commands, ribbon, toolbar, command line usage, dimensioning many objects together.
Unit 6: Layer
Describe the concept of layer, use the layer dialogue box. Create layers, set up properties of layers,
The student shall be able to
1.0 Draw commands

1.1 Describe the all the draw commands in AutoCAD
2.0 Drawing aids

2.1 Understand the layers concept in creation of drawings
2.2 Understand the object properties concept
2.3 Sketch and describe the drafting settings dialogue box
2.4 List different modes and object snaps
2.5 List the Control and function keys
3.0 Editing commands

3.1 List and describe all the edit commands
3.2 Understand the concept of grips
3.3 Describe the importance of the Design centre
3.4 Understand the difference between Zoom and pan
4.0 Creating text and tables

4.1 Understand annotation scale and objects
4.2 Describe the creation and editing of text
4.3 Describe the insertion and modification of tables
267
5.0 Basic dimensioning
5.1 Understand the concept of dimensioning in AutoCAD
5.2 List the dimensioning styles
5.3 Describe the editing of dimensions
6.0 Layers
6.1 Describe the concept layer and
6.2 Describe use of layer command
6.3 Describe creation of layer
6.4 Describe setting up of layer properties.
1. Assignments
2. Refer to Google images and refer to drawings on internet
3. Refer to AutoCAD Design centre for library of drawings
Recommneded Books:
1. Engineering drawing with AutoCAD , T. Teyapoovan
2. Inside AutoCAD, Parker, Daniel, Rice, Habert1. AutoCAD Reference Guide: Everything You
Wanted to Know about AutoCAD--Fast! By Dorothy Kent
3. Arshad N Siddique, ZahidKhab, Mukhtar Ahmed- Engineering Drawing with CADD
Suggested E learning Resources:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BAiiV4PIiZ0/
2. https://www.bing.com/videos/search?
q=AutoCAD+2010+Architecture&&view=detail&mid=D3C2F41AD2173F3F
3. BC1DD3C2F41AD2173F3FBC1D&FORM=VRDGAR/
4. www.cadtutor.net/tutorials/autocad/drawing-objects.php/
268
CO-PO Mapping
COURSE OUTCOME CL Linked PO Teaching

hours
CO1 Use AutoCAD to generate 2D R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10 30

drawings suitable for architecture
CO2 Use the draw, edit commands R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10 10

and create text and tables and
dimensioning.
CO3 Draw engineering objects and R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10

architectural graphics in
orthographic projections in
AutoCAD
CO4 Create layers in CAD drawing R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10 10

Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
CO1 x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10
CO2 x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10
CO3 x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
CO4 x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10
Note:
1. The Cad theory class has to define the exercises that the student has to perform in CAD
lab
2. Original software of AutoCAD latest release has to be installed in the CADD lab and class
room.
3. LCD projector should be used to demonstrate the commands while teaching CAD theory in
the class.
EXAMINATION PATTERN
269
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

1 UNIT I 4 1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 5,6 9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
C18AA305C

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM I EXAMINATION (C-18)
C18AA305C, CAD THEORY
Part A 4x1=4marks
1. Define a polyline
3. Define a xline.
270
4. What is a layer in AutoCAD?
5. What is OSNAP?
Part B 2x3=6marks
6. a) State the differences between single and multiline text.
OR
f) State the differences between line and polyline.
7. a) List the different modes in AutoCAd.

OR
b) List any three function keys and list their function.
Part C 2x5=10marks
8. a) Describe how you will draw a rectangle in AutoCAD
OR
b) Describe the purpose of xlines
9. a) Why do we need a layer in a AutoCAD drawing?

OR
b) Describe the drafting settings dialogue box.
C18AA305C

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM -II EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
C18AA305C, CAD THEORY
Part A 4x1=4marks
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark
1. Define fillet command.
2. Describe the offset command.
3. Define what a table in AutoCAD software is.
4. List the different types of text available in AutoCAD.
Part B 2x3=6marks
5. a) State any three differences between copy and multiple copy in AutoCAD.
OR
g) State the three differences between rectangular and polar array.
6. a) What is meant by annotative scale?

OR
b) What are annotative objects?
Part C 2x5=10marks
271
7. a) Describe the method of array command.
OR
b) Describe how you will use mirror command with an example
8. a) Describe how you will create a schedule of openings in a AutoCAD drawing.

OR
b) Describe how you will create multiple annotative scales.
C18AA305C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRINING.

BOARD DIPLOMA END –SEMESTER EXAMINATIONS, (C18)
C18AA305C, CAD THEORY.
Part A 8x1=8 marks
1. Define the chamfer command.
2 What is a table in AutoCAD and how is it useful in drawing?
6. List any two types of dimensioning
7. Define the fillet command.
8. Define aligned dimensioning.
9. Define unidirectional dimensioning.
10. What is a layer?
11. How will you set layer dialogue box?
Part B 4x3=12 marks
9. a) Describe how you will draw an array using an example.
OR
b) Describe the differences between aligned and unidirectional dimensioning.
10. a) State the differences between fillet and chamfer.
OR
b) State the advantages of layer.
11. a) List the parts of a dimension line.
OR
b) State the differences between the radial and angular dimensioning.
12. a)Describe how you will set up a new layer
OR
b) List the different properties of a layer
Part C 4x5=20 marks
13. a) State the differences between a line and xline.
OR
b) State the shortcut keys for dimlinear and dim angular
14. a) Describe how you will draw a schedule of openings in a AutoCAD drawing
272
OR
b) State the differences between dimlinear and dim continuous.
15. a) Describe how you will dimension a drawing using an example.
OR
b) What are the merits of dimensioning in AutoCAD when compared to manual
dimensioning?
16. a) Describe how you will change the properties of an existing layer
OR b) Describe why a layer is freezed?
b)Describe why you will freeze a layer?
PERSPECTIVE DRAWING
Course Title Perspective Drawing Course Code 18 AA -306 P

Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of course Lecture + Studio exercises Total Contact Hours 45
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of visual arts and engineering drawing.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Understand the importance of perspective drawing
CO2 : Know the terminology in perspective drawing
CO3: Differentiate between 2D & 3D drawings, one and two point perspectives
CO4 : Able to draw the perspective drawings by projection method
CO5 : Differentiate between human eye view, bird’s eye view & worm’s eye view
CO6 : Know the importance of sciography & draw in elevations
Time Schedule
Introduction to
Perspective drawing 03
1&2
Terminology
273
3 One Point Perspective 15
4 Two point Perspective 18
5 Sciography 9
Total 45
Course Contents
Unit1: Introduction to perspective drawing Duration: 9 hours (L: Studio: )
1. Introduction
i. Introduction to the subject
ii. Uses of the perspectives in Architectural Drawing.
Unit 2: Terminology Duration: 6 hours (L: Studio: )
2. Terminology
i. Ground Plane
ii. Horizontal Plane
iii. Axillary Plane,
iv. Centre of vision
v. Central plane
vi. Eye level & Eye level plane
vii. Object
viii. Station point
ix. Height line
x. Picture plane
xi. Vanishing points
xii. Cone of vision
xiii. Fore ground
xiv. Back ground
xv. Sky line
xvi. Any other terms relevant to the subject
xvii. One point perspective
xviii. Two point perspective
Unit3: One Point Perspective Duration: 6 hours (L: Studio: )

One point perspective
i. Concept and uses
ii. Method of projection & principles / Guide lines
iii. Human eye view and birds eye view
Exercises
i) Object placed on the picture plane
ii) Object placed behind the picture plane
iii) Object placed in front of the picture plane
274
The exercises (i) (ii) and (iii) to be done considering single block, multiple blocks and composed with
various geometric forms Iv0Composite forms- cube & pyramid, cube/cuboid &cylinder, etc.
iv) An interior view for a bed room or a living room
v) Exterior views for an entrance façade.
Unit 4: Two Point Perspective Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
Two point perspective

i. Concept and uses
ii. Method of projection & principles / Guide lines
iii. Human eye view and birds eye view
Exercises
i. Buildings in the form of L,H,I,.T, etc,

ii. Portico and roof projections
iii. Doors and windows.
iv. Steps etc.
Cone etc,
a. Small buildings – One room unit
b. Buildings of two/ three rooms having single floor with doors,
windows, steps, parapet, portico and roof projections.
Unit5: Sciography Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
Sciography
Definitions of terms
i Shade
ii Shadow
iii Shadow line
iv Sciography
Exercises in pencil media

Sciography in elevation for simple blocks
Sciography in elevation for buildings done for one point & Two point exercises
mentioned above.
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Understand the importance of perspective drawing.
1.2 Explain to understand the uses of it.
2.0 Terminology
275
2.1 Define and explain the terminology with sketches.
2.2 Explain to understand the difference between the perspectives
( one and two point).
3.0 One point or parallel perspective

3.1 To draw the perspectives of various geometrical forms like cuboids, cylinders, cones ,
etc.
3.2 Able to draw the GP, HP, PP, and locate SP, VP and height lines.
3.2 Explain the methods of projection for buildings and for interior views.
3.3 Explain the method of locating points on ceiling or floor.
3.4 To draw human eye view, birds eye view, etc.
4.0 Two point or angular perspective

4.1 Explain the method of of projection for buildings in two point perspective views.
4.2 Explain the method of locating points on ceiling or floor.
4.3 To draw the perspectives of various geometrical forms like cuboids, cylinders, cones , etc.
4.4 To draw human eye view, birds eye view, etc
5.0 Sciography
5.1 Explain with sketches while defining the terminology
5.2 Explain to draw Sciography in elevations and simple blocks with different media pencil
(black & White), Colour pencils etc.
1. Viewing real buildings and photographing for perspective views from different angles.
2. Observing and drawing the sciography on buildings at different times of the day.
3. Assignments.
4. Quiz
ASSIGNMENTS
ONE POINT PERSPECTIVE DRAWING
1 Parallel perspective – A block

2. Parallel perspective – A block (changing PP)
3. Parallel perspective – A block (changing SP)
4. Parallel perspective – A block (changing Eye Leel)
1. Parallel perspective – Multiple blocks (Equal Heights)
2. Parallel perspective – Multiple Blocks –( Unequal heights)
3. Parallel perspective – A Pyramid
4. Parallel perspective – A Cylinder
5. Parallel perspective – A flight steps
6. Parallel perspective –
276
TWO POINT PERSPECTIVE DRAWING
7. Angular perspective – A Block

8. Angular perspective – A Block with roof projection
9. Angular perspective – Multiple blocks
10. Angular perspective – A Flight of Steps
11. Angular perspective – A Window
12. Angular perspective – A rectangular one roomed building perspective with doors&
windows, plinth, steps, roof projections.
13. Angular perspective – – A L shaped building perspective with doors& windows, plinth,
steps, roof projections.
14. Angular perspective – A Garden pavilion building.
15. Angular perspective – A Building with a Sloping roof.
16. Angular perspective – A Gateway.
SCIOGRAPHY
17. Sciography- of simple building elements windows, roof projection, portico projection.
18. Sciography- of solids like cylinder, cone, pyramid, cube or cuboid, etc,
19. Sciography- of Building 1
Recommended Books
1. Building drawing by Shah & Kale and Patki
2. Creative perspective by Robert .W.Gill
3. Rendering with pen & Ink by Robert.W.Gill
4 Interior Design by M. PrathapRao.
5. Engineering Drawing by B.N. Dutta.
Suggested E learning Resources:
1. https://www.tes.com/teaching-resource/perspective-drawing-resources-6036616
2. https://www.tes.com/teaching-resource/perspective-drawing-lesson-6335488
3. https://www.studentartguide.com/articles/one-point-perspective-drawing
4. https://www.lynda.com/Art-Illustration-tutorials/Drawing.../158841-2.html
CO /PO mapping
CO COURSE OUTCOME CL Linked PO
CO1 Understand the importance of perspective R/U 1,2,3,4,8

drawing
CO2 Know the terminology in perspective U 2
drawing
277
CO3 Differentiate between 2D & 3D drawings, R/U 1,2
one and two point perspectives
CO4 Able to draw the perspective drawings by U/A 1,2,3,4
projection method
CO5 Differentiate between human eye view, A 1,2,3,4
bird’s eye view & worm’s eye view
CO6 Know the importance of sciography & draw U/A 1,2,10
in elevations

Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Environment and sustainability
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
CO1 x x x x x 1,2,3,4,8
CO2 x 2
CO3 x x 1,2
CO4 x x x x x 1,2,3,4
CO5 x x x x 1,2,3,4
CO6 x x x 1,2,10
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration: 1-1/2 hour)
278
Marks/Question 4 Marks each 12 Marks 20 Marks
1 UNIT I 1
2 UNIT II 2
3 UNIT III 3
Total Questions 2 1
MID SEM - II EXAM
(Duration: 1-1/2 hour)
1 UNIT III 1
2 UNIT IV 2 3
Total Questions 2 1
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration: 3 hours)

Marks/Question 4 Marks each 40 Marks
1 UNIT I 1
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III 2
4 UNIT IV 3 5 (16 Marks)
5 UNIT V 4 6 (8 Marks)
Total Questions 4 2
For subjects 18AA - 306P
C18-AA-306P

C18-AA-306P, PERSPECTIVE DRAWING
Time : 1-1/2 hours Max. .Marks: 20

Part A 2x4=8marks
2. Each question carries FOUR marks
1. State the importance of perspective drawing as a media of communication in Architecture.
2. Define the terms height line and cone of vision.
Part B 1x12=12marks
Instructions: 1.Answer the following question.

279
3. Draw one point perspective of the following figure given below: FIGURE 1
Scheme of valuation :
Drawing plan, GL,HL,PP, SP, VP -3 marks
Drawing Visual rays, perpendiculars, vanishing lines -3 marks
Drawing block perspective in one point perspective - 6marks
C18-AA-306P

Time : 1-1/2 hours Max. Marks: 20

Part A 2x4=8marks
2. Each question carries four marks.
1. Draw one point perspective of a block 4X 4X6 cms. in birds eye view.
2. Differentiate between human eye view and birds eye view with neat sketches.
Part B 1x12=12marks
Instructions: 1. Answer the following question.
3.Draw two point perspective of the following block figure given below: FIGURE 1
Drawing block perspective with roof projections/recesses , etc. - 8marks
C18-AA-306P

280
Part A 4x4=16 marks

2.Each question carries four marks.
1. Define the following terms: 1. Picture plane 2. Vanishing points

2. Draw one point perspective of a cube of side 6 cms. in birds eye viewS
3. Sketch and explain different types of two point perspectives.
4. Sketch and explain shade and shadow with neat sketches.
Part B 24 marks

2. Question no. 5 carries sixteen marks.
3. Question no. 6 carries eight marks.
4. Accuracy and neatness of drawing carries weightage of marks.
5.Draw two point perspective of the following building/garden pavilion/ given below: FIGURE 1.
Given the position of PP with respect to the building, eye level, station point distance from PP,
etc.
Note: Scale of drawing should be mentioned
Drawing Plinth, walls, portico / balcony/ roof projections, doors & windows , etc.- 12marks
6. Draw the sciography in elevation for the above problem considering the sun angle at 45degrees.
Note: Scale of drawing should be mentioned.
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Course Title ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN Course Code 18AA-307P

Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Studio Total Contact 45
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of basic architectural design, principles and elements of
design.
Course Outcomes
281
Design a
residen
tial
building
Design a Time Schedule
commer Unit No Unit Name Hour Assessment procedure
cial  Floor plan
building  Front elevation
1 Residential Buildings 23
Describ  Section
2 Commercial buildings 22
e the  Site plan
45
importa Total  Schedule of openings
nce of
orienta
tion,
circulati
on,
cross
ventilati
on and
lighting.
Draw
flow
charts
for
various
function
al
building
s
Course Contents
Unit 1: Residential buildings Duration: (L: T: )

Residential building with living room, dining room, bed rooms, kitchen, toilet, utility, store,
pooja and other important functions. The student should prepare a portfolio of any one of the topics
a. Two bed room dwelling
b. Weekend cottage
c. Farm house
282
d. Duplex residence
Unit 2: Commercial buildings Duration: (L: T: )
Design commercial buildings of small scale. The student should prepare a portfolio of any one of
the topics
a. Architect’s office
b. Restaurant.
Note: Each topic should contain the following drawings

a. Flow chart
b. Schematic line drawing
c. Presentation drawing of the plan
d. A tracing of the plan
e. Furniture layout
f. Elevations
g. Sections
h. Site plan
i. Schedule of doors and windows

1.0 Residential buildings
1.1 Design and draft to make complete portfolios for doublebedroom and duplex residential
unit as per course contents.
1.2 Explain to understand planning techniques such as Orientation,proper circulation, cross
ventilation and aesthetics.
1.3 Develop graphically the schematic line drawings.
1.4 Detailed working drawings for plan, section and elevation.
1.5 Prepare site plan showing location of building approach road/passage/ Drive away/parking
etc.
283
2.0 Commercial Buildings
2.1 Prepare site plan showing location of Design and draft small Architect office/Restaurant.
2.2 Explain to understand planning Techniques such as Orientation, Proper Circulation, Cross
Ventilation and Aesthetics
2.3 Prepare the general requirements for the above projects.
2.4 Prepare the detailed working drawings for plan, elevation andsection of the above projects.
a. Building approach road/passage/drive away/parking etc.
1. The student should conduct a case study of a similar building

2. Student should analyze the design data based on the case study
3. Student should use Google to conduct a desktop study of buildings designed by famous
architects.
Recommended Books:
1. Time Saver Standards- building types and design data by Joseph De Chiara
2. Time Saver Standards for Interior Design
3. Neufert’s Architects data
4. Building drawing by Shaw, Kale and Patki
5. Principles and practice of Interior Design by PratapRao
6. Rendering with pen and Ink by Robert W Gill.

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Architectural_drawing/
q=architectural+drawing+of+an+apartment+&&view=detail&mid=8E657A1CAEBBAFE004AD
8E657A1CAEBBAFE004AD&FORM=VRDGAR/

hours
CO1 Design a residential building R/U/A 1 TO 10 20
CO2 Design a commercial building R/U/A 1 TO 10 20
CO3 Describe the importance of R/U/A 1 TO 10 5

orientation, circulation, cross
ventilation and lighting.
CO /PO mapping
284
Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
Course PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 x x x x x x x x x x 1 TO 10
Note: Student should submit two portfolios with colour rendering for internal evaluation.
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration of exam : 3 Hours)
20 Marks
No. of Questions 2/2 Questions 1/1 Question
1 UNIT I 1,2 3 Plan-08 marks
Elevation-04 marks
Total Questions 2 1
MID SEM - II EXAM (Duration of exam : 3 Hours)
Plan-08 marks
1,2 3
1 UNIT II Elevation-04 marks
Total Questions 2 1

SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration of exam : 6 Hours)
40 Marks
No. of Questions 4 Questions 1/1 Question

Elevation-04 marks
Section - 06 marks
2 UNIT II 3,4
Site plan -04 marks
Total Questions 4 1
C18-AA-307C Total Marks 16 24 40 Marks
For subjects18 AA- 307P, 407P
MODEL
QUESTION PAPER
285
BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM - I EXAMINATION (C-18)
C18 AA 307C - ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN

Time: 1 ½ hours Max.Marks
20
Part A 2x4=8marks
Note : Answer all the questions. Each question carries four marks.
1. Draw a flowchart of a two bedroom residence
2. State the importance of cross ventilation in a residence with neat sketches.
Part B 12marks
3. Design of a duplex residence:
An architect wishes to build a residence for himself in a residential colony. The plot
measures 25mx30m with a 12m wide road on short northern side. Design the residence as a
duplex house reflecting the taste and style of the architect.
Functional requirements:
a. Ground floor:
1. Portico for two cars As per design requirements
2. Living cum dining hall 4mx8m
3. Kitchen 3mx3m
4. Grandparents’ bedroom 4mx4m
5. Attached toilet 1.5mx2.4m
6. Common toilet 1.5mx2.4m
b. First floor:
1. Master bedroom 4mx4m
2. Children’s bedroom 3.5mx4.0m
3. Attached toilets 2 nos 1.5mx2.4m each
Additional functions like sit outs, terraces, balconies, pooja room, study room, home theatre etc
may be provided as per your concept.
Drawing requirements:
A. Floor plans 1:50 8marks
B. Front elevation 1:50 4marks.
C18-AA-307C

286
Time: 1 ½ hours Max.Marks

20
Part A 2x4=8marks
1. Draw a flowchart of a restaurant
2. State the importance of orientation in architecture with neat sketches.
Part B 12marks
3. Design of an architect’s office:
An architect wishes to build a office for himself. The plot measures 25mx30m with a
12m wide road on short northern side. Design the office reflecting the taste and style of the
architect.
2. Reception with waiting 6mx8m
3. Chief architect’s room 4mx4m
6. Structural engineer’s room 4mx4m
7. Attached toilets 1.5mx2.4m
8. CAD studio 8mx12m
9. Printing room 3mx3m
10. Dining room 3mx3m
11. Kitchenette 2mx2m
Additional functions like sit outs, terraces, balconies, library room etc may be provided as per your
concept.
A. Floor plan 1:50 8marks
B. Front elevation 1:50 4marks.
C18-AA-307C

Time: 6 hours Max Marks:40
Part A 4x4=16marks
287
1. Draw a flowchart of a two bedroom residence
2. State the importance of cross ventilation in a residence with neat sketches.
3. Draw the flowchart of a restaurant
4. State the importance of orientation in architecture.
Part B 24 marks
5. Design of a duplex residence:
An architect wishes to build a residence for himself in a residential colony. The plot
measures 25mx30m with a 12m wide road on short northern side. Design the residence as a
duplex house reflecting the taste and style of the architect.
a. Ground floor:
2. Living cum dining hall 4mx8m
3. Kitchen 3mx3m
4. Grandparents’ bedroom 4mx4m
b. First floor:
1. Master bedroom 4mx4m
2. Children’s bedroom 3.5mx4.0m
3. Attached toilets 2 nos 1.5mx2.4m each
Additional functions like sit outs, terraces, balconies, pooja room, study room, home theatre etc
may be provided as per your concept.
A. Floor plans 1:50 12marks
B. Front elevation 1:50 4marks
C. Section 1:50 4marks
D. Site Plan 1:100 4marks
MODEL MAKING LAB
Course Title Model Making Lab Course Code 18 AA -308 P

Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of course Lecture + models preparation Total Contact Hours 45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of model making materials and craft skills.
Course Outcomes
288
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Interpret and select model making materials
Understand the basic geometrical models to relate
CO2 :
with architectural forms
Develop models of building components

CO3:
Compose model space with various geometrical
CO4 : forms
Prepare scale down models to demonstrate skill,

CO5 : workmanship, preciseness to enhance visualization
of drawings to reality (Model).
Time Schedule
Introduction 3
1
2 Tools and Materials 3
Geometrical Planes and
3 6
Solids
4 Construction Models 12
5 Architectural Models 15
6 Block models 6
Total 45
Course Contents
Unit 1: Introduction Duration: 3 hours(L: Studio: )
Introduction to models and model making-clay, plaster of paris, plywood, veneer, thermocol, mount
board, hard board, handmade sheets, etc.
Unit 2: Tools and materials Duration: 3 hours(L: Studio: )
Different materials used for the representation of components and surroundings of building like
sticks, sponge, sand paper, cork sheets and any other available materials and tools. .
Unit 3: Geometrical planes and solids Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )
Prepare models of Cube, Cylinder, Cone, Pyramid, Prism .
Unit 4: Construction models Duration: 12 hours(L: Studio: )
289
Prepare the models of Building components like columns, decorative works, jail works, staircase,
doors and windows.
Unit 5: Architectural models Duration: 15 hours(L: Studio: )

Prepare models of architectural forms by combining more than three forms
Unit 6: Block models Duration: 6 hours(L: Studio: )

Prepare scale down model of simple building (block model).

1. Recognize the importance of models in the field of architecture.
2. Understand and use the technique of model making.
3. Identify suitable tools and materials for different types of models.
4. Prepare models of artistic merit and crafts manship.
Prepare models of geometrical shapes and Block model of simple building
1. Preparing models of various types as listed in the Exercises.

Assignments/ Exercises
1. Models of different Plane figures.
2. Models of solids like cube, cuboid, cone cylinder,etc
3. Models of multiple blocks.
4. Models of furniture pieces.
5. Models of component parts of a building.
6. Block model of a building.
7. A model of a small house.
Recommended Books
1. The Graphic arts studio Manual-Bert Braham
2. Architectural model making – Nick Dunn
3. Model Making: A Basic Guide – Martha Sutherland
4. Professional model making: A Handbook of Techniques& Materials – Norman Tru

1. En.wikipedia.org/wiki/model_building
2. https://www.amazon.com/Architectural-Modelmaking-Nick-Dunn/dp/1780671717
3. https://www.amazon.com/Model-Making-Professional-Architects.../dp/0393730425
5. https://www.amazon.in/Model-Making-Architecture-Brief-Werner/dp/1568988702
6. https://www.amazon.com/slp/model-making/x9fwj7s56kqa3pa
7. ttps://www.amazon.in/Professional-Modelmaking-Techniques.../dp/0823040984
290
C18-AA-308P

C18-AA-308P, MODEL MAKING LAB PRACTICE
Time : 1-1/2 hours Max.Marks: 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any one question .

2. Each question carries 20 marks.
1. Prepare a model of a cube of 6 cms.

2. Prepare a model of a cuboid of 8 cm.x 6 cm. x 5 cm.
3. Prepare a model of a pyramid of base 6 cm. side.
4. Prepare a cylinder of size 4 cm. radius base and 10 cm. height.
C18-AA-308P

Time : 1-1/2 hours Max. Marks: 20
Instructions: 1.Answer any one of the questions .

2.Each question carries twenty marks.
Prepare models with suitable materials and scale of 1:25 any one of the following::
a) Ice cream parlour b) Exhibition Stalls

c) Watchman’s cabin d) Compound wall
e) Garden pavilion f) Telephone Booth
C18-AA-308P

291

Instructions: 1. Answer any one question .
2. Each question carries forty marks.
TYPICAL QUESTIONS FOR END EXAMINATION:
1. Prepare geometrical planes out of mount board, square, Rectangle, Regular

polygon, Circle, Trapezium, Triangle, Parallelogram.
2. Prepare geometrical solids out of mount board, cube, cuboid, prism, core, cylinder,
pyramid.
3. Prepare different types of brickbats out of mount board or chamanlal sheet.
4. Prepare an arranged layout of English Bond in brick wall, 1,3,5--- and 2,4,6--- courses
Scale 1:10.
5. Prepare an arranged layout of Flemish bond in brick wall 1,3,5,--- and 2,4,6 ---
courses, Scale 1:10.
6. Prepare a rat trap bond with mount board – Scale 1:10
7. Models with suitable materials and the scale of 1:25 any four
a) Ice cream parlour b) Exhibition Stalls

c) Watchman’s cabin d) Compound wall
e) Garden pavilion f) Telephone Booth.
8. Models with suitable materials and suitable scale
a) Single bed roomed residence

b) Double bed roomed residence
c) A G+1 residential building.
9. Prepare trees out of Sponge, wire and suitable materials, which are available in the
market.
10. Prepare models of cars, human figures, lampposts, railings, lawns, fountain, pools,
Sculpture, furniture. Etc to be used together with architectural models.
Note: Materials –Foam sheet, Mount board, Ivory sheet, Thermo coal, Card – boards and
any other suitable material.
SCHEME OF EVALUATION
S.no. Performance Max.Marks
1. Development of given 2D sketch 5
2. Preparing model 20
292
3. Applying suitable texture 5
4 Viva-voce 10
TOTAL 40
BASIC CAD LAB PRACTICE

Course Title BASIC CAD LAB PRACTICE Course Code 18AA-309P
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Practice Total Contact 45
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic knowledge of drawing and architectural design
Unit Unit Name Hour Questions to be set Assessment procedure

No for SEE
Short Practical
questions
(30
(1 mark
each) marks)
AutoCAD 18 1. Theory questions on commands used

1
Commands carry one mark each – 10marks
2. Actual drawing in a printout is
2D figures- 09
evaluated for quality of presentation-
2 engineering
20 marks
objects
3. Viva to assess the correct use of
2D figures- 09 commands while executing the
10 1
3 architectural drawing- 10 marks
graphics 4. Internal assessment is based on the
portfolio of works to be submitted at
2 D figures- 09 the end of the semester.
4 architectural
plans
Total 45 10 30
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
293
CO1 : Use AutoCAD commands individually and in combination to generate simple graphics
CO2 : Draw engineering objects 2D

CO3 : Draw architectural graphics 2D
CO4 Draw architectural plans 2D
Course Contents
Unit 1: AutoCAD commands

Draw lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, ellipses, regular polygons, polylines, points, infinite lines,
construction lines, x lines, single and multiline text
Layers, object properties, drafting settings dialogue box, modes, object snaps, control and function
keys
Move, copy, multiple copy, single copy, offset, rotate, scale, fillet, chamfer, trim, extend, stretch,
lengthen, array-rectangular and polar, mirror, text mirroring.
Grips, Design centre, zoom, pan, properties palette, match properties
Annotative objects, annotative scale, assigning annotative scales and properties, customizing
annotative scale. Multiple annotative scales, text, edit text, tables
Need for dimensioning, dimension line, dimension text, arrow heads, extension lines, leader, centre
mark, centerlines, alternate units, tolerances, limits, associative dimensions, definition points,
dimension commands, ribbon, toolbar, command line usage, dimensioning many objects together.
Unit 2: Engineering objects

Draw simple engineering objects like 2D planes, orthographic projections of engineering objects
Unit 3: Architectural graphics

Draw architectural graphics like chairs, dining tables, sofas, wardrobes, dressing mirror, kitchen
shelves, display shelves, etc
Unit4: Architectural plans

Draw architectural plans of single room, double room and multiple room buildings with furniture
layouts.
Recommneded Books:
2. Inside AutoCAD, Parker, Daniel, Rice, Habert1. AutoCAD Reference Guide: Everything You
Wanted to Know about AutoCAD--Fast! By Dorothy Kent
1.0 AutoCAD Commands

1.1 Use all the draw commands in AutoCAD
1.2 Use layers concept in creation of drawings
294
1.3 Use object properties concept
1.4 Use drafting settings dialogue box
1.5 Use different modes and object snaps
1.6 Use Control and function keys
1.7 Use all the edit commands
1.8 Use of grips
1.9 Use of the Design centre
1.10 Use Zoom and pan
1.11 Use annotation scale and objects
1.12 Create and edit text
1.13 Insert and modify tables
1.14 Understand the concept of dimensioning in AutoCAD
1.15 Use the dimensioning styles
1.16 Edit dimensions
2.0 Engineering objects

2.1 Draw simple engineering objects like 2D planes,
2.2 Orthographic projections of engineering objects
3.0 Architectural graphics

3.1 Draw architectural graphics like chairs,
3.2 Dining tables,
3.3 Sofas,
3.4 Wardrobes,
3.5 Dressing mirror,
3.6 Kitchen shelves,
3.7 Display shelves, etc
4.0 Architectural plans

4.1 Draw architectural plans of single room,
4.2 Double room and
4.3 Multiple room buildings with
4.4 Furniture layouts.
1. Refer to Google images and refer to drawings on internet

2. Refer to AutoDesk website for user forums.
3. Refer to design centre for library of drawings on furniture, landscape and interior design
tools..
295
296
297
5. http://www.faveodesign.co.uk/CAD_Drawings.html
6. http://cad.about.com/od/Learn_CAD/a/The-Fundamentals-Of-Drafting.htm
7. http://transport.itu.edu.tr/PDF/iml332e/Fundamentals%20of%20CAD.pdf
CO-PO Mapping
CO1 Use AutoCAD commands R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10

individually and in combination to
298
generate simple graphics
CO2 Draw engineering objects 2D R/U/A 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO3 Draw architectural graphics 2D R/U/A 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO4 Draw architectural plans 2D R/U/A 2,3,4,8,9,10
Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
CO1 x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
CO2 x x x x x x 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO3 x x x x x x 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO4 x x x x x x 2,3,4,8,9,10
Note:
1. A lab manual is to be prepared for students to do the exercises.
2. The lab should be equipped with all hardware including A4 black and white printer
3. The lab should have original software of AutoCAD latest release in all systems
C18-AA-309P

C18 AA 309P BASIC CAD LAB PRACTICE
Time: 1 ½ hours Max marks:20
1. Redraw the following figures in AutoCAD.
299
300
C18-AA-309P

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM –II EXAMINATION (C-18)

1. Redraw the following figures in AutoCAD.
301
C18-AA-309P


Time: 3 hours Max marks:40
1. Redraw the following figure in AutoCAD
Communication Skills and Life Skills

Course Title Communication Skills and Life Skills Course Code 18AA- 310 P
Semester III Course Group Foundation
302
Teaching 1:0:2 Credits 1.5
Scheme in
Periods- L: T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods
Hours
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart communication skills and life skills to the students of
diploma which will help them a great deal in personal and professional fronts.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar, and four language
learning skills, viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
Identify the main or the central idea.

Listening Skills Listen for specific details.
Learn the pronunciation.
Learn relevant vocabulary to make introductions.
Communication Skills – I Learn to introduce oneself in formal and informal situations.
Learn vocabulary and expressions useful for describing objects
Describe objects
Learn vocabulary to talk about the past

Describe the incidents that happened in the past
Learn the techniques of organising the matter / content for
Communication Skills – II one-minute speech.
Speak fluently and accurately using appropriate body
language.
Think positively.
Develop positive attitude.
Overcome negative attitude.
Know the importance of setting goals.
Set the goals using SMART features.
Life Skills – I
303
Know the reasons for a problem.
Learn to avoid problems.
Learn the various techniques to solve the problems.
Life Skills – II Learn to make proper decisions on time.
Think ‘out of the box’.
Learn to be creative.
Think innovatively.
Think critically.
Knowhow to be a leader.
Learn the qualities of a good leader.
Life Skills – III Learn the qualities of a good team.
Learn the advantages and disadvantages of a team.
Manage time effectively.
Learn the various time management techniques.
Learn the importance of prioritisation.
Course Contents:
I. Listening Skills Duration: 9

1. Listening – I
 Digital Camera
 A Dialogue
 Wild Animal / Human conflict
2. Listening – II
 A Recipe
 A Telephone conversation
 An Interview
II. Communication Skills – I Duration:6
3. Introducing Oneself
4. Describing Objects
III. Communication Skills – II Duration:6
5. Talking About the Past
6. Just A Minute
IV. Life Skills – I Duration:6
7. Attitude
8. Goal Setting
V. Life Skills – II Duration:9
9. Problem Solving and Decision-Making Skills
10. Critical Thinking & Creativity
VI. Life Skills – III Duration:9
11. Leadership and Teamwork
12. Time Management
304
1. Listening Comprehension
2. Seminars
3. Paper Presentations
4. Line ups for introducing oneself
5. Describing persons / places / things
6. Picture description
7. Role Plays
8. Dumb charades
9. What is in the bag? (Identify the objects)
10. Games using Online Dictionaries
11. Sharing the information using emails, chats and groups
12. Just A Minute
13. Writing diary events
14. Find a solution to the problem
15. Making innovative things through recycling
16. Creating advertisements
17. Five-minute activities on Life Skills
18. Watching videos on life skills and making presentations
19. Case studies
References:
Flint, Chrisand Jamie FlockhartListening: A2 (Collins English for Life: Skills)Collins. 2013
Brown, Stephen E. English in Everyday Life. McGraw-Hill Education.2008
Mohanraj, Jayashree. Let Us Hear Them Speak: Developing Speaking-Listening Skills in English.Sage.
2015
Susan Earle – Carlin. Q Skills for Success: Listening and Speaking 5: Student Book with Online Practice.
Oxford University Press. 2013
Kumar, Sanjay and Pushpa Latha. Communication Skills: A Work Book.Oxford University Press. 2018
Carnegie, Dale.The Leader in You. Simon & Schuster: 1995
Carnegie, Dale.The Art of Public Speaking. Prabhat Prakashan. NewDelhi.2013
Kaye, Martin. Goal Setting (Workbook Included): Goals & Motivation: Introduction To A Complete &
Proven Step-By-Step Blueprint For Reaching Your Goals (Goal Setting Master Plan 1). Kindle Edition.
MK Coaching.2016.
West, Steven. Critical Thinking Skills: Practical Strategies for Better Decision making, Problem-Solving
and Goal Setting. Kindle Edition.2018
Tracy, Brain. Goals. Berret-Koehler PublishersInc. San Francisco. 2017
305
Tracy, Brain. Master your Time Master your Life. Penguin Random House Inc. New York. 2017
Sean Covey . The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Teens. Simon and Schuster,2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/youmeus/learnit/learnitv39.shtml
https://www.examenglish.com/leveltest/listening_level_test.htm
https://www.oxfordonlineenglish.com/listening?utm_referrer=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.google.co.in
%2F
https://takeielts.britishcouncil.org/prepare-test/free-ielts-practice-tests/listening-practice-test-1
https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/listening
https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/activities-for-learners/?skill=listening
https://www.businessenglishsite.com/business-english-listening.html
CO-PO Matrix
Course Outcome Linked PO

CO 1 Listening for main idea and specific details R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7,8,
9,10
CO 2 Introduce oneself and Describe Objects R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10
CO 3 Talk about the past and speak fluently for one R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8.9,10
minute
CO 4 Develop positive attitude and set short term and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
long term goals
CO 5 Learn to solve a problem, make decisions and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
think innovatively
CO6 Learn to become a good team member and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
leader
Evaluation Pattern:
I. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
a. MidSem- I (Oral & Individual) 20 marks

Syllabus:
i. Listening Skills
ii. Communication Skills - I
b. Mid Sem – II (Written) 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Communication Skills - II
ii. Life Skills - I
c. Internalassessment: 20 marks
i. Seminars: 10 marks
306
ii. Assignments and Lab record submission: 10 marks
II. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks

a. Listening: 5 Marks
b. Viva Voce or JAM or Role plays : 10 Marks
c. An activity on life skills topics : 25 Marks

THIRD SEMESTER 18 COMMON-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listening Comprehension: 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage given below)
Florence Nightingale was an English social reformer and a statistician, and the founder of
modern nursing. She was born in Florence, Italy, on May 12, 1820. Part of a wealthy family,
Nightingale defied the expectations of the time and pursued what she saw as her God-given calling
of nursing during the Crimean War. She and a team of nurses improved the unsanitary conditions at
a British base hospital, greatly reducing the death count. Her writings sparked worldwide health care
reform, and in 1860 she established St. Thomas' Hospital and the Nightingale Training School for
Nurses. A revered hero of her time, she died on August 13, 1910, in London. Nightingale came to
prominence while serving as a manager and trainer of nurses during the Crimean War, in which she
organized care for wounded soldiers. She gave nursing a favourable reputation and became an icon
of Victorian culture, especially in the persona of "The Lady with the Lamp" making rounds of
wounded soldiers at night.
Questions:
1. Who was Florence Nightingale?
2. When and where was she born?
3. What does the passage convey?
4. When did she pass away?
5. Where did she establish nursing school?
PART- B 10 Marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the questions in 150 words.

307
2. How do you introduce yourself formally in an interview?
3. Describe your polytechnic.

MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
1. Describe how you have spent your summer vacation.
2. What are the features of good JAM presentation? What precautions do you before speaking for
one minute on the given topic?
Part – B 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
3. What is positive attitude? Give examples of positive attitude from your life.
4. Mention your long term goal with SMART features. How do you achieve it?

SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listen to the following passage and answer the questions give below it. 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage)
308
Answer the following questions after teacher reads the following paragraph.
Prof. Jayashankar was born to Mahalaxmi and Laxmi Kantha Rao on 6 th August 1934 in
Akkampet village, Warangal District. He was a Doctorate in Economics. He worked as a Vice-
Chancellor of Kakatiya University. He worked in many capacities. He was popularly known as
“Pedda Sir.” He inspired many a people to fight for the cause of Telangana Statehood.
At the age of twelve, Jayashankar refused to sing songs in praise of the Nizam and insisted
on singing Vande Mataram instead. As an intermediate student, in 1952, he protested against
State Reorganization Committee plan to merge with the Andhra Rashtra. He took an active part
in the agitations of “Non – Mulki go back“ and “ Idli Sambar go back.” He took an active part in
Telangana separate statehood agitation in 1969 too. In 1999, Prof. Jayashankar started the
Telangana Development Forum in the USA which helped to propagate the injustice,
discrimination and exploitation meted out to Telangana region and people in the aspects of
employment, funds and water resources. He relentlessly put his efforts to end the struggle of
Telangana people. He passed away on June 21, 2011. He was 76 years old at the time of his
death.
Questions:
1. Where was Prof. Jayashankar born?

2. Why didn’t he sing songs in praise of the Nizam?
3. Why did Jayashankar start the Telangana Development Forum in USA?
4. What are the two agitations in which he took an active part?
5. What is the meaning of ‘relentlessly’?
Part – B 15 marks
2. JAM / Role Plays
Part – C 15 marks
3. Viva Voce on Life Skills topics
Skill Upgradation

20. Market survey
21. Material survey
22. Data collection
309
23. Site visits
27. Seminars
28. Presentations
30. Slip tests
31. Surprise tests
32. Time Problems
33. Desktop surveys
34. Model making
35. 3D Renderings
36. Walk through
Extra Curricular:
7. Debates
8. Elocution
9. Recitation
10. Dumb Charades

FOURTH SEMESTER
310
Instruction Total Credits Continuous InternalSemester End Total Min
periods Period Evaluation Examination Marks marks
per s per (Internal
S. week semest +End
SUBJECT
NO SUBJECT NAME er Exam)
CODE
. L T P Mid Mid Sesion Max Min
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 18 AA-401 C BUILDING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

ESTIMATION
2 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
STRENGTH OF
18 AA-402 C MATERIALS(Com
mon with Civil)
3 18 AA-403 C SURVEYING 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
4 HISTORY OF 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

18 AA-404 C WESTERN
ARCHITECTURE
5 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35
18 AA-405 C URBAN PLANING
DRAWING SUBJECTS
6 BUILDING 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
18 AA-406 D CONSTRUCTION
DRAWING
7 ADVANCED 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
18 AA-407 D ARCHITECTURA
L DESIGN-
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
8 SURVEYING LAB 0 0 3 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
18 AA-408 P
PRACTICE
9 CAD LAB 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

18 AA-409 P
PRACTICE
10 ADVANCED 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

COMMUNICATIO 0
18 AA-410 P N SKILLS & LIFE
SKILLS LAB
PRACTICE
11 Skill 0 0 7 105 2.5 Rubrics Grade-
Upgradation -- A/B/C/D
TOTAL 17 8 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 175 1000 425
BUILDING ESTIMATION
311
Course Title Building Estimation Course Code 18 AA -401 C
Semester IV Course group core

Teaching Scheme
2:2:0 Credit 03
in Hrs (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Type of course Lecture + assignments 60
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of secondary school level mathematics
and ability to read drawings.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Know the different methods of building estimation
To know the quality and estimate the quantity of different materials for various items of
CO2 :
work
Specify the equipment, tools and plants to be engaged for a work
CO3:
CO4 : Estimate the quantity of RCC Works
CO5 : Know the cost of unit, quantity of item/work
CO6 : Know the essential part of a contract document required for arbitration purposes.
Time Schedule
Unit
Unit Name Hours
No
1 Procedure of Estimating 8
2 Preliminary Estimates 12
Methods of Building
3 8
Estimates
4 RCC works 12
5 Estimate of Buildings 15
6 Analysis of rates 5
Total 60
Course Contents:
Unit1: Procedure of Estimating Duration: 8hours
1.1 Introduction,
1.2 Method of estimating- detailed estimate
312
1.3 Detailed estimate, details of measurement form, Abstract of estimate form.
1.4 Main items of work- deductions.
1.5 Units of measurement for various items of works, materials.
1.6 Dimensions for standard modular bricks, traditional bricks.
Unit2: Preliminary Estimates Duration: 12hours
2.1 Need of a preliminary estimate.

2.2 Data required for an estimate- Drawings, specifications and rates.
2.3 Different types of estimates- Plinth area estimate, cubical content estimate,
item rate method, revised estimate, supplementary estimate.
2.4 Contingencies, work charged establishment, tools and plants.
2.5 Problems on preliminary estimates
Unit3: Methods of Building Estimates Duration: 8hours
3.1 Methods of building estimate- Separate or individual wall method, Center line
method, long wall & short wall method
3.2 Simple problems on estimate of quantities of earthwork excavation &
filling, brickwork, concrete in foundations, slabs, PC bed, flooring , plastering
for a wall or a single room.
3.3 Painting and coloring
3.4 Wood work for doors and windows
3.5 Estimating the quantities of concrete, brickwork and finishing work for
simple steps
Unit4: RCC Works Duration: 12 hours
4.1 Prepare a detailed estimate for RCC for cement concrete work and steel in
detail.
4.2 Prepare a detailed estimate of an RCC column with footing.
4.3 Prepare a detailed estimate of an RCC lintel and sunshade.
4.4 Prepare a detailed estimate of an RCC beam.
4.5 Prepare a detailed estimate of an RCC slab.
Unit5: Estimate of Buildings Duration: 15 hours
5.1 Detailed estimate of quantities by Long wall- short wall method, Center line
method.
5.2 Estimates of two to four rooms buildings with or without verandahs for
different items of work with appropriate deductions.
5.3 Abstract of estimated cost.
Unit 6: Analysis of Rates Duration: 5 hours
313
6.1 Analysis of rates under two heads- materials and labor
6.2 Materials for different items of work.
6.3 Rates of materials and labour
6.4 Preparation of unit rates for different items of work.
6.5 Lead and lift statement
Specific Learning Outcomes:

1. Procedure of Estimating
1.1 To know the procedure of estimating.
1.2 To know the main items of work, units and measurement
1.3 To know deductions for openings
2.Preliminary Estimates
2.1 Know the different types of estimates
2.2 Calculate the cost of building usingpreliminary estimates
3.Methods of Building Estimate

Able to estimate quantity of materials for small elements of a building:
3.1 Take out detailed quantities for various items of works from given set of
drawings.
3.2 Work-out quantities of materials for various items of works from given set of
drawings.
3.3 Preparation of abstract estimate from detailed estimates prepared and rates
given.
4 RCC Works
4.1 Know items included in RCC work-
4.2 Calculate the quantity of cement concrete work and steel separately.
4.3 To know about cranking of bars
4.4 Know the schedule of bars.
4.5 Prepare a detailed estimate of concrete and steel in RCC column with
foundation, beams slabs, lintel and chajjas.
5 Estimate of Buildings
Able to estimate quantity of materials for 2 – 4 rooms of a building by long wall –
short wall method, center line method.
5.1 Take out detailed quantities for various items of works from given set of
drawings.
5.2 Work-out quantities of materials for various items of works from given set of
drawings.
5.3 Preparation of abstract estimate from detailed estimates prepared and rates
given
6 Analysis of Rates
314
6.1 Cost of materials at site.
6.2 Cost of labor – Schedule of rates
6.3 Lead and lift – leads statement
6.4 Preparation of unit rates for finished items of works with givenparticulars of
materials and labor cost.

1. Market survey of materials and labour costs.
2. Assignments
3. Site visit
Skill Upgradation Project
Suggested Books:
1. Estimation & Costing in Civil Engineering – BN Dutta.

2. Estimation, Costing, Specification & Valuation in Civil Engineering –
MChakraborti.
3. Estimation & Costing by Mahajan.
4. Estimation & Costing by Rangwala.
5. Strandard data book by CPWD Publication.
6. S S R by Govt. of Telangana State.
Suggested E learning Resourse:

1. https:/www.lynda.com/Accubuid…/Learning-Construction-Estimating/636114-2.htm
2. https:/www.vicabc.ca/training/find-a-course-calandar/?Eventid=169
Course Outcomes CL Linked PO
CO1 Know the difference methods of building estimation U 1,2,6,7
CO2 To know the quality and estimate the quantity od R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8
different materials for various items of work
CO3 Specify the equipment, tools and plants to be U/A 1,2,4,7

engaged for a work
CO4 Estimate thye quantity of RCC Works R/U/A 2,3
CO5 Know the cost of unit quantity o item/work U/A 2,3
315
CO6 Know essential part of a contract document required U/A 2,8
for arbitration purpose

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Engineering tools
Ethics
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 Communication

PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 x x x x x 1,2,6,7
CO2 x x x x x 1,2,3,7,8
CO3 x x x x 1,2,4,7
CO4 x x 2,3
316
CO5 x x 2,3
CO6 x x 2,8
317
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration of Exam: 1 Hour)
Total
PART A PART B PART C Marks
5 Marks
Marks/Question 1 Mark each 3 Marks each each
20 Marks
2/4 2/4
No. of Questions 4 Questions Questions Questions
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
MID SEM - II EXAM (Duration of Exam :1 Hour)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration of Exam: 2 Hours)
Total
5 Marks
40 Marks
4/8 4/8
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
The above format is applicable for all theory subjects.
318
C18-AA-401C

C18-AA-401C, BUILDING ESTIMATION

Part A 4x1=4marks
Instructions: 1.Answer all questions.
1. Write the dimensions of a modular brick

2. What are the units of measurement for flooring?
3. What is the necessity of a preliminary estimate?
4. What is ‘contingencies?’
Part B 2x3=6marks

Each question carries three marks
5. a) Name the different methods of building estimate.
OR
h) What are the units of measurement for a) rubble work b) DPC c) Plastering
6. a) A flush door of size 1.0 X 2.0m. is to be painted at the rate of Rs. 100/- per sq. m.
Calculate the cost of painting.
OR
b) A building measures 24 X 18 X 6 m, with an internal courtyard of 3 X 4.5.

Calculate the cost of building if the rate is Rs. 35000/- per 10 cu.m.
Part C 2x5=10marks
Instructions: Answer the following questions .

Each question carries three marks
1. a) Draw the tabular column for ‘Details of Measurement form’
319
OR
b) Draw the tabular column for ‘Abstract of Estimate form’
2. a) Prepare a preliminary estimate of an office building having two floors and a plinth
area of 1400 sq.m. Height of each floor is 3.5m. Cubical content rate is Rs. 5000/- per
Meter cube.
Provided for the following as a percentage of structural cost:
Water supply and sanitary requirements: 8%
Electrification -6%
Contractors margin -10%
Petty supervision and contingencies – 3% overall.
OR
b) Prepare a preliminary estimate of a 4 story office building having a plinth area

of 2800 sq.m. for obtaining administrative approval given the following data:
Plinth area rate – Rs. 3200 per sq.m.
Extra for architectural treatment – 1% of building cost
Water supply and sanitary requirements: 8% of building cost
Electrification -10% of building cost
Contractors margin -10%
Petty supervision and contingencies – 6% overall cost.
320
C18-AA-401C

C18-AA-401C BUILDING ESTIMATION
Part A 4x1=4marks
2.Each question carries one mark.
1. Name the methods of detailed building estimate,
2. Calculate the total center line length of a room 4 X 6m.
3. What are the units of measurement for concrete?
4. Write short notes on centering and shuttering.
Part B 2x3=6marks
Instructions: Answer the following questions .

Each question carries three marks.
5. a) Calculate the quantity of brickwork required for a wall 4m. long,3m. high and
30cms. thick. Also calculate the cost of brickwork if the rate is Rs. 500/- per cu.m.
OR
b) Calculate the quantity of plastering required for a wall 9m. long,3.6m. high and
30cms. thick. Also calculate the cost of plastering if the rate is Rs. 12/- per sq.m.
6. a) what is the %age of steel in concrete in the following: i) lintels, slabs ii) beams iii)
columns
OR
c) What are the end /side covers for steel bars for slabs, beams, columns.
321
Part C 2x5=10marks

2.Each question carries five marks.
7. a) Prepare a detailed estimate of part of a wall of a building from the given plan,
section and general specifications. FIGURE 1.
First class brick work for foundation and plinth
DPC
OR
b) Prepare a detailed estimate of a one room building from the given plan, section
and general specifications. FIGURE 2.
First class brick work for walls
Flooring
8. a) Prepare a detailed estimate of an RCC framed room from the given plan and
elevation in FIGURE 3. Calculate for the following: i) RCC chajja and sunshade –
0.5% ii) RCC beams – 1%
OR
b) Prepare a detailed estimate of an RCC framed room from the given plan and
elevation in FIGURE 3. Calculate for the following: i) RCC footing of column –
0.5% ii) RCC roof slab – 0.8%
322
C18-AA-401C

C18-AA-401C, BUILDING ESTIMATION
Time: 2 hours Max. marks: 40

Part A 8x1=8 marks

1. What are the units of measurement for A.C sheet roofing and Steel used in
reinforcement.
2. Name the methods of building estimate.
3. What is a standard data book?
4. Name the different types of preliminary estimates.
5. Calculate the quantity of flooring including skirting upto 15cms. height required for a
room of 4 X 6 size.
6. Draw the table for ‘ Abstract of Estimate form’
7. What is a unit rate means?
8. A wall is measuring 10m. long 3m. high and 30cms. wide. Calculate the no. of
modular bricks required for the construction of the wall.
Part B 4x3=12 marks
2.Each question carries three marks.
9. a) Write short notes on contingencies.

OR
b) Calculate the centerline length of a room 7.5m. X 6.0m
10. a) Calculate the quantity of brickwork required for 5 steps of 1.2m. wide, tread 30cm.
and rise15cms. as shown in the figure.
OR
b) define lead and lift.
11. a) A window of size 1.2 X 1.4M. has a wooden frame of size 0.10 X 0.08 m. and
consists of two vertical posts, a head and a sill. Calculate the quantity of wood
required.
OR
b) Calculate the cost of painting for a paneled door of size 1.2 X 2.1 m. if the cost of
painting is Rs. 90/- per sq.m.
323
12. a) the cost of 1cu.m of HBG metal 40mm. size is Rs. 300. Find the cost of 0.92 cu.m
of metal if the lead is 10km. on metal road. The rate of transport by a metal road is
Rs, 4/cu.m/km.
OR
b) Write short notes on’ Schedule of rates’
Part C 4x5=20 marks

13. a) Determine the ocst of construction of a college building for 325 students. The
standard area allowed per student is 25 sq,m. and the rate is Rs. 4000/- per sq.m.
OR
b) Calculate the quantity of plastering for building given in the figure no 2.
14. a) calculate the quantity of RCC work for a slab of 10 X 6 X 0.15 m. size.
OR
b) Prepare a detailed estimate for an RCC column footing as shown in figure no. 3.
15. a) Calculate the quantities of materials by center line method for the following items
of work from the drawing given in figure no. 1
i)Earth work in excavation
ii) Brick work in cement mortar in foundation and plinth
OR
b) Calculate the quantities of materials by center line method for the following
items of work from the drawing given in figure no. 1
i)First class brickwork in super structure
ii) Plastering work
16. a) The cost at source and lead particulars are given below for cement and sand .
Calculate the cost of the materials at work site.
Material Rate Per Lead Conveyance

Charge
Cement Rs. 3000 Tonne 10Km. MR Rs. 50/- per
Km.
Sand Rs. 600 Cu.m 20 Km. Rs. 20/- per
MR,5Km. Km. / Metl
Cart track road
OR
b) Prepare detailed data for 1cu.m 1:4:8 cement concrete from the information given
below:
324
Strength of Materials
(Common with Civil Engineering)
Course Title: Strength of Materials Course Code 18AA-402C
Semester IV Semester Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods 45:15:0 Credits 3
(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture+Assignment Total Contact 60 Periods
s Periods
Pre requisites
Knowledge of Engineering Mechanics
Course Outcomes
CO1 Develop Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for different types of beams
Apply Euler’s formula and Rankine’s formula for columns to arrive at critical load
CO2
over the column
Apply geometricalproperties of beam to calculate strength parameters like flexural
CO3
stress and shear stress inbeams for different loading conditions.
Calculate the capacity of circular shafts in generating Power according to sectional
CO4
properties.
Calculate the deformation (Slope &deflection) ofBeams by Double Integration
CO5
Method
Analyse the beams to calculate slope and deflection using Macaulay’s method and
CO6
Moment area method.
Unit
No Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
R U A
Shear force and Bending Q4
I 12 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Moment Q1
II Columns and Struts 08
III Theory of simple 10 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
bending
325
A) Shear stress in beams 05
IV
B) Torsion 05
Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
Deflection of beams-I 08 Q5,Q6 Q11(b) Q15(b)
V
Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a)
Q14(b),Q16(a),
Deflection of beams-II 12 Q7,Q8 , Q12(b)
VI Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT - 1: Shear Force and Bending Moment Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
Concepts of S.F. and B.M.-Sign Convention - Relation between Rate of Loading,
S.F. and B.M -S.F. and B.M.diagrams for Cantilevers, Simply Supported beams,
Overhanging beams subjected to point loads and uniformly distributed loads -
Maximum B.M and maximum S.F in beams for various loads- position and
significance of points of contra flexure
UNIT - 2: Columns and struts Duration: 08 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)

Importance of Least Moment of Inertia, radius of gyration and slenderness ratio -
Moment of Inertia for Solid circular, Hollow circular, Rectangular, I sections and
Built up sections - Short and Longcolumns,failures -Different end conditions -
Effective length - calculation of safe load on columns with axial load only by
Euler’s and Rankine’s formula - Limitation of Euler’s formula.
UNIT - 3: Theory of Simple Bending Duration: 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Bending stress in beams :Introduction – Bending Stress in beams – Bending
Equation (Derivation not required) – Neutral Axis - Section Modulus, Flexural
Rigidity, Modulus of Elasticity, Radius of curvature, Moment of Resistance –
Calculation of bending stresses in Rectangular, Circular, and I-sections-practical
applications.
UNIT – 4(A):Shear stress in beams Duration: 5 Periods (L:4 – T:1)

Calculation of shear stress in different layers of a beam for I section (Derivation
of formula not required) – Shear Stress distribution diagrams for various
326
symmetrical beam sections such as rectangular, solid circular and I sections -
problems
UNIT- 4(B): Torsion Duration: 05 Periods (L:4 – T:1)

Introduction – Theory of torsion – Assumptions – Torsion formula (Derivation
not required) – Solid and hollow circular shafts subjected to pure torsion –
Simple problems – Shear stress distribution in shafts - Power transmitted by
circular shafts – Problems
UNIT - 5: Deflection of Beams -I Duration: 08 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)

Introduction – Deflected profiles of beams with different support conditions –
Strength and stiffness of beams – Relation between curvature, slope and
deflection - Slope and deflection for simply supported beams under symmetrical
loading – Slope and deflection in cantilever beams under point load and udl-
Double integration method – Derivation of standard cases – Problems.
UNIT - 6: Deflection of Beams –II Duration: 12 Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

a) Macaulay’s method for slope and deflection–Simply supported beams under
concentrated and uniformly distributed loads – Problems.
b) Mohr’s theorems for slope and deflection – Cantilevers and simply supported
beams with symmetrical loading – Problems.
Reference Books
1. Strength of Materials by S. Ramamurtham.
2. S.M and T.S by B.C. Punmia.
3. S.M and T.S by N. Srinivasulu.
4. Introduction to Strength of Materials by D.S. Prakash Rao.
5. Strength of Materials (A practical approach) Vol–I by D.S. PrakashRao.
6. Strength of Materials by R.K. Bansal
7. S.M. and T.S. by Y. Ram Mohan Rao
8. Strength of Materials by L.S. Negi
9. Mechanics of Solids by E P Popov
10. Elements of strength of materials by Timoshenko
327
1.www.elearning.com/survey
1.1 Explain terms:

a) Shear Force
b) Bending Moment
1.2 Explain the sign conventions used to calculate Shear Force and Bending
Moment
1.3 Explain the relationship between the rate of loading, shear force and bending
moment
1.4 Determine Shear Force and Bending Moment on Cantilevers, Simply Supported
Beams and Overhanging beams for simple cases of loading (Point Load,
Uniformly distributed load) analytically
1.5 Determine maximum SF and maximum BM for various loading conditions in
beams.
1.6 Describe the procedures for sketching the Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and
Bending Moment Diagrams (BMD)
1.7 Sketch Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and Bending Moment Diagrams (BMD)
for Cantilever and Simply Supported Beams
1.8 Determine point of contraflexure
2.1 List different types of compression members

2.2 Define :
i) Buckling/Critical/Crippling Load ii) Actual length iii) Slenderness ratio
iv) Least radius of gyration v) Safe load vi) Factor of safety
328
2.3 State the classification of columns based on slenderness ratio OR length and lateral
dimensions
2.4 Calculate least radius of gyration for solid circular, hollow circular, square,
rectangular sections, I-sections and built up sections
2.5 List different end conditions for a column
2.6 Find the effective lengths of columns for different end conditions
2.7 Calculate the slenderness ratio for a given column
2.8 State Euler’s formula for crippling load of a column (derivation not required)
2.9 Solve problems on limitations of Euler’s formula
2.10 Calculate crippling and safe loads on a column with simple and built up sections
using Euler’s formula
2.11 Explain the validity of Rankine’s formula for short and long columns using basic
Rankine’s empirical formula
2.12 Calculate crippling or safe loads on a column with simple and built up section
using Rankine’s formula
2.13 Calculate the ratio of strengths of hollow and solid circular columns loaded under
same conditions
2.14 Design a hollow circular cross section of a column for the given data
2.15 Calculate the ratio of strengths of a section using Euler’s and Rankine’sformulae
under same conditions
3.1 Explain simple / pure bending

3.2 Define terms
a) Neutral layer
b) Neutral axis
c) Radius of curvature
d) Moment of Resistance
e) Modulus of section
f) Flexural rigidity
3.3 State the assumptions made in the theory of simple bending.
3.4 Prove that the neutral axis passes through centroid of any cross section
3.5 Sketch and explain bending stress distribution across the depth of the beam for
any cross section
329
3.6 Obtain the formula for section modulus of (solid and hollow sections):
a) Square Section
b) Rectangular Section
c) Circular Section
3.7 Calculate section modulus based on above formulae
3.8 Solve problems on theory of simple bending for symmetrical and unsymmetrical
sections to calculate Moment of Resistance, Design of cross section.
4.1 State formula for calculation of Shear Stress in any layer of a cross section
4.2 Draw shear distribution diagram across:
i) Rectangular section
ii) Solid circular section
iii) Symmetrical I - section
iv) T - section
4.3 Determine shear stress at any layer and draw shear stress distribution diagram
across:
i) Rectangular section
ii) Symmetrical I - section
4.4 Determine the maximum shear stress in circular, rectangular and square
sections
4.5 State pure Torsion
4.6 State the assumptions made in the pure Torsion
4.7 State the formula for pure Torsion of a circular shaft
4.8 Solve the problems on Torsion applying Torsion formula
4.9 Explain terms:
i) Polar modulus
ii) Torsional rigidity
4.10 State the formula for power transmitted by the circular shaft
4.11 Solve the problems on power transmitted by the solid and hollow circular
shafts stiffness
4.12 Computes the dimensions of a solid / hollow circular shaft based on strength
and stiffness
330
5.1 Draw the deflected shapes of different beams
5.2 Define:
i) Elastic curve
ii) Slope
iii) Deflection
5.3 Distinguish between strength and stiffness of a beam.
5.4 Derive relation between slope, deflection and radius of curvature
3.1 Derive the equations for maximum slope and deflection by double integration
method for:
i) Cantilever beams with point loads and uniformly distributed loads
(standard cases).
ii) Simply supported beams with central point load or uniformly distributed
load throughout or their combination.
5.5 Calculate the maximum slope and deflection in simply supported and
cantilever beams using the above formulae
6.1 Explain Macaulay’s method (for Simply supported beams) to find the slope and
deflections
6.2 Compute the maximum slope and deflection for Simply supported beam
carrying point loads and uniformly distributed loads by Macaulay’s method
6.3 Define:
i) Mohr’s theorem-I
ii) Mohr’s theorem-II
6.4 Derive formulae for maximum slope and deflection in standard cases (simply
supported and cantilever beams) by moment area method
6.5 Compute the maximum slope and deflections for Cantilever and Simply
Supported Beams by Mohr’s theorem-I and Mohr’s theorem-II (moment area
method)
331
1.Visit the Institute’s Library / internet center and list the books/journals/ e-books and
any other resources available on the topics suggested by the teacher.
3. Prepare references consisting name of the author, title of the book/paper,

publicationand place of publication, volume No.s, page numbers and year of
publication on the following topics
i)Beam column joints.
ii) Mohr’s theorem
iii) Bending Test on Wood and Mild steel.
332
Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge
Communication
Ethics
Lifelong learning
KnowledgeDiscipline
Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 1 3 2 2 2 1,2,4,8,9
CO2 2 1 2 1 1,2,3,9,10
CO3 1 3 1 2 2 1,2,3,9,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 2,3,4,10
CO5 2 2 2 1 1,2,3,10
CO6 2 3 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
333
Sl.N Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

o Questions each Marks
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not
exceed ¼ of a page,1 page and 2 pages respectively
Sl.N Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

o Questions each Marks
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
334
State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana
DAA IV semester
Mid Semester-I Examination
18AA-402C, STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
Duration:1 hour Max.Marks:20 Marks
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART-A 4x1 = 4 Marks
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark
1. Show the SFD and BMD for a cantilever beam of span ‘l’ with a point load of ‘W’ at
the end indicating Maximum values.
2. Show the SFD and BMD for a simply supported beam of span ‘l’ with a UDL of ‘w
kN/m’ through out the span indicating Maximum values.
3. State any three assumptions made in Euler’s theory of columns.
4. State different end conditions of columns.
PART-B 2x 3 = 6 Marks
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks
5(a). A simply supported beam of span 6m is carrying a point load of 30kN at a distance of
4m from LHS and a UDL of12kN/m over entire span. Calculate maximum Bending
moment and draw BMD.
(OR)
5(b). A cantilever of span 6m carries two point loads of 10kN and 20kN at a distance of 1m
and 4m from fixed support. Draw BMD
6(a). A rectangular columnof cross section 200mm x 300mm, 5m long is fixed at one end
and hinged at the other. Determine the Euler’s critical load on the column if E = 200
kN/mm2.
(OR)
6(b). A solid circular section of diameter 150mm is used as a column of length 4m. It is
fixed on both ends. Determine the Rankine’s buckling load. Given fc = 500 N/mm 2
and a = 1/1600
PART-C
335
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries FIVE marks2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a). A cantilever beam of span 6m is subjected to 2 point loads 10kN, 15kN at a distance
of 2m, 6m from fixed end. In addition to them it carries a udl of 5kN/m through out
the span. Draw SFD and BMD.
(OR)
7(b). A 7m span beam is simply supported between 5m and is overhanged for a length of
2m on right side. It carries 2 point loads 25kN and and 18kN acting at 3m and 7m
from LHS. Draw SFD and BMD.
8(a). A solid circularcast iron column whose diameter is 200mm is 4m long. It is fixed at
both ends. Calculate the ratio of Euler’s and Rankine’s critical load. fc =
2
500N/mm and a = 1/1600
(OR)
8(b) A straight bar 3m long is used as a strut with both ends fixed. When an axial load of 8
kN is applied the bar is found to buckle. What should be the diameter of rod. Take fc
= 330 N/mm2 and a = 1/1750
336
DAA IV semester
Mid Semester-II Examination
18AA-402C, STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
Duration:1 hour Max.Marks:20 Marks
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART-A
Answer ALL questions, Each Question carries ONE mark 4x1 = 4 Marks
1. Define Neutral axis of the section and state where it lies for any section.
2. Define Section Modulus and state its units.
3. Define pure torsion and write the units for twisting moment.
4. Define torsion and write any three practical examples of application of torsion.
PART-B
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREEmarks2x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a). A steel rod 100mm diameter is to be bent to a circular shape. Find the minimum
radius of curvature to which it should be bent so that stress in the steel may not
exceed 120 N/mm2. Take E = 2 x 105 N/mm2.
(OR)
5(b). A steel flat of size 120mm wide and 25mm thick is bent into a circular arc of radius
5m. Find the maximum stress induced and the bending moment which can produce
this stress. Take E = 2 x 105 N/mm2.
6(a). A steel shaft having a modulus of rigidity as 80 kN/mm 2 is twisted by 1 degree 30

minutes in a length of 2m. The shaft is solid circular with diameter 80mm. Determine
the Torque required.
(OR)
6(b). A hollow steel shaft has 120mm outer diameter and 15mm thickness. When
transmitting power at 150 r.p.m the angle of twist per metre length was one degree.
Find the power transmitted by the shaft. Take G = 80 kN/mm2.
337
PART-C
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries FIVE marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a). A rectangular beam 300mm deep is simply supported over a span of 3m. What “udl”
the beam can carry, if the bending stress is not to exceed 120 MPa? Take I = 80 x 10 6
mm4.
(OR)
7(b). A cast iron beam of symmetrical I-section with top flange 150mm x 10mm, bottom
flange 150mm x 10mm and web 280mm x 10mm is simply supported over a span of
6m. If the permissible bending stress is 110 N/mm 2, what uniformly distributed load
can be safely applied on the beam?
8(a). A solid steel shaft is to transmit a torque of 1x10 8 N.mm. If the shearing stress does
not exceed 45 N/mm2, Find the minimum diameter of the shaft.
(OR)
8(b). A hollow circular shaft 120mm external diameter has to transmit 120 kW power at
200 r.p.m. The angle of twist on a length of 3m was observed to be 0.85 degree. Find
the thickness of the shaft. Take G = 80 kN/mm2

338
DAA IV semester
IV Semester End Examination
18AA-402C STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
Duration:2 hours Max.Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each Question carries one mark 8x1 = 8 Marks
1. What are the sign conventions to calculate Shear Force and Bending Moment in
beams.
2. Define Section Modulus and state its units.
3. Write the equations for max. Slope and max. Deflection of a simply supported beam
subjected to a total u.d.l of W over its whole span.
4. Differentiate between Short column and Long column.
5. Define slope and deflection.
6. Define Elastic curve of a beam and show the deflected shapes of
(i) Simply supported and

(ii) Cantilever beams.
7. State the relation between curvature, slope and deflection of a loaded beam and
explain the terms.
8. Differentiate between strength and stiffness of a beam.
PART-B
Answer FOURquestions.Each question carries three marks. 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a). A cantilever beam of span 6m is subjected to 2 point loads 20kN and 30kN at a
distance of 3m and 6m from fixed end. Draw SFD and BMD for the beam and
summarize maximum values.
(OR)
9(b). A cantilever beam of span 5m carries a u.d.l at the rate of w/m. The section of the
beam is 100mm x 200mm and the value of E of the beam material is 2 x 10 4 mm4.
Determine the value of ‘w’ if the maximum deflection is 8mm.
10(a). A simply supported beam of symmetrical section 300mm deep and I = 120 x 10 6 mm4
carries a UDL of 15 kN/m throughout the span. Calculate maximum span of the beam
if the maximum bending stress is not to exceed 160 N/mm2
339
(OR)
10(b). A cantilever beam of span 3m carries a point load of 30kN at its free end. Calculate
the slope and deflection at the free ends using Mohr’s theorems. Take EI = 4000 kN-
m2.
11(a). A simply supported beam is 6m long, 200mm wide and 350mm deep. Calculate the
maximum central point load the beam can carry so that the maximum deflection does
not exceed 10mm.
(OR)
11(b). A cantilever of span 3m carries a UDL of 10kN/m over a length of 2m from fixed
support. Calculate the deflection at the free end.
12(a). A simply supported beam of span ‘L’ carries a point load of ‘W’ at the centre of
beam. Derive a formula to calculate the maximum slope in the beam. Use Moment
Area method.
(OR)
12(b). Write the boundary conditions to attain maximum slope and maximum deflection for
the following cases.
a) Simply supported beam with a UDL of ‘w’ kN/m acting throughout the
span ‘L’.
b) Cantilever beam of span ‘L’with a point load ‘W’ at the free end.
PART-C
Answer FOUR questions. Each Question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20

Marks
13(a) A simply supported beam of span 5m is carrying a point load of 40kN at a distance of
2m from LHS and a UDL of 10 kN/m over entire span. Calculate maximum Bending
moment and draw BMD.
(OR)
13(b) Derive a formula to calculate maximum slope for a simply supported beam with
concentrated load at the centre, using Double integration method.
14(a) A symmetrical I-section with flange dimensions 180mm x 10mm and web 12 x
250mm is used as a beam having overall depth 270mm, to resist a Shear Force of
60kN. Find the maximum Shear stress developed in the beam.
(OR)
340
14(b) A RSJ is freely supported over a span of 5m carrying central concentrated load of 20
kN. Find the position and magnitude of maximum deflection. Use Maculay’s method.
E = 200 kN/mm2, I = 73.3 x 106 mm4.
15(a) Derive a formula to calculate maximum slope for a simply supported beam with a udl
of ‘w’ kN/m throughout the span, using Double integration method.
(OR)
15(b) Derive a formula to calculate maximum slope and maximum deflection for a
cantilever beam with a point load ‘W’ at the free end, using Double integration
method.
16(a) A cantilever of span 6m carries a UDL of 10kN/m for a length of 4m from fixed end
and a point load of 12 kN at the free end. Determine maximum slope and deflection at
the free end by Moment area method. Given E = 200 kN/mm2, Ixx = 32 x 106 mm4.
(OR)
16(b) A I-section is used as a simply supported beam of span 5m to carry two point loads of
20kN each at a distance of 1.5m from both the supports. Find the position and
magnitude of maximum deflection. Take E= 2 x 10 5 N/mm2, I=73.33 x 106 mm 4. Use
Maculay’s method.
Develop Shear Force and Bending Moment R/U 1,2,8,9

CO1 Diagrams for different types of beams
CO2 Explain various end conditions and apply Euler’s U 1,2,5,8,9
formula and Rankine’s formula for columns
CO3 Describe Pure bending theory and applying U 1,2,3,4,9,10

geometrical properties of beam to calculate
strength parameters and develop flexural stress and
shear stress diagram of structural members (beams)
for different loading conditions.
CO4 Explain pure torsion in circular shafts and their R/U 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
capacity in generating Power according to
sectional properties.
CO5 Inspect and calculate the deformation (Slope U/A 1,2,3,8
&deflection) of basic beams by Double Integration
Method
CO6 Analyse the beams to calculate slope and U/A 1,2,3,8,10
341
deflection using Maculay’s method and Moment
area method.
SURVEYING
PO Mapping
Course Title: Surveying Course Code : 18AA-403C
Semester: IV Semester Course Group : Core

Teaching Scheme in 36:24:0 Credits : 3
Hrs(L:T:P):
Type of Course Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Hours : 60 Periods
:
CIE 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
:
SURVEYING
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Familiarize with the basic principles of Surveying
CO2 : Explain the Principles and instruments used in chain surveying in the field
CO3 : Familiarize with Standard operations and errors encountered in field during chain
surveying
CO4 : Explain the methods of overcoming different obstacles in Chain Surveying and
calculate the areas of irregular boundaries
CO5 : Explain the principles and procedures of Compass Surveying and acquaint with
checking for local attraction to compute included angles from given bearings
CO6 : Plot the closed traverse for the given data and adjust the closing error by using
Bowditch rule
Prerequisites: Unit Unit Name Hours/Periods

No
This course requires the
basic knowledge of
1 Introduction to surveying 06
Trigonometry and basics of
2 Principles and instruments in 14
map study chain surveying
3 Operations and errors in Chain 10
Surveying
4 Obstacles and calculation of 10
areas 342
5 Principles & instruments in 10
compass surveying
6 Compass Traversing and errors 10
Total 60
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to Surveying Duration: 6 Periods((L: 3.6 – T:2.4)

1.1 Concept of Surveying - purpose of Surveying - Divisions of
surveying- Classification of Surveying based on different criteria
1.2 Fundamental principles in Surveying -Measurements-Units and
conversions-Instruments used for taking linear and angular
measurements-
UNIT 2: Principles and Instruments in Chain Surveying
Duration: 14 Periods((L: 8.4 – T:5.6)
2.1 Purpose and Principle of Chain Surveying - Instruments used in
Chain survey and their function
UNIT 3: Operations and errors in Chain Surveying

Duration: 10 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
3.1 Errors in ordinary chaining -Correction due to incorrect length of
Chain- problems
3.2 Different operations in Chain Surveying- Ranging a survey line-
Direct ranging and Indirect ranging- Chaining on a sloping ground
3.3 Setting out right angles with cross staff and tape- Cross staff survey
– Chain triangulation
UNIT 4 : Obstacles and calculation of areas

4.1 Obstacles in chaining-methods to overcome obstacles-Problems
4.2 Calculations of area - Trapezoidaland and Simpson's rules.
UNIT 5 : Principles and instruments in compass surveying Duration: 10 Periods(L:

6.0 – T:4.0)
3.1 Introduction, Purpose, principle and uses of compass Survey
Description working and use of Prismatic compass
UNIT 6 : Compass Traversing and errors Duration: 10 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:4.0)
6.1 Field work in Compass Survey -field notes Traverse-Open and Closed
Traverse -traverse using prismatic compass.
6.2 Determination of included angles from the given bearings and vice versa
in compass traverse.
6.3 Plotting of Compass traverse - closing error and adjustment by Bowditch
graphical method.
343

UNIT 1: Introduction to Surveying Duration: 6 Periods((L: 3.6 – T:2.4)
1.1 What is the concept and purpose of surveying?
1.2 Distinguish between Plane and Geodetic surveying.
1.3 List the units of linear and angular measurements in Surveying and
conversions.
1.4 List the instruments used for taking linear and angular measurements.
1.5 Classify surveys based on different criteria
1.6 Name the fundamental principles of surveying.
UNIT 2: Principles and Instruments in Chain Surveying
2.1 What is the purpose and principle of Chain surveying

2.2 Explain the principles used in Chain triangulation.
2.3 List different instruments used in Chain Surveying.
2.4 List the functions of different instruments used in ChainSurveying.
2.5 Define ranging and explain the methods of ranging a line.
UNIT 3: Operations and errors in Chain Surveying

3.1 List the operations involved in chaining on 1. Flat ground,2.Sloping ground
3.2 Describe the method of setting out right angles with Cross staff and chain
3.3 List the errors in Chain surveying and corrections for measurement due to
incorrect length of chain.
UNIT 4 : Obstacles and calculation of areas
4.1 Explain the methods of overcoming different obstacles in chain surveying.
4.2 Calculate the areas of irregular boundaries using Trapezoidal and Simpson's
rule.
UNIT 5 : Principles and instruments in compass surveying Duration: 10 Periods(L:

5.1 State the purpose and principles of Compass surveying.
5.2 Identify the parts of Prismatic Compass and Explain their functions
5.3 Define terms
a) Whole Circle Bearing
b) Quadrantal Bearing
c) Magnetic meridian
d) Magnetic bearing
e) Local attraction.
UNIT 6 : Compass Traversing and errors Duration: 10 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:4.0)

6.1 Calculate the included angles of lines in a Compass traverse.
6.2 Explain the effect of local attraction and Determine corrected bearings for local
attraction.
6.3 Explain the method of plotting closed traverse and adjustingclosing error by
Bowditch rule.
344
1. Tech fest/Srujana
2. Paper/Poster presentation
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise test
Recommended Books
1. Surveying - N.N.Basak - Tata McGraw Hill

2. Surveying Vol-I - S.K.Duggal -McGraw Hill Edn (India) Pvt Ltd
3. Surveying and LevellingVol -1 -Kulkarni and Kanetkar
4. Surveying and Levelling Vol. - 1 - B.C. Punmia
5. Surveying and Levelling -Vol -1 -R.Agor- Khanna Publishers
1. www.elearning.com/survey
CO-PO Mapping matrix
CO1 Familiarize with the basic principles of Surveying R 1,2,3,8,9
CO2 Explain the Principles and instruments used in chain R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9
surveying in the field
CO3 Familiarize with Standard operations and errors encountered R/U 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
in field during chain surveying
CO4 Explain the methods of overcoming different obstacles in R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,7

,8,9
Chain Surveying and calculate the areas of irregular
boundaries
CO5 Explain the principles and procedures of Compass R/U/A 2,3,4,8

Surveying and acquaint with checking for local attraction to
345
compute included angles from given bearings
CO6 Calculate the included angles for plotting the closed traverse R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10
for the given data and adjust the closing error by using
Bowditch rule
346
EXAMINATION PATTERN
Total
5 Marks
20 Marks
2/4 2/4
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

Total
5 Marks
40 Marks
4/8 4/8
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
The above format is applicable to all theory subjects 18AA-401 to 405.
347
HISTORY OF WESTERN ARCHITECTURE
Course Title HISTORY OF WESTERN Course Code 18AA-404C
ARCHITECTURE
Semester IV Course group Core
Teaching scheme 3:1:0 Credits 3
in Hrs (L:T:P)
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic English at Secondary school level and
basic knowledge of sketching.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Describe the architectural characters of various styles of architecture

CO2 : Describe the influences on each style of architecture
CO3 : Sketch the plans, elevation, sections and views of important buildings in each style
of architecture
CO4 : Describe the plan and elevation of important buildings in each style of architecture
CO5 : Define the technical terms in each style of architecture.
Unit Unit Name Hour

No
1 Egyptian architecture 10
2 Greek architecture 10
3 Roman architecture 14
4 Early Christian and Gothic architecture 6
5 Renaissance architecture 14
6 Industrial revolution 06
Total 60
Course Contents:
Unit 1: Egyptian architecture
348
1.1 Influences like Geographical, geological, climatic and religious that
influenced Egyptian architecture,
1.2 Architectural character,
1.3 Pyramid of Cheops, Giza
1.4 Temple of Khons, Karnak.
Unit 2: Greek architecture

influenced Greek architecture,
2.3 The Doric, Ionic and Corinthian orders,
2.4 Parthenon, Athens
2.5 Epidaurus the open air theatre.
Unit 3: Roman architecture

influenced Roman architecture,
3.3 Composite and Tuscan orders,
3.4 Pantheon Rome,
3.5 Colosseum, Rome.
Unit4: Early Christian and Gothic architecture
4.1 Architectural character of early Christian architecture
4.2 St.Peter’sBasilican church
4.3 Architectural character of Gothic style,
4.4 Pointed arch, flying buttress, tracery window.
Unit 5: Renaissance
5.1 Architectural character of Italian renaissance

5.2 St.Peter’s Cathedral, Rome
5.3 Architectural character of English renaissance,
5.4 St.Paul’s Cathedral, London
Unit 6: Industrial revolution

6.1 Meaning of the term industrial revolution
6.2 Impact of industrial revolution on architecture with reference to buildings and
town
6.3 Impact of industrial revolution on architecture with respect to building
materials and method of technology
1.0 Egyptian Architecture
349
1.1 Explain the Geographical, Geological, Climatic and Religiousinfluence on
Egyptian Architecture
1.2 Explain the Architectural Characters of Egyptian Architecture
1.3 Sketch and describe Royal Pyramid of Cheops
1.4 Sketch and describe the temple of Khons, Karnak.
2.0 Greek Architecture

Greek Architecture.
2.2 Explain the Architectural characters of Greek architecture.
2.3 Sketch and describe the Order - Doric, Ionic and Corinthian
2.4 Sketch and describe the temple of Parthenon
2.5 Sketch and describe the open - air theatre, Epidaurus.
3.0 Roman Architecture

Roman Architecture.
3.2 Explain the Architectural characters of Roman architecture
3.3 Sketch and describe the order - Tuscan and Composite order
3.4 Sketch and describe the Pantheon temple.
3.5 Sketch and describe the Colosseum, Rome.
4.0 Early Christian and Gothic architecture.

4.1 Explain Early Christian architectural character
4.2 Sketch and describe the basilican church of St. Peter's, Rome
4.3 Explain Gothic architecture elements like pointed arch, flying
4.4 Buttress and tracery windows
5.0 Renaissance Architecture
5.1 Understand the planning of spacious renaissance structures.

5.2 Understand the architectural characteristics of Italianrenaissance.
5.3 Sketch and understand Saint Peter cathedral, Rome.
5.4 Sketch and understand Saint Paul cathedral, London ofEnglishrenaissance.
6.0 Industrial Revolution

6.1 Understand the industrial Revolution and comprehend thechanges in
Architecture.
6.2 Describe the impact of industrial Revolution on architecture,housing and
towns.

1. Quiz
2. Seminar
3. Assignments
350
5. Power point presentations
1.Students shall be taken to a one day tour to visit local historic buildings to study the
architectural features of different styles
Assignments
Sketch book with following neat labeled sketches is to bemaintained and submitted:
1. Section of Royal pyramid of Cheops, Giza.

2. Plan and sectional view of the Temple of Khons, Karnak.
3. Elevation of Doric order
4 Elevation of Ionic order
5 Elevation of Corinthian order
6. Plan and elevation of the Parthenon, Athens
7. Plan of Epidaurus, open air theatre.
8. Elevation of Tuscan order
9. Elevation of Composite order
10. Plan and sectional elevation of Pantheon, Rome
11. Plan and sectional elevation of Colosseum, Rome
12. Plan and elevation of Basilica church of St.Peter's, Rome
13. Elevations of pointed arch, flying buttress and tracery window
14. Plan and elevation of St.Peter's Cathedral, Rome
15. Plan and elevation of St.Paul's Cathedral, London
Recommended Books:
1. History of architecture by Sir Bannister Fletcher
2. World architecture by GK Hiraskar.
1. www.all-art.org
2. www.digiLibraries.com/ History of architecture
CO1 Describe the architectural R/U 1,2,5,6

characters of various styles of
architecture
CO2 Describe the influences on each R/U/A 1,2,5,6,10
style of architecture
351
CO3 Sketch the plans, elevation, R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
sections and views of important
buildings in each style of
architecture
CO4 Describe the plan and elevation R/U/A 1,2,3,4,6,8,9,10

of important buildings in each
style of architecture
CO5 Define the technical terms in R/U/A 1,2

each style of architecture.
Note: Students have to be taken on architectural tours to study the various styles of
architecture.
352
EXAMINATION PATTERN
Total
5 Marks
20 Marks
2/4 2/4
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

Total
5 Marks
40 Marks
4/8 4/8
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
C18-AA-404C
353
C18-AA-404C, HISTORY OF WESTERN ARCHITECTURE
Unit Test Model Paper
Part A 4x1=4marks
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark
1. Draw a neat sketch of a pylon
2. List the parts of a Pyramid
3. Draw the plan of open air theatre Epidaurus
4. Define an order
Part B 2x3=6marks
Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5a) Describe the religious influence on Egyptian Architecture
or
5b) Describe the influence of River Nile on Egyptian life
6a) Draw the elevation of Parthenon
or
6b) Draw the plan of Parthenon
Part C 2x5=10marks
Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks

7a) Describe the great pyramid of Cheops, Giza
Or
7b) Describe the Egyptian belief in Life after death and how it influenced their
architecture.
8a) Greeks are perfectionists in architecture. Explain the statement
Or
8b)Describe the characteristics of Greek architecture
One mark model Questions

354
1. Draw a neat sketch of a pylon
2. Draw the plan of open air theatre Epidaurus
3. Define an order
4. Define the term Forum
5. List any two types of buildings built by Romans
6. Draw a neat sketch of a tracery window
7. Define the term renaissance
8. Define the term Companile
9. List the parts of a basilican church
10. List the important materials of Industrial revolution.
11. Define a pylon
12. Draw a neat sketch of Doric order
13. Define an order
14. List any two types of buildings built by Romans
15. Draw a neat sketch of Tuscan order
16. Define a Basilica
17. Draw a neat sketch of a pointed arch
18. Define the term Renaissance
19. Define a campanile
20. Define the term industrial revolution.
Three marks model Questions

1. Describe the religious influence on Egyptian Architecture.
2. Draw the Ionic order
3. Draw the Tuscan order.
4. Draw the plan of a basilican church.
5. Draw the elevation of St.Peter’s cathedral Rome
6. Draw the plan of St.Paul’s Cathedral , London
7. Draw a neat sketch of Epidaurus

8. Draw a neat plan of the temple of Khons, Karnak
9. Draw a neat labeled sketch of Composite order
10. Draw a neat sketch of elevation of St.Peter’s cathedral, Rome.
11. Describe any five architectural characters of Renaissance in Florence
12. Describe the influence of industrial revolution on building materials
Five marks model Questions

1. Describe the great pyramid of Cheops, Giza
2. Draw and explain the elevation of Parthenon
3. Draw and describe the plan of Pantheon, Rome
4. Describe with a neat sketch the plan of St.Peter’s cathedral, Rome
5. Describe the architectural character of English Renaissance
6. Describe the effect of industrial revolution on architecture.
7. Draw a neat section through The Pyramid of Cheops and describe it.
355
8. Draw a neat elevation of Parthenon, Athens
9. Draw a neat view of Colosseum, Rome.
10. Describe the architectural character of English renaissance.
11. Draw and describe the plan of St.Paul’s cathedral, London
12. State the influence of industrial revolution on towns.
URBAN PLANNING
Course Title URBAN PLANNING Course Code 18AA-405C

Teaching scheme 3:1:0 Credits 3
in Hrs (L:T:P)
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of planning, economics.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Know the objects of town planning
CO2 : To differentiate between the ancient and modern town planning
Know the various methods of data collectionand its application
CO3:
CO4 : Able to identify various land uses, apply in terms of zoning
CO5 : To plan for development of a small town with knowledge of transportation planning
CO6 : Know the prevailing local byelaws
356
Time Schedule
Unit
Unit Name Hours
No
1 Introduction 3
Ancient Planning &
10
2 town forms
Planned Cities of India 8
3 Surveys 8
4 Zoning 8
Development Plans 6
5
Transportation 8
6 Building Bye-Laws 9
Total 60
Course Contents
Unit1: Introduction
1.1 Meaning of the term town planning.-

1.2 Objects of town planning-
1.3 Necessity of Town Planning-
1.4 Origin of towns – Topographical & Functional aspects
1.5 Forms of Planning – National, Regional, Country & Local planning
1.6 Definition of the terms rural and urban
1.7 Classification of towns based on population
1.8 Present position of town Planning in India & various organizations connected to
planning & execution in Metropolitan cities of India
Unit 2: Ancient Planning and Town Forms
2.1 Town Planning in Ancient India- Aspects of town planning-

2.2 Basic concepts of Vedic Town Planning –
a) Ancient town forms- Eight Vedic Town forms like Dandaka, Padmaka, etc.,
and their Layout plans
2.3 Study of Ancient towns like – Ayodya, Mohanjo-Daro, Pataliputra, Takshasila,
Nalanda..
2.4 Development of towns like Jaipur, Banaras, Mathura
Planned Cities of India
2.5 Modern Town Forms like Grid iron, Circular, Star shape, Radial and Linear- layout
& characteristics
2.6 Study of New Capital towns- Chandigarh, Gandhi Nagar
2.7 Contemporary Planned Cities of India - Lavasa, Gujarat International Finance Tec-
city;Dholera Special Investment Region
357
Unit3: Surveys
3.1 Necessity of Surveys

3.2 Collection of data- functional , social, territorial & vital surveys
3.3 Types of Surveys
3.4 Uses of Surveys
3.5 Methods adopted to collect data
3.6 Drawings and report
Unit4: Zoning
4.1 Meaning of the term Zoning

4.2 Uses of land- profit making &non profit making land uses
4.3 Objects of Zoning
4.4 Aspects of Zoning- Density, Height & Use
Unit5: Development Plans
5.1 Definition of a Development plan.

5.2 Necessity of Development Plan,
5.3 Data to be collected for preparing a development plan,
5.4 Drawings to be prepared for a development plan,
5.5 Stages of Preparing Master Plan,
5.6 Neighbourhood planning-Radburn Layout
5.7 Colours to be used for various landuses in Development Plans &Zonal development
plans
Transportation
5.8 Types of transportation Air, Water, Rail and Road -- Advantages and Disadvantages
5.9 Need of Transportation Planning for cities-
5.10 Classification of urban roads-
5.11 Other types of roads- through and bye pass roads, inner and outer ring roads,
expressways &freeways.
5.12 Types of Street systems
5.13 Rapid Transit System
5.14 Street furniture.
Unit6: Building Byelaws)
6.1 Definition of a byelaw

6.2 Objectives of byelaws
6.3 Functions of a local Authority
6.4 Principles underlying building byelaws
6.5 Bye –laws ; Set back, light plane, Floor Space Index/ Floor Area Ratio, Off-street
Parking
6.6 Definitions as per G.O Ms.No. 168 dt. 7/4/2012 – sanctioning authority, group
housing, high rise building, parking complex/ parking lot.
i. Requirement for approach roads for building sites/plots, table- II ( G.O
Ms.No. 168)
358
ii. Plot sizes & permissible setbacks and height stipulations for non high rise
buildings, for plots upto 1000 sq.m.table-III ( G.O Ms.No. 168)
iii. Parking requirements- Table V ( G.O Ms.No. 168)
6.7 Bye-laws for amenities and facilities in all buildings (requirements for parts of
buildings) as per NBC-2005 – habitable rooms, kitchen, bathrooms and water
closets, other areas, corridors and staircase widths, service ducts, etc
6.8 Rain water Harvesting structures (g.o. Ms. 350 MA, dt. 9/6/2000 (Annexure
1. Introduction
1.1 Understand the term Urban Planning
1.2 To know the essential objects of town planning
1.3 Comprehend the Need of Town Planning.
1.4 To know the contributing forces of origin of towns.
1.5 To know the forms of planning to maintain continuity of planning
1.6 To know the organizations involved in execution of urban plans
2. Ancient Planning & Town Forms
2.1 To know the various aspects of Town Planning
2.2 To know the various component parts and layouts of ancient towns,
2.3 To know the planning of ancient towns.
Planned Cities of India
2.4 To know the modern town forms & their layouts
2.5 To know the growth patterns of towns
3. Surveys
3.1 Know the advantages of a documented survey
3.2 Know the required data to be collected in the process of town planning
3.3 Know the various types of surveys
3.4 Know the methods of conducting surveys
3.5 Document the data collected
4. Zoning
4.1 Know the definition of Zoning
4.2 Know the Uses of land
4.3 Know the objectives of zoning
4.4 Types of zoning such as density zoning, height zoning and use zoning.
5.0 Development Plans

5.1 Definition of Development plans.
5.2 The need of Development Plans
5.3 Data to be collected for preparing a Development plan
5.4 Drawings to be prepared for a development plan
5.5 Stages of Preparing a Development Plan.
5.6 Colours to be used in Development Plans
Transportation
5.7 To know the various modes of transportation
5.8 Need to prepare an integrated transportation plan
5.9 To know the hierarchy of urban roads.
5.10 To differentiate between inner and outer ring roads, etc
5.11 To know the street patterns
359
5.12 Street furniture.
4. Building Bye laws

To know the prevailing local building by- laws
1.1 Definiitions- building, balcony, basement, ,building height, building line,
setback, chajja, carpet area, common areas, floor area, FAR, parking space,
plinth, plot coverage, room height, ventilation,
1.2 Procedural requirements for obtaining building permission for a new building-:
documents required, size of drawing sheets, notation for coloring of plans,
1.3 Details of plans to be submitted

1. Quiz
2.Assignments.
3. Power point presentations on ancient and modern town forms.
4. A report on local bye-laws.
Skill up gradation projects

1. House hold Survey, reconnaissance survey of a small area,
2. Traffic survey of a junction
3. Collect and study the development plans, zonal development plans of the city.
4. A scrap book on street furniture.
Recommended Books
1. Town Planning by –SC.Rangwala,
2. Town and Country Planning and Housing by - NV. Modak&VNAmbdekar
3. Urban & Regional Planning by - KS. Rama Gowda
4. Urban Pattern –Gallion
5. Fundamentals of Town Planning by G.K Hiraskar.
6. Town Planning by A Bandyopadhya
1. www.moud.gov.in/
2. www.uddkar.gov.in
3. https://www.karnatakahousing.com/
4. www.hudco.org
5. www.ksdb.kar.nic.in
6. http://www.uddkar.gov.in
7. http://www.urbantransport.kar.gov.in/
CO /PO mapping
COURSE OUTCOME CL Linked PO C
CO1 Know the objects of town planning U 2,5,6,7
CO2 To differentiate between the ancient and R/U 2,5,6,7
360
modern town planning
CO3 Know the various methods of data R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,8
collectionand its application
CO4 Able to identify various land uses, apply R/U/A 2,8
in terms of zoning
CO5 To plan for development of a small town U/A 2,4,5,6,8
with knowledge of transportation
planning
CO6 Know the prevailing local byelaws U/A 1,2,10
Note: A study tour may be arranged to study a small town ancient/modern.


Basic knowledge
Engineering tools
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
POs
CO1 x x x x 2,5,6,7
CO2 x x x x 2,5,6,7
CO3 x x x x x x 1,2,5,6,7
,8
CO4 x x 2,8
CO5 x x x x x 2,4,5,6,8
CO6 x x x 1,2,10
361
EXAMINATION PATTERN
Total
5 Marks
20 Marks
2/4 2/4
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

Total
5 Marks
40 Marks
4/8 4/8
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
362
C18-AA-405C

C18-AA-405C URBAN PLANNING

Part A 4x1=4marks
1. What is meant by ‘town planning’

2. Name the forms of planning
3. What are the aspects of town planning?
4. Define a metropolitan city
Part B 2x3=6marks

2.Each question carries three marks
5a) Write about the objects of town planning

OR
5b. Define the terms rural and urban.
6a) Write about the main features of an ancient town form.
OR
6b) Write about Chandigarh planning
Part C 2x5=10marks

363
7a) Describe National and Regional planning
OR
State the origins of towns.
8a. sketch and explain an ancient town form

OR
Sketch and explain a modern town form.
C18-AA-405C

C18-AA-405C, URBAN PALANNING

Part A 4x1=4marks
1. Name are the different types of surveys?

2. What is the necessity of a survey?
3. List out the aspects of zoning.
4. What is meant by the term ‘Zoning’
Part B 2x3=6marks

5. a) What are the uses of surveys

OR
c) Write short notes on drawings and report.
6a) Name the different land uses.
OR
364
b) Define gross density and net density.
Part C 2x5=10marks

7a) What is the data collected under functional and vital surveys
OR
b) What is the data collected under social and territorial surveys
8a) Explain the principles of zoning

OR
b) Explain height zoning
C18-AA-405C

C18-AA-405C, URBAN PLANNING

Part A 8x1=8 marks

1.State the topographical features contributing to the origin of towns.

2. Why is regional planning necessary?.
3. List the various modes of transportation
4. What are the uses of surveys?
5. Define a development plan
6. Name any four land uses.
7. List out street furniture.
8. What is an express way?
Part B 4x3=12 marks
365
Instructions: 1.Answer the following questions.
9 a) Sketch an ancient town form and name the parts.

OR
b) Explain the various stages of preparation of a master plan
10. a) Explain the objects of a town plan
OR
b) Sketch and explain inner and outer ring roads
11. a) Differentiate gross density and net density.
OR
b) Sketch Radburn layout.
12. a) Write short notes on railways
OR
b) Write short notes on airways
Part C 4x5=20 marks

13. a) Describe the planning features of Mohenja daro

OR
b) Enumerate the data required for the preparation of a development plan.
14. a) Explain the methods adopted to collect data.
OR
b) What are the ill effects of lack of transport planning in cities.
15. a) Detail out National planning
OR
b) What are the usual drawings to be prepared for a development plan?
16. a) Classify and explain urban roads
OR
b) explain the different types of street systems
366
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION DRAWING
Course Title Building Construction Drawing Course Code 18 AA -406 D

Semester IV Course group core
Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of course Lecture + drawings Total Contact Hours 45
Pre requisites
This course requires flair for building construction aspects and detailing.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Know the components of a building
CO2 : Define the different technical terms of construction
Understand and draw different methods of construction of various building
CO3: components
Apply design component to draw component parts and know the materials used for
CO4 :
construction
CO5 : Draw reinforcement details of RCC elements.
CO6 : Understand the support systems required for building construction
Time Schedule
Classification of buildings 2
1
Foundations & DPC 4
Masonry 6
2
Arches , Lintels and Sunshades 3
3 Doors and Windows 6
Timber Joints 3
4
Roofs 6
Flooring 3
5 Form work and Scaffolding 3
Partitions 367 3
6 Staircases 6
Total 45
Course Contents
Unit 1: Classification of Buildings Duration: 9 hours
1.1 List the components of a building.
1.2 Explain the functions of the components of a building.

1.3 Classify the buildings according to NBC with examples.
Foundations and DPC Duration: 6 hours
1.4 Explain the Investigations required for foundations – Trial Pit; auger boring and
Draws.
1.5 Know the definitions of the terms bearing capacity of soil, safe and
ultimatebearing capacity of soil.
1.6 State the types of loads to be considered in design of foundation.
1.7 Understand rules for a minimum depth, width of foundation andthickness of
concrete bed for spread foundation.
1.8 Know the method of constructing shallow foundation.- Spread footing of columns
Combined footings and raft foundation.
1.9 Deep Foundations: Pile foundation – RCC Bearing piles. Friction Piles, Under
reamed piles.
1.10 Explain the causes and effects of dampness at basement level.
1.11 Know the need of prevention of dampness at basement level.
1.12 Know the methods adopted for prevention of dampness at basement level.
Unit2: Masonry Duration: 6 hours
2.1 Know the definition of the term ‘masonry’

2.2 Know the materials required for stone masonry
2.3 Know Common building stones of India
2.4 Technical terms of stone masonry- course, bond, quoin, through stone
2.5 State the general principles of stone masonry construction
2.6 Draw the different types of stone Masonry.- coursed Rubble, Random
2.7 Rubble - Ashlar masonry.
2.8 State the general principles of brick masonry construction.
2.9 Explain the terms
i. Bond,
ii. Course,
iii. Header and
iv. Stretcher.
2.10 Draw Brick Masonry construction in English and Flemish Bond.
2.11 Know masonry construction with precast concrete solid and hollow blocks,
high quality building blocks.
368
Arches, Lintels & Sunshades Duration: 9 hours
2.12 Define the term ‘arch’ and know the function.

2.13 know the technical terms- span, rise, crown, key stone, voussoirs, intrados,
extrados, center of an arch, springer
2.14 Draw different types of arches- according to shape & number of centers-
classification.
2.15 Define the term ‘lintel’ and know the function.
2.16 Know the materials for lintels- sketch the following lintels- wood, brick,
stone, steel and RCC lintel
2.17 Draw the cross section of an RCC lintel with a chajja
2.18 Sketch and explain the functions of sunshades, canopy, sun breakers and
portico.
Unit3: Doors and windows Duration:6 hours
3.1 State the principles of locating doors, windows and ventilators in a building.
3.2 Draw common and special type of doors, windowsand ventilators.
3.3 Know the uses of different types of doors, windows & ventilators.
3.4 Know the fittings and fastenings of different openings.
Unit 4: Timber Joints Duration: 3hours
4.1 Draw lengthening joints, widening joints, bearing joints, angle joints, oblique
shouldered joints.
Unit4: Roofs Duration: 6 hours
4.2 Know the definition of a ‘roof’ and its function.

4.3 State the classification of roofs.
4.4 Know and draw king post roof truss.( timber)
4.5 Know and draw steel roof truss (angular and tubular)
4.6 Explain and draw RCC roof.
4.7 Explain and draw method of providing W.P.C. at roof level.
4.8 State the common and decorative ceilings used inconstruction work.
4.9 Explain and draw the method of providing common and decorative ceiling.
Unit 5: Flooring Duration: 3 hours
5.1 Know the definition of ‘floor’ and ‘flooring’.

5.2 Know the flooring materials.
5.3 Know the factors affecting the choice of flooring material.
5.4 Know the method of construction of various types of flooring-
5.5 Cementconcrete flooring, stone slab flooring, mosaic flooring and tile floor.
Unit5: Form work & Scaffolding Duration: 3hours
5.6 State the components of ordinary form work for columns, beams and slabs.
5.7 State the standards for form work for RCC.
5.8 Describe and draw shuttering for columns, beams and slabs.
369
5.9 State the purpose of scaffolding and advantages of tubular scaffolding.
5.10 Draw tubular scaffolding and name its various parts.
Unit 5: Partitions Duration: 3 hours
5.11 Draw cubicle partitions made by laminated plywood with wooden beadings.
5.12 Glazed partitions with aluminum frames having laminated plywood or particle
boardsuptodado level.
Unit 6 : Staircases Duration: 6 hours
6.1 State the principles of location of stair case.

6.2 Explain terms: rise, tread, landing, flights, going.
6.3 Describe and draw different types of stair cases.
6.4 Explain and draw plan and sectional elevation of open well stair case showing all
6.5 Reinforcement details.

1. Classification of Building
1.1 Component parts of a building – their function.
1.2 Classification of buildings according to National Building code.
Foundations
1.3 Bearing capacity of soils – Definitions of safe and ultimate bearing capacity.
1.4 Shallow Foundations: Spread footing of columns.
1.5 Combined footings and raft foundation.
1.6 Deep Foundations: Pile foundation – RCC Bearing piles. Friction Piles, Under
reamed
piles.
1.7 Type of Loads to be considered in design of foundation – width of foundation –
thickness of concrete bed.
1.8 Causes and Effects of dampness at basement level and Methods adopted for
prevention of dampness.
2. Masonry
2.1 Definitions for Technical Terms.

2.2 Classification of stone masonry – coursed Rubble, Random Rubble - Ashlar
masonry.
2.3 General principles to be observed while constructing stone masonry
2.4 Brick Masonry – Bonds in Brick Masonry (English Bond and Flemish Bond)
2.5 General principles to be observed in construction of brick masonry.
Arches, Lintels and Sunshades
2.6 Functions of Arches, lintels and sunshades.

2.7 Types of Arches according to shape –Flat, segmental and Semi –Circular.
370
2.8 Types of Arches according to number of Centres – One centred – Two centred.
2.9 Common type of lintels – Reinforced Brick lintel, R.C.C. lintels.
2.10 Sunshade, canopy and sun breakers – lintel cum sunshade.
3. Doors and Windows

3.1 Doors– Parts of door– Positioning.
3.2 Common types of doors - Paneled, Glazed, Flush.
3.3 Special types of doors –revolving doors, collapsible door, rolling shutter, sliding
doors.
3.4 Windows – Parts of window- Glazed (Casement)
3.5 Ventilators – Over doors and windows – Head and fanlight.
3.6 Fittings and Fastenings of doors and windows.
4. Timber Joints
4.1 Widening joints, lengthening joints, Bearing joints, oblique shouldered joints
and their uses.
Roofs
4.2 Definition of a ‘roof’
4.3 Classification of roofs – Pitched and Flat.
4.4 Technical terms in pitched roof-span, rise, pitch, eaves, common rafters, purlins,
cleats, wall plates, battens, boarding.
4.5 Types of pitchedroofs – lean to roof, coupled roof.
4.6 King Post timber roof truss.
4.7 Steel Truss suitable for 8.0m span.
4.8 Flat roof R.C.C. roof – Generate requirements and principle of constructing R.C
slabs.
4.9 Weather proof course on R.C.C. roof.
4.10 Decorative ceilings – method of fixing plaster of Paris, gypsum boards
&fiberglass.
5. Flooring and Floor Finishes

5.1 Parts of flooring – functions – Requirements of good floor.
5.2 Types of flooring adopted for different uses.
5.3 Methods of constructing flooring–C.C flooring, stone (marble, granite) slab
flooring, cement plaster flooring, tiled (ceramic, vitrified) flooring.
Form work and scaffolding
5.4 Component parts of ordinary form work for column beams and slabs.
5.5 Description of shuttering for columns beams and slabs.
5.6 Scaffolding – Types, purpose – Tubular scaffolding.
Partitions
5.7 Partitions made of single brick thick, plywood, gypsum boards, particle boards,
glass blocks, aluminum, glazed.
6. Stairs and staircases
6.1 Location of stairs.
6.2 Types of different stairs – straight stairs – Quarter turn – half turn -Dog legged –
open well, bifurcated –spiral stair case.
371
1. Quiz
2. Seminar
4. Power point presentations on building activities.
5. Assignments - Portfolio of drawings
6. Site visits

1 Visit to an ongoing construction site and submit a detailed hand written report along
withsketches and photographs on any one of following topic:
a) Foundations b) Stone masonry c) Brick masonry d) Doors and windows
2. Prepare a scale down model of any one type of door.
3. Prepare a report on hardware fixtures along with brochures.
4. Construct models of reinforcement for footings, columns, beams and slabs.
Assignments (Drawings)
1 Draw the cross section of a load bearing wall with all building components from
foundation details to parapet and name its parts.
2 Draw the plan and cross section of a load bearing RCC column with foundation
details and name its parts.
3 Draw the following shallow foundations in plan and cross section
i. -Spread footing, combined footing, raft foundation
4 Deep foundations- Pile foundation, bearing piles, Friction piles and under reamed
pile foundations with reinforcement details.
5 Draw the D.P.C. details at plinth level.
6 Draw the plan and elevation of English bond one and half thick brick wall meeting at
corner showing alternate courses.
7 Draw the plan and elevation of single/double Flemish Bond one brick and 11/2
thick brick wall meeting at corner showing alternate courses
8 Draw the elevation and cross section of stone masonry wall of R.R. Masonry,
Coursed Rabble Masonry, Ashlar Masonry,
a. Composite masonry wall in brick and stone
9 Draw the elevations of different types of arches according to their shape -Flat,
segmental – semi circular arch; name the different parts of an arch.
a. b) According to number of centers – One centre and two centre arches.
b. c) Draw an R.C.C. lintel with sunshade projection over a window of 1.5m. or
less span showing reinforcement details.
10 Draw enlarged views of any three different types of joints of each of the following
joints
i) Lengthening joints
ii)Widening joints
iii) Bearing joints
iv)Framing joints
v) Angle or corner joints
vi)Oblique shouldered joints
11 Fastenings used in framing timber work and tools of a carpenter
12 Door frame- detail of a wooden door frame in elevation- sectional plan of a single
and double shuttered door frame
A steel door frame in elevation- sectional detail of the door frame
372
13 Types of doors-Draw the plan and elevation of different types of doors, label the
parts, indicate dimensions.
i) Different types of paneled doors- Framed and paneled door
ii) Panelled and glazed door
iii) Flush doors- solid and hollow core type flush doors
iv) Revolving door
v) sliding door
vi) swing door
vii) collapsible door
viii) Rolling shutter
.
14 Types of windows-Draw the plan and elevation of different types of windows, label
the parts, indicate dimensions
i) Casement window
ii) Sash or glazed window
iii) Metal window
15 a)Draw a pitched roof building and indicate various technical terms

Draw lean to roof and couple closed roof
16 Draw the elevation of king post roof truss and label the parts
Draw details of joints between
2.1 principal rafter and tie beam
2.2 ii) king post and tie beam
2.3 iii) principal rafter and king post.
17 Draw steel truss suitable for 8.0m span
i) Draw details of joints between principal rafter and tie beam
ii) principal rafter and capping
Draw different shapes of structural steel sections, types of riveted connections.
18 Draw plan and sectional elevation of a one way R.C.C. roof slab with full
reinforcement details
19 Draw plan and sectional elevation of a two way R.C.C. roof slab with full
reinforcement details.
20 Draw and show the method of fixing Decorative (false) ceilings – plaster of Paris
boards or gypsum boards.
21 Draw and show the weather proof course details of an R.C.C. roof slab.
22 Draw the cross section of different types of floorings- showing ground level to
finished floor level(plinth) with sand filling , pcc bed and floor finis, label the parts,
indicate dimensions.
i) Marble flooring
ii) Flag stone flooring
iii) Vitrified tile flooring
iv) Cement Concrete flooring
v) Linoleum flooring
23 Draw the Mason’s tubular scaffolding and name its various parts.
24 Draw cubicle partitions made by laminated plywood with wooden beadings, glazed
partitions with aluminum frames having laminated plywood or particle boards upto
dado level.
25 a)Draw the plans and elevations different types of stair cases.
373
b)Draw the plan and sectional elevation of an R.C.C. open well stair case with all
details.
Recommended Books
1. Building construction by - MC Kay-I, II, III & IV Volumes.
2. Building Construction - Berry – Volumes I, II, III and IV
3. Building Construction - S.C. Rangwala
4. Building Construction - N.R.R. Moorthy
5. Building Construction - S.P.Bindra&S.P.Arora.
6. Building construction - Sushilkumar
7. Building construction - S.S. Bhavikatti
8. Building construction and drawing - M.G shah and kale
9. Building construction Illustrated - Francis D K Ching

1. https://evrosoriou.files.wordpress.com/.../construction-handbook-chudle/
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9ROrmRYOwf4/
CO /PO mapping
CO1 Know the components of a building U 1,2
CO2 Define the different technical terms U 1,2

of construction
CO3 Understand and draw different R/U 2,4,6,7,10
methods of construction of various
building components
CO4 Apply design component to draw U/A 1,2,4,5,6,7,10
component parts and know the
materials used for construction
CO5 Draw reinforcement details of RCC R/U/A 2,3,4,5,6,10
elements.
CO6 Understand the support systems U/A 2,4,6,7,10
required for building construction
374
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Engineering tools
Ethics
Communication
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped POs
7
CO1 x x 1,2
CO2 x x 1,2
CO3 x x
EXAMINATION x
PATTERN x x 2,4,6,7,10
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration of Exam: 1-1/2 Hour)
CO4 x Marks/Question
x x 4 Marks
x each x6 Marksxeach 20 Marks x 1,2,4,5,6,7,10
1 UNIT I 1 3(a) or 3(b)
CO5 x2 x
UNIT II x x2 x 4(a) or 4(b) x 2,3,4,5,6,10
Total Questions 2 4
CO6 x MID SEM - II EXAM
x (Duration
x of Exam:x 1-1/2 Hours) x 2,4,6,7,10
2 UNIT IV 2 4(a) or 4(b)
Total Questions 2 4
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (Duration of Exam: 3

Hours)
1 UNIT I 1 5(a) or 5 (b)
2 UNIT II
4 UNIT IV
5 UNIT V 3 375 7(a) or 7(b)
Total Questions 4 8
C18-AA-406D

C18-AA-406D, BUILDING CONSTRUCTION DRAWING
Time : 1-1/2 hours Max.Marks: 20

Part A 2x4=8marks
2.Each question carries FOUR marks
1. Draw a semi circular brick arch and name its parts

2. Draw the cross section of a load bearing wall.
Part B 2x6=12marks

2.Each question carries SIX marks
3.a)Draw plan and cross section of a raft foundation with spacing of columns 3.0m.
center to center.
or
3b. Sketch and explain the methods of prevention of dampness at basement level
4a. Draw elevation of an Ashlar fine masonry wall.
or
4b. Draw the plan and elevation of two consecutive courses of one brick wall in English
bond to a scale of 1:200
376
C18-AA-406D

Time : 1-1/2 hours Max Marks: 20

Part A 2x4=8marks
1. Sketch and name any two bearing joints
2. Draw the frame of a teakwood door and name its parts.
Part B 2x6=12marks

2.Each question carries SIX marks
3a. Draw plan and elevation of a paneled door of 1.2 X 2.1m. to a scale of 1:20 and name
its parts.
Or
3b. Draw any one special type of door in plan and elevation
4a. Draw cross section of a king post roof truss to a scale of 1:50
Or
4b.Draw the reinforcement details of a two way slab 4m. X 6m. in plan and cross
section to a suitable scale
377
C18-AA-406D
STATEBOARD OFTECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING.


Part A 4x4=16 marks

1. Sketch a casement window and label its parts.

2.Draw the cross section of a lintel and sunshade with reinforcement details over a window
of 1.5m. width.
3. Sketch and label the parts of a staircase in an open well staircase.
4. Draw in plan and elevation a cubicle of 2m. X 2.5m with partition walls
Part B 4X6=24 marks

2. Each question carries 6 marks
4. Accuracy and neatness of drawing carries weightage of marks.
5a. Draw an uncoursed random rubble masonry in elevation and cross section to a height
ogf 1.5m. and depth of 50cms. below ground level to a scale of 1:20.
or
5b. Draw different types of pile foundations and name them.
6a. Draw a partly paneled and glazed door of 1m. X 2m. size in plan and elevation to a
scale of 1:20
or
6b. Sketch and explain the method of fixing two differentl types of decorative ceilings.
7a. Draw tubular scaffolding in elevation and name its parts.
or
7b. Sketch and explain the method of laying stone slab floorings.
8a.. Draw adog – legged staircase.1.2m. width,, 3,0m.floor height in plan and sectional
elevation with reinforcement details to a scale of 1:50
Or
8b. Draw an open well staircase.1.2m. width,, 3,0m.floor height in plan and sectional
elevation with reinforcement details to a scale of 1:50.
378
ADVANCED ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Course Title ADVANCED Course Code 18AA-407D

ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Studio Total Contact 45
Hours
Pre requisites
drawing
Course Outcomes
Design of an educational building
CO1 :
Design a health building
CO2 :
Design a recreational building
CO3 :
Draw flow charts of different types of buildings
CO4
Time Schedule
Unit Unit Name Hour
No
1 Educational buildings 15
2 Health buildings 15
3 Recreational buildings 15
Total 45
Course Contents
Unit 1: Educational building Duration: 15 Hours
379
The student has to create a portfolio of any one topic of the following
1. Primary school
2. High school
Unit 2: Health building Duration: 15 Hours
1. Primary health centre
2. Doctor’s clinic
Unit 3: Recreational buildings Duration:15 Hours
1. Community hall
2. Neighborhood recreational club.
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to
1.0 Educationalbuildings
1.1 Designanddraftthecompleteportfolioofprimaryschool,highschoolconsideringorientation,cr
oss-ventilation, andprinciples of aesthetics.
1.2 List out the requirements for the above mentioned problems.
1.3 Develop graphically the schematic linedrawings.
1.4 Detailedworkingdrawingsforplan sectionandelevation.
1.5 Preparesiteplanshowinglocationofbuildingapproachroad/ passage / driveaway / play
areas,etc.,
1.6 Prepare sketch perspective view.
1.7 Applybuildingbye-laws.
2.0 Healthbuildings
2.1 Design primary health center / doctors clinic considering orientation,cross-
ventilationandprinciplesofaesthetics.
2.2 List out the general requirement of the above mentioned problems.
2.4 Detailed working drawings for plan,section and elevation.
2.5 Prepare siteplan showing location of building,approachroad/ passage / drive
away / play areas, etc.,
2.7 Apply buildingbye-laws.
3.0 RECREATIONBUILDINGS
3.1 Design and draft to make complete portfolios for community Halloran eight
380
borhood recreation club, considering orientation, cross - ventilation and
principles ofaesthetics.
3.2 List out the general requirement of the above mentioned problems.
3.4 Detailedworking drawing for plan, section and elevation.
3.5 Prepare site plan showing location of building, approach road/ passage /
drive away / play areas etc.,
3.7 Apply buildingbye-laws.
4. The student should conduct a case study of the similar building
5. Student should analyze the design data based on the case study
6. Student should use Google to conduct a desktop study of buildings designed by
famous architects.
Recommneded Books:
7. Time Saver Standards- building types and design data by Joseph De Chiara
8. |Time Saver Standards for Interior Design
9. Neufert’s Architects data
10. Building drawing by Shaw, Kale and Patki
11. Principles and practice of Interior Design by PratapRao
12. Rendering with pen and Ink by Robert W Gill.
 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Architectural_drawing/
 https://www.bing.com/videos/search?
q=architectural+drawing+of+an+apartment+&&view=detail&mid=8E657A1CAEBB
AFE004AD8E657A1CAEBBAFE004AD&FORM=VRDGAR/
Tracing
CO-PO of theMatrix
Mapping plan 4 marks

hours
CO1 Design a educational R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,1 15

building 0
CO2 Design a health building R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,1 15

0
CO3 Design a recreational R/U/A 1 15
building 2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
CO4 Draw the flow charts of R/U/A 1,4

different types of buildings
CO /PO mapping
381
Engineering tools
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
sustainabilityEnvironment and
workIndividual and team

Ethics
Communication
0
CO1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 1, 2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10 3
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 1, 2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10 3
CO3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 1, 2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10 3
CO4 3 2 1,4
Note: Student should submit minimum two portfolios for internal evaluation.
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration of exam : 2 Hours)
Elevation-04 marks
Total Questions 2 1
MID SEM - II EXAM (Duration of exam :2 Hours)
1 UNIT II 1,2 3 (12 Marks) Plan-08 marks
Elevation-04 marks
Total Questions 2 1

1 UNIT I 1,2 - Plan-10 marks
Elevation-04 marks
2 UNIT II 3,4 - Section - 06 marks
Site plan -04 marks
UNIT III 5 (24 Marks)
Total Questions 4 1
For subjects18 AA- 407P
382
C18-AA-407D

18AA-407D ADVANCED ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Time: 1 ½ hours Total marks:20

Part A
4x2=8 marks
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries FOUR marks.
1. List the functional requirements of a primary health centre
2. State the factors to be taken into consideration in the design of a neighborhood
recreation club
Part B 12 marks
3. Design of a Primary school
Design a primary school to accommodate 200 students with the following
requirements
Site: Site is a rectangle 50mx60m with North on the short side. There is a road of
width 12m on the North side.
 Portico to fit school bus 25sq.m
 Entry lobby 20sq.m
 Principal’s room with attached toilet extra 12sq.m
 Office 30sq.m
 Store 30sq.m
 Classrooms 5 nos 40sq.m each
 Staff room 20sq.m
 Audio visual room 20 sq.m
 Hobby room 20 sq.m
 Computer lab 30sq.m
 Adequate toilets for staff and students. .
a. Floor plan 1:50 08 marks
b. Elevation 1:50 04 marks
383
C18-AA-407D

18AA-407P ADVANCED ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Time: 1 ½ hours Total marks:20

Part A 4x2=8 marks

1. List the functional requirements of a primary school
2. State and describe the importance of principles of aesthetics in design of an elevation.
Part B 12 marks
3. Design of a community hall:
Design a community hall to fit 100 people with the following requirements
 Multipurpose hall with stage 250sq.m
 Manager’s room with attached toilet extra 15sq.m
 Store 30sq.m
 Lobby 15sq.m
 Dressing rooms 2nos 15sq.m
 Adequate toilets for men and women, staircase should be provided as needed.
a) Plan 1:50 8 marks
b) Elevation 1:50 4 marks
384
C18-AA-407D

18AA-407P ADVANCED ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
Time: 6 hours Total marks:40

Part A 4x2=8 marks
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks.
1. Draw the flow chart of a community hall
2. List the functional requirements of a doctor’s clinic
3. State the factors to be taken into consideration in the design of a community hall
4. State and describe the importance of principles of aesthetics in design of an elevation.
Part B 24 marks
Answer the following question
5. Design of a community hall:
Design a community hall to fit 75 people with the following requirements
 Multipurpose hall with stage 150sq.m
 Manager’s room with attached toilet extra 12sq.m
 Store 30sq.m
 Lobby 15sq.m
 Dressing rooms 2nos 15sq.m
 Adequate toilets for men and women, staircase should be provided as needed.
385
a) Plan 1:100 10 marks
b) Front elevation 1:100 4marks
c) Section 1:100 6 marks
d) Site plan 1:200 4 marks
SURVEYING LAB PRACTICE
Course Title: Surveying Lab Practice Course Code : 18AA-408P
Semester: IV Course Group : Core

Teaching Scheme in 7.5:0:37.5 Credits : 1.5
Hrs(L:T:P):
Type of Course Lecture+Practical Total Contact Hours : 45Periods
:
CIE 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
:
Pre-requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Trigonometry and basics of map study
Time Schedule
Unit Unit Name Periods

No
1 Basic operations of Chain Surveying 9

2 Chain Triangulation and areas 18
3 Introduction to Compass Surveying 6
4 Traversing using compass 12
Total 45
Course Outcomes
386
CO1 : Apply standard practices to perform different operations of Chain Surveying in the
field
CO2 : Plot the traverse and Calculate the areas of the given irregular boundary by
different methods of chain surveying
CO3 : Apply principles and practices of Compass Surveying to perform Traversing in the
field
CO4 : Perform and plot the closed traversing using compass and adjust for errors by using
Bowditch rule
CourseContent
UNIT 1: Basic Operations of Chain Surveying Duration: 9
Periods
1.1 Practice unfolding and folding of a chain.
1.2 Ranging and chaining of lines on level ground and recording in field book to
measure the distance between two stations.
1.3 Chaining a line involving indirect ranging.
1.4 Setting and measuring the offsets-Perpendicular and Oblique offsets
UNIT 2:Chain Triangulation and areas Duration:18 Periods
2.1 Measurement of land areas -cross staff survey
2.2 Chain triangulation around the building covering a small area
with other details taking offsets and recording.
UNIT 3: Introduction to Compass Surveying Duration: 6 Periods
3.1 Setting up the compass - observations of bearings
3.2 Calculation of included angles from the observed bearings
UNIT 4: Traversing using Compass Duration: 12 Periods
387
4.1 Traversing with prismatic compass and chain - Open Traverse.
4.2 Traversing with prismatic compass and chain- Closed traverse.
4.3 Plotting the closed traverse from field data & adjust for closing error-
Bowditch rule.
4.4 Determination of area bounded by the given points by the method of
Radiation
4.5 Determination of the distance between two accessible points involving single
setting of the instrument.
1.0 Perform basic operations of chain survey in the field
1.1 Practice unfolding and folding a chain.
1.2 Perform direct ranging on level ground and measure the distance between two
given stations and record the measurements in the field book
1.3 Perform indirect ranging and measure the distance between two given stations
when a high ground intervenes to prevent intervisibility of ends of line.
1.4 Set out a right angle to a given chain line by using chain only.
1.5 Set and measure offsets for a given chain line by 1. Perpendicular offsets
2.Oblique offsets.
2.0 Perform Triangulation Survey and calculate the areas after overcoming
obstacles
2.1 Perform triangulation survey of a given area with chain and cross staff and
record all necessary nearby details.
2.2 Calculate the area bounded by the given points by chain triangulation
2.3 Carry out chain survey to overcome obstacles like pond, building.
3.0 Identify the parts and calculate the included angle at a station
3.1 Identify the parts of a prismatic Compass
3.2 Set up the compass at a station and carry out temporary adjustments.
3.3 Take bearings of two points from instrument station and calculate the
included angle.
4.0 Perform Compass survey in a field

4.1 Perform an open compass survey with Compass and Chain.
388
4.2 Perform a closed traverse with compass and chain.
4.3 Calculate the included angles of a closed traverse.
4.4 Plot the closed traverse from field data and adjust for closing error by
Bowditch rule.

1.Conduct Chain Triangulation survey around the main building of the institute
2. Compute the area of the given ground by compass survey and plot it
3.Conduct a survey camp to familiarize with practical procedures of Chain and
compass survey
Recommended Books
1. Surveying - N.N.Basak - Tata McGraw Hill
2. Surveying Vol-I - S.K.Duggal -McGraw Hill Edn (India) Pvt Ltd
3. Surveying and LevellingVol -1 -Kulkarni and Kanetkar
4. Surveying and Levelling Vol. - 1 - B.C. Punmia
5. Surveying and Levelling -Vol -1 -R.Agor- Khanna Publishers
Course Outcomes CL Linked PO Hrs
CO1 Apply standard practices to R/U/A 1,2,3,4,7,8,9 09

perform different operations of
Chain Surveying in the field
CO2 Plot the traverse and Calculate the R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9 18

areas of the given irregular
boundary by different methods of
chain surveying
CO3 Apply principles and practices of R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8 06

Compass Surveying to perform
Traversing in the field
CO4 Perform and plot the closed R/U/A 2,3,4,8,9 12

traversing using compass and
adjust for errors by using Bowditch
rule
389
CAD LAB PRACTICE
Course Title CAD LAB PRACTICE Course Code 18AA-409P
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Practical Total Contact 45
Hours
Pre requisites
basic drawing
Questions to be set
Unit
Unit Name Hour for SEE Assessment procedure
No
Theory Practical
AutoCAD 9 5. Theory questions on
1
Commands commands used carry
Architectural 12 one mark each –
2 portfolio of Single 10 1 10marks
floor building 6. Actual drawing in a
Architectural 12 printout is evaluated
3 portfolio of duplex for quality of
house presentation- 20
Architectural 12 marks
4 portfolio of double 7. Viva to assess the
storied building correct use of
Total 45 10 1 commands while
executing the
drawing- 10 marks
8. Internal assessment is
based on the portfolio
of works to be
submitted at the end
390
of the semester.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Use advanced AutoCAD commands to execute complex drawings

CO2 : Draw an architectural portfolio of single floor building
CO3 : Draw an architectural portfolio of a duplex building
CO4 Draw an architectural portfolio of a double storied building.
Course Contents
The student has to prepare the prescribed portfolis using the following course content
and the III semester knowledge of AutoCAD
Unit 1: Model space, view ports, paper space, layouts
Use model space and paper space, layouts, concept of tiled view ports, creation of tiled view
ports, making a view port current, joining of two adjacent ports, creating floating view port,
rectangular view port, polygonal viewport, editing of view ports.
Plot drawings using plot dialogue box, add plotters, use plot styles
Hatch patterns and boundaries, hatch tool, panels in hatch creation tab, creating of annotative
hatch, hatching around text, dimensions and attributes
Use blocks, insertion of blocks, create and insert annotative blocks, blocks in tool palettes,
creating drawing files using write block dialog box
Use layer in AutoCAD, creation of layers, setting up properties of layers, Editing of layers
using layer dialog box
Unit 2: Single storied building
Unit 3: Duplex building
Unit4: Double storied building
Competencies
1.0 Model space, view ports, paper space, layouts
1.1 Explain the concept of model space and paper space/layouts
1.2 Explain the concept of tiled view ports
1.3 Create tiled view ports
1.4 Make a view port current
1.5 Join two adjacent viewports
1.6 Create floating view port, rectangular view port, polygonalviewport
391
1.7 Edit viewports
1.8 Plot drawings using plot dialog box
1.9 Add plotters
1.10 Use plot styles
1.11 Hatch patterns and boundaries
1.12 Hatch tool
1.13 Panels in hatch creation tab
1.14 Create annotative hatch
1.15 Hatching around text, dimensions and attributes
1.16 Insert blocks
1.17 Create and insert annotative blocks
1.18 Add blocks in tool palettes
1.19 Create drawing files using write block dialog box
1.20 Explain the concept of blocks
1.21 Describe the concept of layers
1.22 Describe creation of layers,
1.23 Describe setting up properties of layers,
1.24 Editing of layers using layer dialog box
2.0 Single storied building

2.1 Plans, elevations and sections of kitchens, bathrooms, staircases, lifts, etc
3.0 Duplex building

4.0 Double storied building.
Note: The portfolio print out should have the following

1. A title block specific to the project
2. A Schedule of openings
3. Drawings in an organized manner inside the sheet layout
4. Floor plans
5. Elevations
6. Sections
7. Site plan
8. Perspective view.
1. Refer to AutoCAD Design centre for advanced drawings
2. Use the resources of AutoDesk website for advanced drawings
3. Use AutoCAD 360
4. Attend AutoDesk Webinars.
Recommneded Books
5. Inside AutoCAD, Parker, Daniel, Rice, Habert1. AutoCAD Reference Guide:
Everything You Wanted to Know about AutoCAD--Fast! By Dorothy Kent
392

hours
CO1 Use advanced AutoCAD R/U 2,3,4,8,9,10 9

commands to execute complex
drawings
CO2 Draw an architectural portfolio R/U/A 2,3,4,5,8,9,10 12
of single floor building
of a duplex building

of a double storied building.
CO /PO mapping
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Engineering tools

Communication
Ethics
CO1 x x x x x x 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO2 x x x x x x x 2,3,4,5,8,9,10
CO3 x x x x x x x 2,3,4,5,8,9,10
CO4 x x x x x x x 2,3,4,5,8,9,10
393
Note: A lab manual with requisite drawings has to be prepared and used as a guide for
students in the lab. The question papers should be set from the manual only.

C18 AA 409P, CAD LAB PRACTICE
1. Draw the following figures in AutoCAD and take a print out
394


395
1. Draw the following figures in AutoCAD and take a print out

396
Time:3hours Max marks:40
Part A 1x10=10marks
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries 2 marks
1. What is a viewport?
2. State how you will set up a printer for AutoCAD printing
3. Define layer
4. Define Annotative hatch
5. Define a block
6. State how you will set up a title block for a drawing
7. State the importance of design centre
8. Explain the concept of annotative text
9. Describe the process of hatch in a drawing
10. State the sheet organization in a AutoCAD drawing.
Part B 20marks
11. Draw the following figure in AutoCAD and take a printout on A4 sheet.
(Note: A set of experiments should be given from the lab manual with each student
preparing a different drawing)
Part C 10marks
12. Viva Voce
397
398
Advanced Communication Skills and Life Skills
Course Title Advanced Communication Skills and Course Code 18 Common 410 P
Life Skills
Semester IV Course Group Foundation
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Scheme in
Periods- L:T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods

Hours (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart writing skills and employability skills to the students
of diploma which will help them in obtaining and maintaining the employment.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar and four language
learning skills, viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
Modules At the end of the course the students will have the
ability to:
Prepare a presentation.
Use presentation aids effectively.
Presentation Skills Develop public speaking skills.
Learn to make PowerPoint Presentations
effectively.
Present a Paper using appropriate body language.
Learn kinds of reports.

Learn the format of a report.
Writing Reports Organise ideas.
Develop essential vocabulary useful to write
scientific and technical reports.
Learn the techniques to face an interview.

399
Learn the etiquette to communicate with
Interview Skills employers.
Learn the dos and don’ts of an interview.
Learn the frequently asked questions in interviews.
Use appropriate body language.
Learn to face interviews telephonically.
Gain the confidence to face an interview by
attending mock interview.
Learn the dos and don’ts of a Group Discussion.

Participate in a Group Discussion in a healthy
manner.
Group Discussion Use effective non-verbal communication.
Use appropriate phrases and expressions useful in a
group discussion.
Learn workplace etiquette.

Identify the knowledge, skills and attributes useful
at workplace.
Workplace Awareness Build strong workplace relationships.
Learn professional ethics.
Understand gender equality at the workplace
Develop a sense of responsibility towards the
society.
Learn various writing formats useful at workplace.

Develop an ability to apply technical information in
documentation.
Revise and edit written documents effectively.
Develop corresponding skills - learn the kinds of
Writing Skills Useful at Workplace business letters - the format of a business letter.
Learn effective e-mail writing skills.
Learn Business Memos.
Learn Notes and Narratives.
Learn Forms and Applications.
Prepare templates for different purposes.
Prepare an agenda of a meeting.
Prepare the minutes of a meeting.
Prepare Notices / Circulars for various purposes.
Prepare Press release.
CO-PO Matrix
Course Outcome Linked PO
CO 1 Making effective presentations R/U/A 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 2 Writing scientific and technical reports R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
400
CO 3 Learn to face oral and telephonic interviews R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 7,9,
CO 4 Learn to face group discussion R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9
CO 5 Learn to write various formats useful at R/U/A 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10
workplace
CO6 Learn workplace etiquette and ethics R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
Course Contents:
VII. Presentation Skills

Duration: 6 periods
VIII. Writing Reports
Duration: 9 periods
IX. Interview Skills Duration:
9 periods
X. Group Discussion Duration:
6 periods
XI. Workplace Awareness Duration:
6 periods
XII. Writing Skills Useful at Workplace
Duration: 9 periods
1. Paper Presentations
2. Seminars
3. Mock Interviews
4. Telephonic Interviews
6. Role Plays
7. Creating advertisements
8. Five-minute activities
9. Creating a model of workplace
Evaluation Pattern:
III.Continuous Internal Examination: 60

Marks
401
d. Mid Sem - I 20 marks
Syllabus:
i. Presentation Skills
ii. Writing Reports
e. Mid – II: 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Interview Skills
ii. Group Discussion
f. Internal assessment: 20 marks
iii. Seminars: 10 marks

iv. Assignments: 5 marks
v. Lab record submission: 5 marks
IV. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks
a. Write an essay on a given topic or participate in an activity: 15 Marks

b. Interview or Group Discussion: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce 10 marks
References:
Adair, John. Effective Communication. London: Pan Macmillan Ltd., 2003.
Ajmani, J. C. Good English: Getting it Right. New Delhi: Rupa Publications,
2012.
Amos, Julie-Ann. Handling Tough Job Interviews. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing,
2004.
Collins, Patrick. Speak with Power and Confidence. New York: Sterling, 2009.
Fensterheim, Herbert and Jean Baer. Don't Say Yes When You Want To Say No.
New York: D
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles
and Practice. Second Edition. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011
E-Learning Resources:
402
http://www.dailywritingtips.com/
http://www.englishdaily626.com/c-errors.php
http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~cainproj/
http://www.thehumorsource.com/
http://www.indiabix.com/group-discussion/topics-with-answers/
http://networketiquette.net/
https://public.wsu.edu/~brians/errors
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/15

FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.
1. Write the guidelines for preparing a PowerPoint presentation.

2. How do you prepare yourself for presenting a technical paper?
3. Mention a few presentation aids and how do you use them effectively?
Part – B 10 marks
4. Write the format of a report and describe it.

5. Write a report on the accident you have seen recently.
6. Give the outline of a project report and describe it.
403
FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
1. What are the dos and don’ts for a formal interview?

2. What at least ten frequently asked questions in a formal interview?
3. How do you prepare for a telephonic interview?
Part – B 10 marks
4. What are the dos and don’ts of a group discussion?

5. Mention some phrases and expressions commonly used in a group
discussion.
6. Write a short paragraph on the steps you take while participating in a
group discussion.
404
FOURTH SEMESTER 18 COMMON-410P
SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Pick any one question from the given lot.

1. Prepare the outline of a project report and describe it.
2. Write the guidelines for preparing the slides of a PowerPoint presentation.
3. Write the minutes of the meeting conducted at the Principal’s chamber to
conduct the annual day celebrations. Prepare the agenda of the annual day
celebrations.
4. Describe the workplace etiquette.
5. Prepare a press note for the ‘Job Mela’ which is going to be conducted at
your institute.
Part – B 15 marks
6. Interview / Group Discussion

Part – C 15 marks
7. Viva Voce
405
Skill Upgradation
20. Market survey
21. Material survey
22. Data collection
23. Site visits
27. Seminars
28. Presentations
30. Slip tests
31. Surprise tests
32. Time Problems
33. Desktop surveys
34. Model making
35. 3D Renderings
36. Walk through
Extra Curricular:
7. Debates
8. Elocution
9. Recitation
10. Dumb Charades
Skill Upgradation
2. Market survey
3. Material survey
4. Data collection
5. Site visits
9. Seminars
10. Presentations
406
12. Slip tests
13. Surprise tests
14. Time Problems
15. Desktop surveys
16. Model making
17. 3D Renderings
18. Walk through
Extra Curricular:
2. Debates
3. Elocution
4. Recitation
5. Dumb Charades
*****************
407
FIFTH SEMESTER
periods Period s Evaluation Examination Marks ma
per s per (Int
S. SUBJECT +En
SUBJECT NAME week semes
NO. CODE Exa
L T P ter Mid Mid Sesion Max Min
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 REINFORCED 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100
18 AA-
CONCRETE
501 C
STRUCTURES
2 18 AA- ENTREPRENEURSHIP 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100

502 C AND PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
3 18 AA- BUILDING SERVICES 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100
503 C
4 18 AA- INTERNATIONAL 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100
504 ARCHITECTS
DRAWING SUBJECTS
5 18 AA- INTERIOR DESIGN 1 0 3 60 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100
505D
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
6 18 AA- DESIGN PRACTICE 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100

506 P LAB
7 18 AA- ADVANCED CAD LAB 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100

507 P PRACTICE
8 18 AA- WORKING 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100
508 P DRAWINGS LAB 0
PRACTICE
9 18 AA- PROGRAMMING IN C 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100
10 18 AA- 0 6 90 4.5 Semin Semin 20 40 20 100

510 P PROJECT WORK 0 ar1 ar2
(20) (20)
TOTAL 17 8 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 180 1000 3
Department of Technical Education
408
State Board of Technical Education &Training (TS)
Course Title: Reinforced Concrete Structures Course Code : 18AA-501C
(Common with Civil)
Semester: V Semester Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme inPeriods(L:T:P): 45:15:0 Credits : 3
Methodology : Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Building materials and Construction practice, Engineering
Mechanics and Strength of Materials
Course Outcomes
Upon the completion of the course, the student shall be able to
CO1 Illustrate the basic concepts of RCC design by limit state, identify grades of concrete and
steel and calculate the loads acting on the structure
CO2 Analyse and Design a rectangular beam
CO3 Design a slab considering boundary conditions
CO4 Calculate strength of a flanged section as per code
CO5 Calculate the design moments and forces in continuous beams and slabs as per codal
provisions and show the reinforcement details as per SP-34
CO6 Design a short column and footing according to codal provisions

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
No
R U A
1 Introduction to R.C.C
and Philosophy of Limit 08
State design Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Analysis and Design of 12
Rectangular Beams
3 Design of Slabs 12
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Analysis of T-beams 8
5 Principles of design of
8 Q9(b), Q14(b),
Continuous beams, Slabs Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
and stairs Q3
6 Design of columns and 12 Q10(b), Q13(b),
Q7,Q8
footings Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
409
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to R.C.C and Philosophy of Limit State design

Duration: 08Periods(L: 6– T:2).
1.1 Introduction to R.C.C

1.2 Codes of practice of R.C.C design
1.3 Nominal Mix – Design Mix – differences.
1.4 Loads to be adopted in R.C.C. design.
1.5 Properties of Concrete
1.6 Methods of designing R.CElements
1.7 Strength and serviceability limit states, characteristic strength of materials and
characteristic loads and partial safety factors.
1.8 Design strength of materials and design loads.
1.9 Assumptions made in the limit state design.
1.10 Stress-strain diagram of singly reinforced RCC beam.
UNIT 2: Analysis and design of Rectangular beams Duration: 12Periods(L:9 – T:3)

2.1 Depth of neutral axis, lever arm.
2.2 Moment of resistance of singly reinforced Rectangular section
2.3 Critical percentage of steel.
2.4 Calculation of moment of resistance of the given section and design of singly
reinforced rectangular beam for the given load as per IS 456-2000.
2.5 Doubly reinforced sections - necessity, use.
2.6 Calculation of neutral axis and moment of resistance for the given section and
grades of concrete and steel.
2.7 Shear in singly reinforced beams
2.8 Methods of providing shear reinforcement-vertical stirrups - combination of vertical
stirrups and bent up bars.
2.9 Code provisions for spacing of stirrups and minimum shear reinforcement (no
derivation of equations).
2.10 Development of bond stress in reinforcing bars.
410
2.11 Design bond stress - development length – bond and anchorage concepts and their
importance.
2.12 Curtailment of tension reinforcement-codal provisions.
2.13 Simple problems on development length.
2.14 Design of simply supported singly reinforced rectangular beam for flexure including
shear and check for deflection using stiffness criteria - Use of design aids (SP-16).
UNIT 3: Design of slabs Duration: 12Periods(L:9.0 – T:3.0)

3.1 Slabs as structural and functional members
3.2 One way and two way slabs
3.3 Minimum reinforcement and maximum spacing of reinforcement – concrete cover
-stiffness criterion- stiffness ratios for simply supported, cantilever and continuous
slabs.
3.4 One way and two way slabs with various end conditions as per I.S:456 code.
3.5 Design of one-way slab for flexure and shear for the given grades of concrete, steel,
span and loading.
3.6 Check for deflection using simplified approach of stiffness criteria.
3.7 Design of two-way slabs with different end conditions,
3.8 Design of torsion reinforcement for the restrained slabs – Deflection check using
stiffness criteria - Use of design aids (SP-16).
UNIT 4:Analysis of T-beam Duration: 08Periods(L:6.0 – T:2.0)

4.1 Conditions needed for design of a beam as T-Section–advantages Code provisions
for effective flange width - three cases of tee beams.
4.2 Neutral axis, lever arm and moment of resistance for under reinforced, balanced
sections using the equations given in the code (no derivations).
4.3 Calculation of the moment of resistance of T- section using the equations given in
the code – Use of design aids(SP16).
UNIT 5:Principles of design of Continuous beams, Slabs and stairs

Duration: 08Periods(L:6.0– T:2.0)
5.1 Behavior of continuous members and advantages of continuous beams and slabs.
411
5.2 Determination of B.M and S.F of continuous beams and slabs of minimum three
spans using BM & SF coefficients given in the code-Use of design aids(SP-16).
5.3 Detailing of reinforcement in a continuous beam of three spans.
5.4 Classify the stairs based on the structural behavior or support condition.
5.5 Detailing of reinforcement in stairs spanning longitudinally.
UNIT 6: Design of columns and footingsDuration: 12Periods(L:9.0 – T:3.0)

6.1 Definition of column – Difference between Column and Pedestal.
6.2 Types of columns (Long and Short) - effective length for different end conditions.
6.3 Code provisions for design of columns- square, rectangular and circular columns
with lateral ties and helical reinforcement
6.4 Determination of Load carrying capacity of short column- square, rectangular,
circular, helically reinforced column subjected to axial load only.
6.5 Design of short square, rectangular columns
6.6 Design of circular columns using helical reinforcement and lateral ties
6.7 Footings - Need for footings
6.8 Footings under isolated columns – loads on footings
6.9 Code provisions for design of footings - size of footings for given bearing capacity
6.10 Procedure of checking the footing for one-way shear, two-way shear, bearing stress
and for development length.
6.11 Design of an isolated square footing of uniform thickness under a
square/rectangular/circular column for flexure only.
Recommended Books
1. I.S:456- 2000
2. I.S:875-1987
3. “Concrete Technology” by A.R.Santhakumar, Oxford university press
4. “Properties of Concrete” by A.M. Neville, Pearson Education
5. “CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY Theory and practice” by M.S ShettyS. Chand & Co. Ltd., New
Delhi
6. “Reinforced Concrete Design” by S UnnikrishnaPillai&DevdasMenonTata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi
7. “REINFORCED CONCRETE Mechanics and Design” by James G. MacGregor and James K.
Wight, Pearson Prentice hall
412
8. “Design of Concrete Structures” by Arthur H. Nilson, David Brown and Charles W.
Dolan, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi
9. “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete” by P.C. VarghesePrentice-Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi
10. Limit State Design of R.C.C Structures by Ashok K. JainNemchand brothers, Roorkee.
11. Structural Engineering(RCC) by Ramamrutham.
12. Structural Engineering (RCC) by Vazirani and Ratwani.
13. Reinforced Concrete Structures by I.C.Syal and A.K.Goyal
14. Structural Design & Drawing by N. Krishna Raju, Universities press
15. Reinforced Concrete Design by S.N. SinhaTata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New
Delhi
16. SP:34 - Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Grv09rIAPQM
3. https://freevideolectures.com/Course/2686/Design-of-Reinforced-Concrete-Structures
After completion of the course, the student shall be able to
1.1 Differentiate Plain Cement Concrete and Reinforced Cement Concrete.

1.2 State the necessity of reinforcement in plain concrete
1.3 State the advantages and disadvantages of R.C.C.
1.4 Identify the material used in R.C.C. and their function in R.C.C.
1.5 State the different codes used
1.6 List the Loads to be considered in the design of R.C. elements.
1.7 State the different methods of designing R.C. elements.
1.8 State the different grades of concrete
1.9 Differentiate the nominal mix concrete and design mix concrete.
1.10 State the equations of tensile strength and modulus of elasticity of concrete as per
IS 456 – 2000.
1.11 Calculate the properties of concrete: Poisson’s ratio, creep, shrinkage, workability
and unit weight, Compressive Strength/Grade of Concrete, Tensile Strength
413
1.12 State the different types of steel as per IS 456 – 2000.
1.13 State the modulus of elasticity and unit weight of steel.
1.14 Define Limit State and State different limit states.
1.15 Distinguish ‘strength’ and ‘serviceability’ limit states
1.16 State the different IS: 456 – 2000 code provisions for Limit state method of design.
1.17 Define the ‘characteristic strength’ of materials and ‘characteristic loads’
1.18 Explain the role of partial safety factors in limit state design.
1.19 Define ‘Design strength of materials’ and ‘Design loads’
1.20 State the assumptions made in the limit state design.
1.21 Draw the Stress diagram, strain diagram for a singly reinforced rectangular beam
indicating appropriate stress and strain values in compression zone and tension
zone of the beam,
1.22 Calculate the depth of rectangular and parabolic stress blocks.
2.1 Calculate the total compressive force and total tensile force resisted by the singly
reinforced rectangular beam.
2.2 Calculate the depth of neutral axis from the equilibrium condition
2.3 Define lever arm and write the equation for lever arm for a singly reinforced
rectangular beam.
2.4 Define critical or balanced section, under reinforced section and over reinforced
section.
2.5 Explain - why the over reinforced sections are not recommended?
2.6 Calculate the maximum depth of neutral axis, limiting value of moment of resistance
with respect to concrete and steel and limiting percentage of steel.
2.7 State the general design requirements for beams in limit state design as per IS 456 –
2000(Effective span, limiting stiffness, minimum tension reinforcement, maximum
tension reinforcement, maximum compression reinforcement, spacing of main bars,
Cover to reinforcement, side face reinforcement.)
2.8 Calculate the depth of neutral axis for a given section and decides the section is
balanced or under reinforced or over reinforced and accordingly calculates the
moment of resistance for the respective case.
2.9 Calculate the area of steel for a given beam with given cross section and loading.
2.10 Explain the effect of shear on beam.
414
2.11 Explain the shear stress distribution across a homogeneous section and reinforced
concrete section with sketches.
2.12 Calculate the design shear strength and maximum shear stress in different grades of
concrete as per IS 456 – 2000.
2.13 State the necessity of shear reinforcement and different forms of shear
reinforcement provided in beams
2.14 Show the critical section for shear.
2.15 Calculate the shear strength of concrete, shear resistance of vertical stirrups, shear
resistance of bent up bars as per IS 456 – 2000.
2.16 Calculate the minimum shear reinforcement and maximum spacing of shear
reinforcement as per IS 456 – 2000.
2.17 Calculate the nominal shear stress, shear resisted by bent up bars and spacing of
vertical stirrups.
2.18 Design the shear reinforcement for beams.
2.19 State the situations which require doubly reinforced beams.
2.20 Determine the moment of resistance for a given doubly reinforced section (given
d’/d – fsc values)
2.21 Calculate the allowable working load on singly reinforced and doubly reinforced
beam for the given span.
2.22 Calculate the development length of bars in compression, tension,
2.23 Sketch the detailing of reinforcement as per SP-34 showing the curtailment position
for main tension bars. State the importance of anchorage values of reinforcement.
2.24 Design a singly reinforced simply supported rectangular beams for the given grades
of materials, span and loading, for flexure including shear design with the
curtailment of reinforcements and check for the deflection using simplified
approach of the code.
3.1 Distinguish oneway slabs and twoway slabs.

3.2 List the types of slabs based on support condition.
3.3 State the general design requirements of slabs as per IS 456 – 2000.
3.4 State the functions of distribution steel in slabs.
3.5 Sketch the general reinforcement details for a a) oneway slab simply supported on
two parallel sides and b) oneway slab simply supported on four sides. c) two way
415
simply supported slab d) one-way continuous slab, e) cantilever slab continuous
over a support and f) slab cantilevering from the top of a beam.
3.6 Mark the edge strip and middle strip of a twoway slab.
3.7 Sketch the general reinforcement details for a continuous two way slab for its edge
strip and middle strip using straight bars and bent up bars.
3.8 Design one-way slab for given grades of materials, loads and span for flexure and
including shear check, check for deflection using stiffness criteria.
3.9 Sketch Load distribution in two-way slabs. Design two-way slab with different end
conditions for flexure including shear using B.M and S.F coefficients. Provide
torsional reinforcement in the restrained slabs. Check the deflection using simplified
approach of stiffness criteria.
4.1 Distinguish a T- beam and L- beam.

4.2 List the advantages of a T- beam.
4.3 State the formula for effective width of flange of a T- beam and L- beam as per IS
456 – 2000.
4.4 Calculate the effective width of flange of an isolated T- beam as per IS 456 – 2000.
4.5 Describe the three cases of determining Neutral axis of T-beams with sketches and
notations.
4.6 Calculate the depth of neutral axis and moment of resistance of the given Tee
section using the expressions given in the code.
4.7 Calculate the minimum and maximum reinforcement in T- beams as per 456 – 2000.
5.1 Explain the behavior of continuous slabs and beams subjected to loading.
5.2 List the advantages of continuous beams or slabs.
5.3 Draw the line diagram of a continuous slab or beam and indicate the bending
moment and shear force values at salient points as per IS 456 – 2000.
5.4 Show the position of sagging (+ve) and hogging (-ve) bending moments along the
continuous beam or slab.
5.5 Sketch the general reinforcement details for a continuous beam or slab.
5.6 Calculates the B.M and S.F of continuous beams and slabs (Minimum of three spans)
at critical sections using B.M and S.F coefficients given in the code.
5.7 Classify the stairs based on the structural behavior or support condition.
416
5.8 Sketch the detailing of reinforcement in stairs spanning longitudinally (Dog legged
staircase).
6.1 Define a column/ compression member

6.2 Differentiate column, strut, pedestal, post
6.3 State the necessity of providing reinforcement in column.
6.4 Explain the behavior of column under loading
6.5 Define and calculate the effective length of column for different end conditions as
per theory and as per code.
6.6 Classify the columns based on type of reinforcement, loading and slenderness ratio.
6.7 Calculate the slenderness limits for column to avoid buckling of column.
6.8 Calculate minimum eccentricity of column.
6.9 Calculate the load carrying capacity of a short column with lateral ties and with
helical reinforcement as per IS 456 – 2000.
6.10 Differentiate between short and long columns and understand their failure
behavior.
6.11 State the design requirements of columns as per IS 456 – 2000.
6.12 Designs a Short Square, rectangular, circular column with lateral ties and helical
reinforcement (subjected to axial load only).
6.13 Define Footing and States different types of Footings (Square/ Rectangular Isolated
footings of Uniform/Tapered sections).
6.14 Calculate the minimum depth of foundation using Rankine’s formula.
6.15 State the code provisions for the design of R.C.C footings.
6.16 Explain the procedure of checking the footing for one-way shear, two-way shear,
bearing stress and for development length.
6.17 Design of an isolated square footing of uniform thickness under a
rectangular/square/circular column for flexure only.
Note: Students may be encouraged to use design aid SP-16, SP-34 and SP-23 for design of slabs,
beams for general practice. I.S.456 – 2000 is allowed in the Examination

1. Visit to nearby multi-storeyed building/Apartment etc and collect the structural details.
2. Design the structural elements-Beams, slabs and columns for residential building (One and
Two story building).
417
3. Prepare a case study of failure of structures due to wrong design, use of poor quality of
materials and faulty construction methods.
4. Understand the concept of formwork for different types of buildings and collect information
about stripping times for forms for different conditions.
5. Collect the IS codes related to Design of RCC structures, make a report and present it
6. Tech fest/Srujana
7. Paper/Poster presentation
8. Quiz
9. Group discussion
10. Surprise Test

Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge
Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
CO1 1 3 3 2 1 2 1,2,4,7,10
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1,2,5,7,9,10
CO3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1,2,5,7,9,10
CO4 3 1 2 2,7,10
CO5 3 2 1 3 2,4,7,10
CO6 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 1,2,4,5,7,9,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Slip Test 2 418
3 and 4 5
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
419

Questions each
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

Questions each
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
420
DAA V semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Corse Code:18AA-501C Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Reinforced Concrete Structures Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries onemark4x1 = 4 Marks
1. Define design strength of material and deign load.

2. Find modulus of elasticity of concrete as per IS 456-2000 for M30 concrete.
3. List various forms of shear reinforcement in beams.
4. Define development length.
PART-B
5(a) Explain how the maximum strength of concrete in outermost fiber of compression istaken as
0.446fck.
(OR)
5 (b) Explain limit state of collapse and serviceability conditions.
6(a)Find the limiting moment of resistance of a singly reinforced beam of size 200 x400mm, use M20
grade concrete and Fe415 steel, effective cover toreinforcement is 25mm.
(OR)
6 (b)Calculate the spacing of two legged 8mm stirrups as per min. shear reinforcement for a
beam 350mm wide and 500mm overall depth of Fe415 steel.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a) Explain the stress bock diagram for RC beam indicating values.
(OR)
7(b) Draw the stress- strain diagram for concrete ,mild steel bars and cold deformed bars.
8(a) A Singly reinforced RC beam simply supported over an effective span of 4m,carries a udl of 10
KN/m over entire span. Design the beam using M20 grade concrete and Fe415
(OR)
8(b)Singly reinforced rectangular beam 300 X 600 mm effective depth carries a uniformlydistributed
load of 40 KN/m including its self-weight over simply supported span of 6 mand is reinforced
with 6 bars of 20 mm diameter of which 2 bars are curtailed near thesupport. Design the shear
reinforcement. Use M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 bars.
421
DAA V semester Mid Semester-II Examination
Corse Code:18AA-501C Duration:1 Hour

PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Distinguish between one way and two way slabs.
2) Write the codal provisions for maximum spacing of bars in slabs.
3) List the advantages of T beams.
4) State the conditions needed to design a beam as a T-Beam.
PART-B
5 (a) How do you check for shear and deflection in design of slabs?
(OR)
5 (b) Draw the cross section of a cantilever slab (sunshade) and show the reinforcement details.
6(a) What are the advantages of T-beams ? Give the equations for the effective flange width of
isolated T and L beams.
(OR)
6(b)Find effective flange width of a T beam with the following details. Effective span =5.5m, centre
to centre distance of adjacent panels = 4m, Breadth of web = 300mm,thickness of slab =
120mm.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7 a) Design a simply supported RCC slab for a verandah of clear dimensions 3 X 9 m. widthof
supports is 230mm. Superimposed load is 3 KN/Sq.m and weight of finishes is 1.0 KN/Sq.m. Use
M 25 concrete and HYSD bars of Fe 415 grade.
(OR)
7 b)Design a simply supported RC slab for a room of clear size 4 X 3.5 m. superimposedload is 2
KN/Sq.m and weight of finishes is 1.0 KN/Sq.m. The corners of slab are notheld down. Width of
supports is 230mm. Use M25 grade concrete and Fe 415 steel.
8 a) A T beam of effective flange width 750 mm, thickness of slab 120mm, width of rib250mm, and
effective depth 450mm is reinforced with 3500 Sq.mm of tension steel. Calculate the moment
of resistance of the section. M20 grade concrete are Fe415 bars are used.
(OR)
8 b)A T beam of effective flange width 800 mm, thickness of slab 90 mm, width of rib230mm, and
effective depth 400mm is reinforced with 5 numbers of 20mm diameterbars. Calculate the
moment of resistance of the section. M20 grade concrete are Fe250bars are used.
422
DAA V Semester
Corse Code: 18AA-501C Duration:2 Hours

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8 x 1= 8 Marks
17) Define characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
18) Write the code provisions for maximum spacing of bars in slabs.
19) How do you calculate minimum eccentricity in design of columns?
20) Define development length.
21) State the formula to calculate effective span in case of a continuous beam.
22) State the advantages of a continuous beam.
23) What are the specifications for lateral ties in a column?
24) State the formula for calculating minimum depth of foundation using Rankine’s formula
PART – B
Answer all questions . Each question carries three marks 4x 3 M = 12M

9(a)Calculate the limiting percentage of tension reinforcement if M20 concrete and Fe 415
steel are used.
(OR)
9(b) Draw the line diagram of a continuous beam and indicate salient points with bending
moment equations as per code at those locations.
10(a) Draw the cross section and stress diagrams for three cases of a T beam.
(OR)
10(b) List any six codal provisions for longitudinal reinforcement in design of columns.
11(a) Find effective flange width of a T beam with the following details. Effective span =
5.5m,centre to centre distance of adjacent panels = 4m, Breadth of web = 300mm, thickness
ofslab = 120mm.
(OR)
11(b) A continuous RCC rectangular beam of size 250 X 500mm overall is supported on300 X
300mm masonry columns at clear intervals of 3 m. Calculate the effective spans.
12(a) A short axially loaded column of size 300 X 350 mm is reinforced with 8 bars of 20mm
diameter Fe 415 grade steel. Concrete is M 30 grade. Calculate the load carrying capacityof
column.
(OR)
12(b) List and explain the steps for design of isolated square footing.
423
PART – C
Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks

4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) A singly reinforced rectangular section of size 230 X 450mm effective is reinforced with4
numbers of 16mm diameter bars in tension. Factored shear force at the section is 120
KN.State whether shear reinforcement is required or not. Concrete is M20 grade.
(OR)
13 (b) Calculate the maximum bending moment at support next to end support for a
continuousbeam as per IS 456-2000. Size of beam is 300X500mm overall, effective span =
4m, imposedload (not fixed) = 10KN/m, , imposed load (fixed) = 15KN/m excluding self
weight, effective cover = 40mm.
14 (a) A T beam of effective flange width 800 mm, thickness of slab 90 mm, width of rib 230mm
andeffective depth 400mm is reinforced with 5 numbers of 20mm diameter bars. Calculate
the moment of resistance of the section. M20 grade concrete are Fe250 bars are used.
(OR)
14 (b) Design a short Reinforced Concrete rectangular column with one side as 300mm to carry an
axial load of 2000 KN. Use M25 concrete and Fe 415 steel.
15 (a) Draw the detailing of reinforcement for a continuous slab with cranking of main bars.
(OR)
15 (b) Calculate the maximum shear force at end support for a continuous beam as per IS 456-
2000.Size of beam is 300X600mm overall, effective span = 4m, imposed load (not fixed) =
10KN/m,imposed load (fixed) = 12KN/m excluding self weight, effective cover = 40mm.
16 (a) Design a circular column of diameter 400 mm, with lateral ties. Unsupported length
ofcolumnis 3m, and is subjected to a working load if 1200 KN. The column is effectively held
inpositionat both ends but not restrained against rotation Use M25 concrete and Fe 415
steel.
(OR)
16 (b) A RC Column of size 300mm X 300mm carries a load of 750 KN. The safe bearing capacity
ofsoil is 200 KN/m2. Design an isolated square column footing of uniform thickness. Use M25
grade concrete and Fe 415 grade steel. Check forshear, development length and bearing
pressure are not required.
424
ENTREPRENEURSHIP & PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Course Title: Entrepreneurship & Project Course Code : 18AA-502C

Management
Semester: V Semester Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Hrs(L:T:P): 3:1:0 Credits : 3
Type of Course : Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Hours : 60
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of various stages of building construction, building
materials and estimation.
Course Outcomes
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Know the role of industry in economic development
CO2 : Understand the philosophy of organization structure of an industry
Outline the concept of entrepreneurship

CO3:
Differentiate and integrate production, planning and control; Role of materials and
CO4 :
importance of financial management
CO5 : Know the procedure for calling tenders and award of contracts
CO6 : Know the principles of quality assurance and Indian standards on quality systems
Time Schedule
Principles and Functions of

1 Management 10
Organization Structure
Role of Entrepreneurship 10
2
Production Management &
3 10
Network Diagrams
425
Material Management
4 Financial Management 10
Human resource Management
5 Tenders & contracts 10
Total Quality Management

6 International Organization for 10
Standardization ISO 9000
Total 60
Course Contents
Unit1: Principles and functions of Management

1.1 Introduction, Role of industry in economic development
1.2 Different types of ownership industries- Private, Joint, and Public sector
1.3 Form of ownership organization: Private - sole, partnership, Joint sector- company,
co-operative
1.4 Advantages and disadvantages of sole proprietorship, and partnership
1.5 Functions of Management
1.6 Principles of Management
1.7 Definition, types of organization- line or military organization, functional or staff
organization,
1.8 Advantages and disadvantages of line and functional organizations
1.9 Meaning of the term departmentalization
1.10 Organizational structure of an Architect’s office, an engineering department of
government– principle of specialization and principle of co ordination
Unit2: Role of Entrepreneurship

2.1 Introduction,
2.2 Entrepreneur definition and concept
2.3 Role of entrepreneurship,
2.4 Profile of an entrepreneur
2.5 Risks and rewards of an entrepreneur
2.6 Promotional agencies at State and Central level:
2.7 Central govt. agencies- NSIC,IDBI, IFCI, ICICI, IVC
2.8 State govt. agencies- TIDC, TSSIDC, TSIIC, TSTC,
2.9 Know about Telangana State Industrial policy- TS-IPASS; T-IDEA
Unit3: Productioon Management & Network diagrams
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Differentiate and integrate Production, planning and control
3.3 Scheduling- meaning of the term, methods.
3.4 Network diagrams- Critical path method,terminology
3.5 Formation and basic rules of network
3.6 Problems on CPM.
426
Unit4: Material Management
4.1Role of materials in industry

4.2 Materials management- definition,
4.3 Materials purchasing, handling, supply and storage
4.4 Register of suppliers and manufacturers
4.4 Need for mechanization- mechanical handling equipment types.
4.5 Optimum utilization of plant and equipment
4.6 Importance of financial management
4.7 Project financing- types of capital (long term and short term, PWD Procedure for
works)
4.8Definition ofhumanresourcemanagement
4.9 Elements of human resourcemanagement
Unit5: Tenders and Contracts
5.1 PWD Procedure for works

5.2 Classification of works
5.3 Contract, Tender, Tender notice,
5.4 Earnest money, Security Money
5.5 Different methods of carrying out of works-
5.6 Methods of carrying out works- daily labor, piece work agreement, contract system
5.7 Types of contracts- lumpsum, schedule contract or item rate contract
5.8 Know the documents attached to a contract document
Unit 6 : Total Quality Management )
6.1 Definition of TQM

6.2 Elements of TQM
6.3 Meaning and definition of quality, quality system, quality policy, quality
Management,
quality control and quality assurance.
6.4 Elements of quality systems
6.5 Comprehend the need of ISO.
6.6 Necessity of International standards.
6.7 Indian standards on quality systems, their equivalent ISO 9000 series and their
constituents. and construction.
6.8 Drawbacks of ISO 9000 standards
6.9 Beneficiaries of ISO standards
1.0 Principles and functions of Management

1.1 Know the role of industry in economic development.
1.2 Know the types of partnerships
1.3 Know the functions and principles of management
1.4 Understand the philosophy and types of organizational structure.
427
2.0 Role of Entrepreneurship
2.1 Outline the concept of entrepreneurship.

2.2 define the word entrepreneurship
2.3 Determine the role of entrepreneurship.
2.4 To know the promotional agencies at state and central level.
2.5 Describe the profile of an entrepreneur.
3.0 Production management and Network diagrams

3.1Differentiate and integrate production, planning and control
3.2Explain scheduling methods
3.3 Draw CPM networks
3.4 Identify the critical path method.
4.0 Material Management
4.1 Explain the role of materials in industry

4.2 Know the material handling methods.
4.3 know the different mechanical handling devices.
4.4 Explain the importance of financial management.
4.5 Explain the methods of project financing.
4.6 To understand the elements of human resource management.
.
5.0 Tenders and Contracts
5.1 To know the different types of works and the procedure to carry out the work
5.2 Necessity of calling for a tender.
5.3 know the types of contract and procedure to award a contract.
6.0 Total quality Management
6.1understand the concept of quality
6.2 Know the quality systems
6.3 know Indian standards on quality systems
6.4 List the beneficiaries of ISO 9000.
.
1. Quiz
2. Seminars
4. Guest lectures
SKILL UP GRADATION PROJECTS

1. Visit any nearby construction site & interact with the construction team regarding type
ofStructure & its organization structure.
2. Visit any contractor and interact about the present tendering process (e-tendering) and
award of contract.
3. Collection of tender notices published in newspapers for various items of projects (at least
5).Write salient features of them.
428
4. Prepare a planning schedule for the nearby on going construction activity with the help of
available open source project management software.
5. Visit any nearby ARCHITECT /PWD/TSHB office or any construction company, collect the
documents (BOQ, M B, Tender, SR,) related to the project and prepare report on it.
6. Collect quality management standards pertaining to ISO 9001, ISO 14001 & OHSAS 18001 &
prepare a report.
7. Collect the details required for getting a consultant license from corporation and prepare
areport on it
8. Collect safety procedures (Do’s and Dont’s) of each and every construction activities.
9. Collect or prepare the various stages of inspection and quality control for construction
Activities.
NOTE:
1. Guest lecturers to be arranged by inviting Architects from industry.
2. Students should select topics relevant to the subject approved by the concerned faculty,
individually or in a group of 3 to 5.
3. Students should mandatorily submit a written report and make a power point presentation on the
topic. The task should not be repeated among students.
4. Report will be evaluated by the faculty as per rubrics.
Recommended Books
1. Entrepreneurship by N. Sreenivaslulu
2. Total quality management by T.T.T.I. Hyderabad.
3 .Entrepreneurship by T.T.T.I. Chandigarh.
4. Construction management by N. Sreenivaslu
5. Management in construction and Industry- P.P Dharwadhker,
Oxford Book House Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
6. Construction Management and Accounts- V.N Vazirani& S.P Chandola,
Khanna Publishers.
7 .Construction planning and Management- U.K.Shrivastava,
GalgotiaPublications Pvt. Ltd, .New Delhi
8.Construction Management and Accounts - Harpal Singh,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
9.Estimating& Costing in Civil Engineering – BN Dutta
a. http://www.cranefieldacademy.com/short-courses/managing-entrepreneurial-project/
b. https://www.udemy.com/project-management-leadership-management-entrepreneurship/
429
c. https://pmglobalinstitute.com//index.php/training-courses/executive-education/101-project-
management-for-entrepreneurs
d. https://talentedge.in/entrepreneurship-courses/
e. https://www.acs.edu.au/courses/entrepreneurship-363.aspx
f. https://www.coursera.org/browse/business/leadership-and-management

Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Communication
Ethics
CO1 x x 15
CO2 x x x x 1289
CO3 x x 57
CO4 x x x x 5789
CO5 x x 28
CO6 x x x x 2 6 7 10
430
EXAMINATION PATTERN
20 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

40 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
C18-AA-501C
431
C18-AA-502C, ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Part A 4x1=4marks
L What are the different types of ownership industries?
13. Define organization

14. Name two entrepreneur promotional agencies at state level.
15. What is the meaning of entrepreneurship.
Part B 2x3=6marks

5.a) What is a joint sector company?

OR
b)Write briefly about ‘ sole proprietorship’
6.a) Define the term ‘entrepreneur’
OR
b) Brief ‘TS –IPASS’
Part C 2x5=10marks

7.a) Explain the’ functions of management’

OR
b) what are the’ principles of management’
8.a)Explain the concept of Entrepreneurship.

OR
b) What is the profile of an entrepreneur?
C18-AA-501 C
432
Part A 4x1=4marks
1. what are the methods of scheduling?
2. Define critical path method.
3. List out the stages of materials management.
4. Define management
Part B 2x3=6marks

5. a) Define scheduling
OR
b. what is a critical path method.
6.a) What is the need of mechanization.
OR
b) Write the elements of human resource management.
Part C 2x5=10marks

7a) Write the basic rules of network.

OR
7b. Findout the following for a project whose activities and their duration are given in the table
below:
Activity 1-2 1-3 1-4 3-4 2-5 3-5 4-5
Duration 10 7 11 9 12 9 12
(in days)
i. Prepare a network diagram

ii. Find critical path and project completion time.
433
iii. Prepare a time schedule and indicate total float.
8.a)Explain the role of materials in industry.

OR
b) Explain the methods of materials handling.
C18-AA-501C

Part A 8x1=8 marks

1.What are the different forms of ownership organizations?

2.Define critical path method
3.Define TQM
4.What are the different types of ownership industries?
5. What is the meaning of a contract.

6. Classify works.
7.What are the elements of TQM.
8. Define ‘quality system’
Part B 4x3=12 marks

9.a)what is a functional organization?

OR
b) What is the role of industry in economic development.
10. a) What are the advantages of scheduling?
OR
b) What are the elements of quality systems?
434
11. a) Write short notes on tender notice.
OR
b) who are the beneficiaries of ISO
12. a) Define quality assurance
OR
b) what is the necessity of international standards/
Part C 4x5=20 marks

13. a) Define organization .Draw the organizational structure of an Architect’s office.

OR
b) Detail out the PWD procedure for calling tenders and awarding a contract.
14. a) Differentiate production, planning and control.
OR
b).Explain the Indian standards on quality Systems, ISO standards and their constituents.
15. a) Differentiate earnest money and security money deposit.
OR
b) What are the documents to be attached to a contract document
16. a) What are the drawbacks of ISO 9000 series
OR
b) What are the benefits accrued to a company with ISO 9000
Course Title BUILDING SERVICES Course Code 18AA-503C
Semester V Course group Core
435
Teaching scheme in
Total Contact
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of building services and amenities.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Able to identify and describe different types of water supply systems and engineering
CO2 : To know the alternate methods of solar heating, passive solar systems
Able to draw plans and elevations of plumbing diagrams showing piping systems of waste
CO3 :
disposal by gravity drainage.
CO4 : Knowaboutsafety and security systems

Able to prepare an electrical plan showing data on the type and location of all switches, fixtures
CO5 :
and controls of a small residence.
CO6: To know the human comfort conditions and plan for air conditioning systems.
Time Schedule
Unit Unit Name Hour

No
1 Water supply engineering 16
2 Solar planning 4
3 Sanitary engineering 16
4 Safety and security systems 4
5 Electrical engineering 14
6 Air conditioning 6
436
Total 60
Course Contents
1 Water Supply Engineering
1.1 Sources of Water:
1.1.1 Main Source / Water Cycle.

1.1.2 Surface Sources
1.1.3 Sub-Surfaces Sources
1.1.4 Methods of water harvesting
1.1.5 Water Re-cycling methods.
1.2 Water supply requirements:
1.2.1 Quantity of water required per capita under Domestic use

1.2.2 Variation in quantity of water consumption due to various seasons
1.2.3 Fire demand
1.3 Quality of water and purification
1.3.1 Quality of water:

1.3.2 Source of water, impurities in surface and under ground waters
1.3.3 Purification of water
1.3.4 Plain sedimentation and sedimentation by coagulation, filtration, slow and

rapid sand filters, chlorination, taste and odour control, removal of hardness
1.4 Distribution of Water:

1.4.1 General requirements for the supply of wholesome water
1.4.2 Methods of distribution - Gravity system, Pumping system, Combined
system
1.4.3 Layouts for water distribution- Dead end layout, Grid iron layout. Radial lay
out, Circular lay out.
2. Solar Planning
2.1 Need and importance of passive solar system
2.2 Passive solar methods- direct –indirect gain method, orientation, integration
of structure with landform, room locations, overhang protection,
vegetation, building materials, etc.
2.3 Solar water heaters, solar heaters, solar cookers and solar panels
2.4 Introduction to green buildings
437
3. Sanitary Engineering:
3.1 Importance of Sanitation in view of public health.

3.2 Terminology
3.3 Types of refuses from a town or city.
3.4 Sewage disposal methods
i. Conservancy system
ii. Water carriage system
iii. Separate system
iv. Partially separate system
v. Combined system
3.5 Septic Tank Design, Construction, operation of Septic tank soak-pit (effluent
disposal from a septic tank
3.6 Draw a sanitary layout for an independent house
3.7 Rain water drainage from a house.
3.8 Sanitary Fixtures in Domestic building - WC(Indian, Orissa pan, European,
combination commode), Bidet,Wash basin, Sink, Bath tub, Urinal pans of
men & women.
3.9 Garbage disposal from a residence- composting methods.
4. Safety and Security systems

1.1 Definition and need of the subject
1.2 Fire protection systems
1.3 Different types of security systems-
5. Electrical engineering
5.1 House wiring systems
5.1.1 Introduction
5.1.2 Terminology-cable, conduit , circuit breaker, cut out, earthing system
5.1.3 Definition of wiring system, a sketch for a typical house wiring
5.1.4 Electrical energy distribution system- distribution board, loop in system
5.3 Lamps and lamp circuits
5.3.1 Types of lamps- incandescent, fluorescent, mercury, neon, sodium vapour

5.3.2 Energy saving lamps- CFL, LED lamps
5.4 Electrical layout
5.5.1 Electrical layout for a single bed room unit.
5.5.2 Electrical symbols
6. Air conditioning
438
6.1 Definition and need
6.2 Classification of air conditioners and types used for Domestic buildings.
SPECIFIC LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Water supply engineering

Understand the need and importance of Water Supply engineering
1.1 List and describe the quality and impurities present in various sources
of water (surface and underground)
1.2 Explain water harvesting and water recycling methods.
1.3 Know the per capita requirements & calculate the quantity of water
required per household.
1.4 List and explain the variations in per capita demand for different uses of
buildings
1.5 List the various impurities present in water and describe the bad effects
they cause on human health.
1.6 List and describe the principles underlying the operation of water treatment
units for drinking purpose
1.7 List and describe the various processes in purification of water
1.8 Explain and define the terminology in distribution of water
1.9 List and describe the various distribution methods and layouts
1.10 Draw a water cold and hot water supply layout for a domestic building.
2.0 Solar planning

2.1 To know passive solar energy concept in buildings
2.2 Passive solar design principles and list the passive solar methods
2.2 List and describe the solar energy utilities like solar water heaters,
solar heaters, solar cookers and solar panels.
2.3 Introduction to green buildings
3.0 Sanitary engineering

3.1 Define and describe the technical terminology associated with sanitary
engineering.
3.2 Describe the importance of sanitation in view of public health.
3.3 List and explain the various solid waste disposal methods.
3.4 List and describe the various liquid waste disposal methods
3.5 Draw a sanitary layout for a domestic building
3.6 know about roof drainage
3.7 know the method of composting
4.0 Safety and security systems
4.1 Describe the importance of security systems in present world.

4.2 Fire detection systems
439
4.2 List and describe the different security systems from alarm systems to
access control systems
Eg. Integrated room control, Chilled ceiling, room controller, Room
surveillance, Access control.
5.0 Electrical engineering
5.1 Explain with the importance of electrification in domestic buildings

5.2 Explain with sketches the types of wiring methods and applicability
5.3 Explain to draw various symbols for electrical fixtures as per NBC only.
6.0 Air Conditioning
6.1 Describe the need for air conditioning.

6.2 Explain the classification of Air conditioners
1. Quiz
2. Seminar
4. Site Visits
Skill Upgradation Projects:

1. To make a visit to a water supply plant and to study in detail about the treatment
process involved in supplying treated water. Students must also prepare a detail
reportalong with photographs
2. To visit a Building construction site to study on water supply and drainage system along
with photo documentation of various stages of works involved
3. To study on rural sanitation systems and to prepare report on functioning of leachpits
and septic tanks
4. To visit a public building to study on lighting systems employed and prepare a report on
lighting systems adopted by highlighting the purpose of each lighting system
Note:
1. The course will be delivered through lectures and power point presentations/Video
2. Teachers can encourage the students to take up case studies and prepare reports of the
same.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Public Health Engineering by Rangawala

2. Water supply & Sanitary Engineering by Duggal
3. Environmental Engineering by N. Srinivasulu
4. Water supply & Sanitary Engineering by G.S. Birdi
5. Building construction by B.C. Punnmia
6. Building construction by Bindra&Arrora.
7. Environmental Engineering by N.Ramachandraiah
440
Suggested E learning Resources.
E-lessons
1) https://www.cibse.org/building-services/what-is-building-services
2) http://www.understandconstruction.com/building-services.html
3) https://www.slideshare.net/SiddharthKhanna11/history-lecture-1
4) https://www.wsp.com/en-GL/services/mechanical-electrical-and-plumbing
5) https://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/.../fire-protection-system-design
6) https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fire_protection
7) https://www.siemens.be/cmc/upload/cms/docs/sbt/security_solutions_en.pdf
CO-PO Mapping
CO COURSE OUTCOME CL Linked PO
Able to identify and describe different types of

CO1 water supply systems and engineering U/A 1,2,5,6,7,10
To know the alternate methods of solar

CO2 heating, passive solar systems U/A 2,5,6,7,10
Able to draw plans and elevations of plumbing

CO3 diagrams showing piping systems of waste R/U/A 2,5,6,7,10
disposal by gravity drainage.
CO4 Know about safety and security systems U/A 1,4

Able to prepare an electrical plan showing data
CO5 on the type and location of all switches, fixtures R/U/A 1,2,4,5,6
and controls of a small residence.
To know the human comfort conditions and
CO6 plan for air conditioning systems. U/A 2,6
CO-PO MATRIX

Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Communication
Ethics
441
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO 10 Mapping POs
CO1 x x x x x x 1,2,5,6,7,10
CO2 x x x x x 2,5,6,7,10
CO3 x x x x x 2,5,6,7,10
CO4 x x 1,4
CO5 x x x x x 1,2,4,5,6
CO6 x x 2,6
EXAMINATION PATTERN
20 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

40 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
4
9(b) 13(b)
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
3
11(b) 15(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
442
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
C18-AA- 503 C
DAA-FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
18 AA-503 C BUILDING SERVICES
Time: 2 hours Total Marks: 40
PART – A 8x01=08marks
Instructions: (1) Answer ALL questions

each question carry 1 marks
1. Write about of Main Source of water?

2. What is anoverhead tank
3. What are the Characteristics of Quality of water?
4. What are methods of distribution of water ?
5. What is the solar energy ?
6. What are the security systems used in buildings?
7. What are the Systems of wiring in building
8. Define Air conditioner.
PART-B 4x3=12marks
Instructions: (1) Answer allquestions.

9. (A) What are Sources of surface water?
or
(B)What is Fire demand?
10. (A) What is Dead end layout?
or
(B) Describe the various processes in purification of water
443
11. (A) Write about passive solar methods
or
(B) Write about the different security systems?
12. (A) Write the process of Electrical energy distribution systems.
or
(B) Write about classification of Air conditioners
PART-C 4x5=20marks
Instructions: (1) Answer allquestions.

13. (A) What are Infiltration Galleries

or
(b) Write about Quantity of water required per capita under Domestic use
14. (a) Draw a water cold and hot water supply layout
or
(B) Describe the solar energy utilities
15. (A)Write about the roof drainage?
or
(B) Explain the Fire detection systems
16. (A) What are draw various symbols for electrical fixtures
or
(B) What are the need for air conditioning.?
Model Questions:
Part-A Each question carries one mark.
Define water harvesting?

2. List out any four methods solid waste management?
3. Define quality of water?
4. Define any one method of water distribution?
5. Explain the importance of sanitation?
6. Draw any four symbols of electrical fixtures.
7.. What are the classifications of air conditioners?
8 . Define air conditioning.
9.. List out any four electrical energy consuming devices.
10. List out any four types of air conditioning systems available in the market?
11.Define solar panel.
12. List out any four impurities in water.
13. Define security systems.
444
14. Define quality of water.
15. List out methods of water distribution methods.
16. Define the need of passive solar planning.
17. Define solid waste management.
18. What are electrical energy consuming devices?
19. Draw any four symbols of electrical fixtures.
20. Explain any one solar energy utility.
Part-B Each question carries three marks.
1. Explain in detail the water recycling methods?

2. Explain any two solid disposal methods?
3. Draw a sanitary layout for a domestic building.
4. Explain with sketches the types of wiring methods?
5. Explain the classification of air conditioning?
6. Explain the importance of electrification in domestic buildings.
7. Explain solid waste disposable methods.

8. Draw a sanitary layout for a domestic building.
9. Describe the importance of security systems in the present world.
10. Explain the various processes of water purification.

11. Describe solar cookers, solar heaters in detail.
12. Draw a conceptual layout of air conditioning
Part-C Each question carries five marks
1. List and explain various sewer appurtenances?

2. Explain and define the terminology of distribution of water?
3. Explain the various processes in purification of water?
4. Draw the conceptual layout of air conditioning.
5. Describe the electrical energy distribution systems.
6. Describe in detail the need of air conditioning.
7. Describe the electrical energy distribution systems.

8. Explain the concept of earth sheltered homes.
9. Explain various water distribution systems with diagrams.
10. Explain with sketches the types of wiring in any one method.
11. What is the need and importance of solar planning?
12. List and explain various sewer appurtenance
INTERNATIONAL ARCHITECTS
Course Title INTERNATIONAL ARCHITECTS Course Code 18AA-504C
Hrs (L:T:P)
445
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of materials and methods of construction.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Biography, philosophy and design theories of International Architects.
CO2 Important styles of architecture by the International Architects.

Time Schedule
CO3 ImportantUnit
residential
Unit No Name buildings designed by International
HourArchitects.
CO4 Important public and institutional buildings designed by International
Architects.
1 Frank Lloyd Right 10
2 Le-Corbusier 10
3 Walter Gropius 10
4 LudwigMies Vander Rohe 10
5 Alvar Aalto 10
COURSE 6 Ero - Saarinen 10
Total 60
CONTENTS
UNIT-I
FRANK LLYOD WRIGHT
446
1.1 Biography and philosophy .
1.2 Organic Architecture.
1.3 Falling water, Pennsylvania.
1.4 The Imperial Hotel
1.5 Solomon R Guggenheim museum.
1.6 The Robie House, Chicago, Illinois.
Unit 2:
LE-CORBUSIER
2.1Biography and philosophy .
2.2 Five Point theory of Architecture.
2.3 Modular theory.
2.4 Villa Savoy, France .
2.5 Unite D Habitation, Marseille, France.
2.6 Chandigarh planning.
Unit 3:
WALTER GROPIUS
3.1 Biography and Philosophy.

3.2 Curtain wall Concept.
3.3 The Fagus Factory.
3.4 Bauhaus School .
3.5 The Gropius house, Lincoin, Massachusetts.
3.6 The Harward Graduate Center , Cambridge, Mass.
Unit4:
LUDWING MIES VAN DER ROHE
4.1 Biographand philosophy .

4.2 Traditional to modernism concept.
4.3 Dr Edith Farns Worth HOUSE, Plano , Illinois.
4.5 Master plan of Illinois Institute of Technology.
Unit 5:
ALVAR AALTO
5.1 Biography and philosophy.

5.2 Classicism to Modernism concept.
5.3 Baker House.
5.4 Alvar Aalto studio , Helsinki.
Unit 6:
Ero – Sarrienen
6.1 Biography and philosophy .

6.2 Sarienen Gateway St. Louis.
6.3 Dullas International airport.
447
6.4 The Miller House, Columbus, Indiana.
1. FRANK LLOYD WRIGHT
Biography, philosophy and design theory.

Residential, public and Institutional projects.
2. LE-CORBUSIER
Biography, philosophy and design theory.
Residential, Public and Institutional projects.
3. WALTER GROPIUS
Biography,philosophy and design theory.

Residential, public and institutional buildings.
4. LUDWING MIES VAN DER ROHE

Biography ,philosphy and design theory.
Residential, public and Institutional buildings.
5. ALVAR AALTO
Biography,philosophy and design theory.
6 ERO-SARRIENEN
Biography ,phylosphy and design theories
SUGGESTED STUDENT ACTIVITIES

Separate sketch should be maintained and submitted
Plan and elevations of the following and view wherever it is required.
1.The Robiehouse
2. Imperial hotel
3.Falling water
4.Solomon R Guggenheim museum
5.Villa Savoy
6.United D Habitation
7.Chandigarh planning.
8. Fagus factory
9. Bauhaus School
10. Gropius house
11.Dr Edith Farns worth house.
448
12. Baker house
13. Alvar Aalto studio.
14. Sarienen’s gateway Arch in St. Louis
15. Dullas International airport, The Miller house.

1. Students should maintain a sketch book
2. Visit modern buildings and make an analysis of their architectural
Features, analyze and prepare a power point presentation on it.
Recommended Books:
1. Modern Architecture since 1900 by Curtis. J.R. Williams.
2. The Language of Post Modern Architecture by Jencks, Charles.
3. History of Architecture by Fergusen.

1) WWW.Digi.Libraries .com
2) WWW.all-art .com
3) WWW. International Architects.com
CO1 Biography , philosophy and design theories R/U 1,2,,3,4,5,6,

of International Architects 8,9,10
CO2 Important styles of Architecture of R/U/A 1,2,,3,4,5,6,
International Architects 8,9,10
CO3 Important residential buildings designed by R/U/A 1,2,,3,4,5,6,
International Architects. 8,9,10
CO4 Important public and Institutional buildings R/U/A 1,2,,3,4,5,6,
designed by International Architects. 8,9,10
CO /PO mapping
Engineering tools
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Communication
Ethics
workIndividual and team

knowledgeDiscipline
449
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
Note: Students should maintain a sketch book. Assignments and tests.

EXAMINATION PATTERN
20 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I 1,2 5(a) or 5 (b) 7(a) or 7(b)
2 UNIT II 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)
2 UNIT IV 3,4 6(a) or 6(b) 8(a) or 8(b)

40 Marks
S.No
A
1 UNIT I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 UNIT II
3 UNIT III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 UNIT IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 UNIT V 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 UNIT VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
Model Questions:
450
INTERNATIONAL ARCHITECTS
Part-A Each question carries one mark.
1. Write the biography of Walter Gropius.

2. Write the curtain wall concept.
3. Write the philosophy of Walter Gropius.
4. Write the biography of Mies van der Rohe.
5. Write the philosophy of Mies van der Rohe.
6. Write the biography of Frank Lloyd W right.
7.Write the phylosiphy of Frank Lloyd Wright.
8. Write the modular theory of Le-Corbusier.
9. Write the biography of Le- Corbusier.
10. Write the phylosiphy of Le- Corbusier.

11.List the works done by Frank Lloyd Wright.
12. Write the philosophy of Le-Corbusier.
13. Write the biography of Le- Corbusier.
14. Write the biography of Walter Gropius.
15. List the works of Alvar aalto.
16. Write biography of Ero-Sarrienen.
17. Write the biography of Alvar aalto.
18.Write the philosophy of Ero-Sarrienen.
19.List the works of Ero Sarrienen.
Part-B Each question carries three marks.
1. Write the organic Architecture of Frank Lloyd Wright.

2. Write five point theory of Lecorbusier.
3.Sketch Chandigrah planning.
4. Write the traditionalism to modernism concept.
5. Sketch the plan of the Fagus factory.
6. Write the philosophy of Walter Gropius.
7. Write the five point theory of Le- Corbusier.
8.Write the Curtain wall concept of Walter Gropius.
9.Write traditionalism to modernism concept of Mies vander Rohe.
10. Write classicism to modernism concept of Alvar aalto.

11. Sketch the plan of Baker house.
12. Write the philosophy of Alvar aalto.
Part-C Each question carries five marks.
1.Sketch plan and elevation of Villa Savoy, France.

2. Explain Falling water, Pennsylvania.
3.Explain the Imperial hotel atTokyo , Japan.
4. Explain Bahaus school, Dessau, Germany.
451
5. Explain the master plan of Illinois Institute of Technology.
6. Sketch and explain Gropius house .
7. Write the five point theory of Le- Corbusier.
8.Write the Curtain wall concept of Walter Gropius.
9.Write traditionalism to modernism concept of Mies vander Rohe.
10. Write classicism to modernism concept of Alvar aalto.

11. Sketch the plan of Baker house.
12. Write the philosophy of Alvar aalto.
INTERIOR DESIGN
Course Title INTERIOR DESIGN Course Code 18AA-505D
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture, studio work Total Contact 45
Hours
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of sketching, rendering and scaling of drawings.
Unit Unit name Hours

no.
1 Introduction & Anthropometry 3
Elements of Interior Design- Standard 9
Dimensions
2 3
Building Services in Interiors
Lighting Design in Interiors
3 Design of residential Interiors - 1 9
4 Design of residential Interiors - 2 6
Surface treatments-Construction 3
5
Techniques
12
6 Design of a Restaurant/ Hotel room design
Total 45
452
Note:
1. Interior design is one of the core subjects of architecture, hence all other subjects like
building materials and construction, specification and estimation have to be related to this
subject.
2. Studio should be a in formal and workshop oriented learning experience.
3. A portfolio of works has to be done by each student, which will be evaluated for internal
marks. Mark s should be based on student participation and regularity of work.
4. Atleast one problem should a time problem which should be a day long exercise.
Course contents:
1. Introduction and Anthropometry
1.1 Need of interior design, functional and aesthetic aspects, Anthropometric data of human
beings for various actions
2. Interior Elements– different types of materials, patterns and designs for interior elements:
Flooring-
Walls
Ceilings
Doors and windows
Furniture
Lighting
Standard Dimensions
Basic standards of circulation,- spaces- furniture involving human activities in

residential buildings, Public and institutional buildings.
Building Services in Interiors -
The sanitary layout and electrical layout
Lighting Design in Interiors
Importance of lighting in interiors,

Methods and types of lighting,
Lighting fixtures
Interior Accessories
3. Design of Residential Interiors -I

Draw an interior layout and sectional elevation of various rooms –
Drawing/living room – concept of open plan, furniture seating for 4-10 persons, TV
cabinet design,
453
Dining room- concept of place setting, different designs for dining tables for 4-8 persons,
crockery shelf design
kitchen – principles of kitchen planning guidelines, kitchen arrangements, work triangle,
space for storage, space for electrical appliances
4. Design of Residential Interiors -II

Bed room- master and children’s bed room, other spaces like dressing, wardrobe, tv
viewing, etc.
Study room
Toilet- fixtures, arrangements, detail of four walls, floor slopes, dado, etc.
5. Surface treatments-Construction Techniques
Floors- various types of floors, carpets,

Walls- paneling, coloring,
Ceilings- false ceiling patterns,
Lighting in ceilings
6. Design of a Restaurant/ Hotel room design

Restaurant design for a maximum capacity of 100 seating,
A hotel room – single/double/ suite
Suggested Learning Outcomings:
1. Introduction and Anthropometry

1.1 Know the need of interior design in Architecture- functional aspects and aesthetics
1.2 Understand the use of anthropometric data of an adult human being.
1.3 Understand the various behavioral actions of human beings and the space
requirements.
2. Interior Elements
2.1 List out the elements of Interior design

2.2 Represent the elements symbolically.
Standard Dimensions
2.3 List the various furniture pieces of different rooms of a residence
2.4 Draw the furniture pieces in plan and elevation with dimensions.
2.5 Know the principles of furniture arrangements
2.6 Know about circulation spaces and areas required for movement of people
2.7 Understand the spatial relationship, circulation patterns, and other preliminary
ideas to suit the client’s requirements.
Building Services in Interiors
2.8 To identify water supply and sanitary fixtures, the materials, know the layouts
Lighting Designing Interiors
2.9 To know the importance of lighting in interiors

2.10 To know the different methods of natural and artificial lighting.
2.11 To know the different types and arrangements oflighting in interiors.
454
Interior Accessories
3& 4 Residential Interiors

3.1 Draw an interior layout and sectional elevation of various rooms – drawing/living
room, dining room, bed room, kitchen and toilet.
3.2 Draw the furniture layout of the rooms.
3.3 Prepare an electrical layout of each of the rooms.
3.4 Design and draw the details- TV unit in drawing room, crockery shelf in dining room,
wardrobe in bedroom and storage cabinets in a kitchen.
4.1 Render the layout in color.
5. Surface treatments-Construction Techniques

5.1 Know the various materials used for surface treatment of interiors
5.2 Draw various patterns of design for flooring, ceiling and wall treatments.
5.3 Know the concept of color theory
5.4.1 Know the construction techniques for flooring, false ceiling and wall paneling
6. Design of a Restaurant/ Hotel room design
6.1 Know the interior layout of a star hotel room, with furniture and décor aspects
6.2 Prepare a layout of a restaurant for 100 persons seating
Student Activities :
Workshops on interior materials and construction techniques shall be conducted.
Skill upgradation
1. Visit residential buildings, study their interiorfeatures, analyze and prepare a power point
presentation on it.
Reference books:
1. Interior design: an introduction to Architectural interiors – Friedmann, Arnold and others,

Elsevier, New York
2. Basic Drafting for Interior designers – Miller. E. Willam, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York
3. Interior Architecture – Kurtich, John and Eakin, Garret, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York
CO /PO mapping
455
CO1 Know the principles and elements of R/U 1,2,5,6

interior design, human dimensions
and space planning
CO2 Know the importance of lighting R/U/A 1,2,3,6,7

and color in interiors
CO3 Importance of furniture and R/U/A 1,2,4,5,6,7

accessories.
CO4 To know the various surface R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7

treatments of flooring, ceiling and
walls
CO5 Workout design schemes of R/U/A 3,4,5,6,7,8,9,

different functional types –
residential, restaurant and hotel
room
CO6 Render the layout plans and U/A 1,2,9,10

elevations of interiors
COPO Mapping Matrix

Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
CO1 x x x x 1,2,5,6
CO2 x x x x x 1,2,3,6,7
456
CO3 x x x x x x 1,2,4,5,6,7
CO4 x x x x x 1,2,5,6,7
CO5 x x x x x x x 3,4,5,6,7,8,9,
CO6 x x x x 1,2,9,10
EXAMINATION PATTERN
MID SEM - I EXAM (Duration of exam : 1 -1/2Hour)

20 Marks
1 Plan-08 marks
UNIT I,
1 3 (12 Marks) Sec. Elevation-04
& II
2 marks
Total Questions 2 1
MID SEM - II EXAM (Duration of exam : 1-1/2 Hour)
1 Plan-08 marks
UNIT III
1 3 (12 Marks) Sec. Elevation-04
& IV 2
marks
Total Questions 2 1
457

40 Marks
UNIT I, Plan-10 marks
1 1 -
& II Sec.Elevation-06
marks
UNIT III - Detail - 04 marks
2 2,3 Schedule of
& IV
Openings- 04
UNIT V
3 & VI 4 5 (24 Marks)
Total Questions 4 1
For subjects 18AA- 505 (A) E
C18-AA-505C

C18-AA-505C – INTERIOR DESIGN
Time : 1-1/2 hour Max. Marks: 20

Part A 2x4=8marks
2. Each question carries four marks
1. What is anthropometry?
Sketch the following in plan and indicate the dimensions a) A 3-seat sofa b). A Dining table for
4 persons c). Kitchen sink
2. Write the importance of lighting in interiors.

What are the different methods of lighting.
458
Part B 12marks
Instructions: 1.Answer the following question .
3. A) Draw a king size bed in plan and elevation indicating all the dimensions. 4 marks
B) Explain with neat sketches the basic standards of circulation in a dining room.4 marks
C) List out the various elements of interiors. 4 marks
C18-AA-505C

BOARD DIPLOMA MID SEM -II EXAMINATION (C-18)
C18-AA-505C – INTERIOR DESIGN
Time : 1-1/2 hour Max. Marks: 20

Part A 2x4=8marks
2. Each question carries four marks
1.Draw a wardrobe design for a 3.0 X 0.6 X 2.0m shelf of a Master bedroom.
2. Sketch and explain the concept of place setting.
Draw two different types of dining tables for 6 persons and indicate the dimennsions.
Part B 12marks
Instructions: 1.Answer the following question.
4. The Kitchen of a residence is measuring 4.0 X 4.5m. Design an open plan kitchen with the
following requirements:
a) A kitchen platform
b) Indicate the work triangle
c) Base and overhead cabinets
d) Space for appliances
e) A door leading to wash area
f) A breakfast table
g) Windows as required.
Drawings required: Scale 1:50
Layout Plan- 08 marks

459
Sectional .Elevation- 04 marks
Render the drawings In color pencils.
C18-AA-505C

C18-AA-505D – INTERIOR DESIGN

Part A 2x4=8marks
Instructions: i) Answer all questions .
i) Each question carries four marks
1. List out the various interior elements.
Sketch and indicate the dimensions of any one furniture piece of a bedroom in plan
2. Draw the furniture layout of a 6- seat dining room in plan. Indicate the dimensions of
furniture and circulation areas.
3. Draw a design for a TV unit in elevation. Indicate the dimensions.
4. List out the various materials for surface treatment for floors and walls
Part B 24marks
Instructions: 1.Answer the following question .
5. A restaurant
The Telangana Tourism development corporation wants to develop high way restaurants
with the following requirements. Draw alayout plan and a sectional elevation to a scale of
( as per the size and scale of the problem)
1. A hall for seating 80 persons -120 sq.m
2. A cash counter - 4.5 sq.m.
3. A kitchen - 25 sq.m
4, Storage for the kitchen - 09 sq.m
5. Wash Area for the kitchen - 4.5 sq.m
6 Wash and toilets for Ladies and gents - As required
460
(separately)
7. Corridor spaces as required by the design
Drawings required: Scale 1:50
Layout Plan with furniture details 10 marks

Sectional .Elevation- 06 marks
Kitchen details Rendered In color pencils . 04 marks.
Schedule of Openings- 04 marks
DESIGN PRACTICE LAB
Course Title DESIGN PRACTICE LAB Course Code 18AA-506P

Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Practice Total Contact 45
Hours
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. No Major Topics No. of

periods
1. Project outline & concept drawings 15
2. Presentation drawings 21
3 Municipal drawings& brochure 09
Total 45
461
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be ableto
1. Design a project on Residential flats each floor consisting of 3 or 4 flats ( two or three bed
room flats).
Number of floors is four, ground floor used for parking only.
An appropriate size of the site to suit the project requirements should be given by the
teacher.
2. Prepare and present the relevant drawings using AutoCAD or any relevant software
comprising Residential Apartments.
3. Prepare municipal drawings
4. Workout a brochure
462
5. Learning Outcomes:
1. Project outline & conceptdrawings for a given site( Max. site area 2000 sq.m )
2. Presentation drawings for the given project
3. Municipal drawings for approval & Brochure
I.Project outline and concept drawings, the following details are to be worked out and should be
submitted in the form of a report.
i. Fix the set-backs as per the bye-laws.

ii. Calculate FAR / plot coverage/ width of driveways and parking
requirements.
iii. Derive the total floor areas/ area of each flat/ number of floors/ total built
up area.
iv. Decide the number of flats as per the required number of single/ double/
triple bedroom flats.
v. Workout Spaces and Area requirement chart
vi. Specify the area of parking and other areas for transformers-generators-
maintenance office-watchman’s quarter- pump house etc.
vii. Play areas-landscaping
viii. Specifications
ix. Specify the municipal fee particulars.
x. Prepare conceptual drawings.
II.Presentation drawings, The following drawingsshouldbe submitted in A3 size portfolio
i. Typical floor plan with furniture lay-out

ii. Stilt floor plan showing parking details
iii. Site plan with landscape elements.
iv. Terrace floor plan
v. Location plan
vi. Specifications
vii. Perspective view (3 dimensional view) using any one rendering soft ware.
III. Municipal drawings and brochure:

i. A drawing layout is to be prepared in the format required for submission to municipal
sanction for approval purpose.
ii. A Brochure either twofold or three fold is to be prepared for showing the client at the
construction site.
463
Course Title ADVANCED CAD LAB PRACTICE- Course Code 18AA-507P
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of Course Lecture +Practice Total Contact 45
Hours
ADVANCED CAD LAB PRACTICE
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic English at Secondary school level and concept of
3D visualization and AutoCAD
Unit Unit Name Hour Questions to be Assessment procedure

No set for SEE
Practical
1 Sketch up Toolbars 9 1. Actual drawing in a printout

is evaluated for quality of
2 3D Modeling 9 presentation- 30 marks
2. Viva to assess the correct
3 Editing of materials 6 use of commands while
1 executing the drawing- 10
4 Interior spaces 6 marks
3. Internal assessment is based
5 Sections 6 on the portfolio of works to
be submitted at the end of
Detailing, Lighting and 9 EACH MID semester.
6
Rendering 4. DURATION OF MID EXAM:
1-1/2 HOURS
5. DURATION OF END EXAM : 3
Total 45 1
HOURS
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Study, apply and practice 3d software to analyze and investigate shape, form.
CO2 : Express and communicate design solutions by exploring and practice of intensive
CO3 : study of software and presentation through progressive scaling of a particular design
CO4 : project (different viewpoints, 3D modeling and rendering).
Course Contents
464
Unit 1: Toolbars Duration: (L: T: )
Camera controls
Pan , Zoom ,orbit ,Basic tools ,Rectangle ,Circle ,Select ,pencil ,push /pull ,Groups ,Component ,Move
,Rotate , Copy ,Array , Polar array , Offset ,Paint bucket
Unit 2: Modelling Duration: (L: T: )

Walls + floor, Windows, Doors, Frames, tables, Openings, Creating materials
Unit 3: Editing of materials Duration: (L: T: )

Scale, Rotate, Edit, Modeling practice, Chair, Shelves, Accessories, Warehouse, Download models,
Edit models, Groups vs components, Scale
Unit4: Interior spaces Duration: (L: T: )

Project 1: Interior Space –Bedroom
Room floor 20’X,20’ ,
Walls 10’height, 9” thick
doorways 7’height ,3’width,
Window two numbers 5’ height,4width or one 5’height, 8’width
Object placement
Locking to axis, Reference points
Unit 5: Sections Duration: 08 Hours (L: T: )

Sections – ,Elevations ,Floor plans Layouts , Preparing views ,Sending to layouts,Positioning ,Sizing ,
Moving, Copy, Using scene, Scale, Dimensions, Updating model reference, Styles in layout, Title
block , Basic renders
Structures phase
Floor
Walls / store front
Doorways
Window frames
Stairs
Columns
Rails
Unit 6: Detailing, Lighting and Rendering Duration: 12 Hours (L: T:

Detailing phase, Tables, Counters, Rugs, Picture frames / posters, Light fixtures, Doors, Windows,
Planters , Accessories
Lighting phase: Lights and settings, Lighting with shades, Directional lights, Ambient lights , General
lights ,Accent lights , Test renders ,
Render phase, Fixing the lighting, Editing materials, VRay material effects, Camera positioning,
Render settings
Presentation phase , Views , Views in SketchUP for use in Layouts , Set up layout , Image hierarchy ,
scale , Inserting renderings , Dimensions and labels , Title block , Presentation Tips
Recommneded Books:
1. Sketchup for dummies
465
2. The Sketchup Workflow for Architecture by Michael Brightman
1.0 Toolbars
1.1 Use Camera controls
1.2 Use the toolbars of Pan , Zoom ,orbit ,Basic tools ,Rectangle ,Circle ,Select
,pencil ,push /pull ,Groups ,Component ,Move ,Rotate , Copy ,Array , Polar
array , Offset ,Paint bucket
2.0 3D Modeling
2.1 Create Walls + floor, Windows, Doors, Frames, tables, Openings, Creating
materials
3.0 Editing of materials
3.1 Use the commands Scale, Rotate, Edit, Modeling practice, Chair, Shelves,
Accessories, Warehouse, Download models, Edit models, Groups vs
components, Scale
4.0 Interior spaces

4.1 Project 1: Interior Space –Bedroom
Room floor 20’X,20’ ,
Walls 10’height, 9” thick
doorways 7’height ,3’width,
Window two numbers 5’ height,4width or one 5’height, 8’width
Object placement
Locking to axis, Reference points
5.0 Sections
5.1 Sections – ,Elevations ,Floor plans Layouts , Preparing views ,Sending to layouts,
Positioning ,Sizing , Moving, Copy, Using scene, Scale, Dimensions, Updating
model reference, Styles in layout, Title block , Basic renders
Structures phase
5.2 Floor
5.3 Walls / store front
5.4 Doorways
5.5 Window frames
5.6 Stairs
5.7 Columns
5.8 Rails
6.0 Detailing, Lighting and Rendering

6.1 Detailing phase, Tables, Counters, Rugs, Picture frames / posters, Light fixtures,
Doors, Windows, Planters , Accessories
6.2 Lighting phase: Lights and settings, Lighting with shades, Directional lights,
Ambient lights , General lights ,Accent lights , Test renders ,
6.3 Render phase, Fixing the lighting, Editing materials, VRay material effects,
Camera positioning, Render settings
466
6.4 Presentation phase , Views , Views in SketchUP for use in Layouts , Set up layout
, Image hierarchy , scale , Inserting renderings , Dimensions and labels , Title
block , Presentation Tips

1. Search online for materials
2. Create new material
Graded exercises:
1. Basic furniture –
a) Rectangular table.
b) Three seater sofa
c) Dining table with chairs.
d) Cabinet with doors and drawers.
2. Building modelling
a) Exterior view of a residence, restaurant or any public building.
b) Living and dining room interior view showing furniture.
c) Kitchen interior view showing work centers, storage cabinets etc.
d) Bed room interior view showing cot, wardrobe and dressing unit .
e) Toilet interior views.
1. Youtube video “Getting started with Sketchup”

2. http://designerhacks.com/sketchup-tutorials/
3. http://www.sketchuptutorials.net/2011/10/21/sketchup-basics-tutorial-part-2-creating-
your-firstbuilding/
4. http://designstudentsavvy.com/sketchup-floor-plan-tutorial/
5. http://www.sketchupartists.org/tutorials/sketchup-and-thea-render/
6. https://www.thearender.com/site/index.php/resources/tutorials/sketchup.html
7. http://www.suplugins.com/download/SUPodiumV2PLUS_Guide.pdf
8. Importing and exporting models – 3d Warehouse and CAD.
467
Assignments:
1. Draw the following figure in SketchUP using relevant dimensions
2.Draw the following figure using SketchUP using relevant dimensions.

468
CO1 Study, apply and practice 3d R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10

software to analyze and investigate
shape, form.
CO2 Express and communicate design R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
solutions by exploring and practice
of intensive
study of software and presentation
through progressive scaling of a
particular design
project (different viewpoints, 3D
modeling and rendering).
CO3 study of software and presentation R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
through progressive scaling of a
particular design
CO4 project (different viewpoints, 3D R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
modeling and rendering).
CO /PO mapping
Engineering tools

Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Communication
CO1 x x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
CO2 x x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
CO3 x x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
CO4 x x x x x x x x x 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
Note: A lab manual is to be prepared for the reference of the student. Exam questions should be
given from the manual.
469
WORKING DRAWINGS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title WORKING DRAWINGS LAB PRACTICE Course Code 18AA-508P

Teaching scheme in 1:0:2
Credits 1.5
Hrs (L:T:P)
Lecture +Practice Total Contact
Type of Course 45
Hours
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl.no Major Topics Periods
1. Introduction 03
2 Presentation Drawings 09
3. Working drawings for structural elements. 3
4 Working drawings for architectural elements 12
5. Working drawings for services 06
6. Working drawings for site plan 03
7 Working drawings for detailing 09
viva
Total 45
Note:
1. The project drawings should be prepared in AutoCAD and the report should be prepared
in MS Word.
2. The final presentation should have a A3 size portfolio and a A4 size black bound report.
3. Drawings shall be prepared for a two bed room residence.
Objectives & course contents
Upon the completion of the subject student shall be ableto draw
Note: Consider Earthquake Resistant Structural design detailing wherever applicable

470
1.0 Introduction
1.1 To understand importance and requirements of working drawings for
various stages of construction
2.0 Presentation drawings

2.1 Site plan
2.2 Floor Plans with furniture
2.3 Elevations
2.4 Sections
2.5 Schedule of openings
2.6 Door & window details
2.7 Perspective views of interior and exterior.
2.8 Kitchen/ toilet details, if any.
3.0 Working drawings for structural elements.

3.1 Centre line plan
3.2 Footing or foundation plan
3.3 Any one slab detail
3.4 staircase detail
.Working drawings for architectural elements

4.1 Floor plans (superstructure plans)
4.2 Terrace floor plan (for roof structures & drainage)
4.3 Elevations
4.4 Sections
4.5 Staircase details
5.0 Working drawings for services

5.1 Water supply layout.
5.2 Sanitary layout.
5.3 Electrical layout
6.0 Working drawings for site plan
6.1 Site plan indicating various site elements like parking, landscape, water supply layout,
sanitary & electrical layouts, etc.
7.0 Working drawings for detailing

7.1 Door & window details
7.2 Kitchen 4 walls detailing
7.3 Toilets 4 walls detailing
REFERENCES
1) Building construction - MC Kay I, II, III and IV Volumes.
2) Building Construction - Barry – Volumes I, II, III and IV
3) Building Construction - S.C. Rangwala
471
4) Building Construction - N.R.R. Moorthy
5) Building Construction - Bindra&Arora.
6) National Building code - ISI Publication.
7) Time saver standards
8) Neufurt’s Architect’s Data
9) IS code for Earthquake resistant structural detailing .
Programming in ‘C’ lab Practice
Course Title : Programming in ‘C’ lab Practice Course Code 18AA-509P

Semester V Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in 1:0:2 Credits 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours : 45Pds
Pre requisites
Knowledge of Computer Operation.
Course outcomes
Course Outcome
CO1 Write programs using input/output statements, variables and operators
CO2 Demonstrate decision making, branching and loop statements
CO3 Construct programs on arrays and strings
CO4 Develop programs using functions, structures and unions
List of Programmes:
1. Input/output statements, variables and operators
1. Exercise on structure of C program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
472
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
2. Decision making, branching and loop statements

1. Exercise on simple if statement
2. Exercise on if..else statement
3. Exercise on else..if ladder statement
4. Exercise on switch statement
5. Exercise on conditional operator
6. Exercise on while statement
7. Exercise on for statement
8. Exercise on do...while statement
3. Arrays and strings
1. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
2. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
3. Exercise on strings
4. Functions, Structures and Unions
1. Exercise on user-defined function
2. Exercise on recursion
3. Exercise on structure
4. Exercise on array of structures
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Let Us C -- YeshwanthKanetkar BPB Publications
2. Programming in ANSI C -- E. Balaguruswamy Tata McGrawHill
3. C The complete Reference -- Schildt Tata McGraw Hill
E-learning links
1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/
2. http://www.indiabix.com/online-test/c-
programming Test/
3. https://fresh2refresh.com/c-programming/
473
4. http://www.learn-c.org/
5. https://www.javatpoint.com/c-programming-
language-tutorial
6. https://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-
tutorial.html
Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO periods
CO1 Write programs using input/output statements, R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9 5

variables and operators ,10
CO2 Demonstrate decision making, branching and loop R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9 15

statements ,10
CO3 Construct programs on arrays and strings R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9 10
,10
CO4 Develop programs using functions, structures and U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9 15
unions ,10
CO5 Write programs using input/output statements, R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9 5
variables and operators ,10
Total Sessions 45
PROJECT WORK
474
Course Title Major Project Course Code 18 AA -510P
Semester V Course group core

Teaching Scheme in
1:0:2 Credit 09
Hrs (L:T:P)
Type of course Project Total Contact Hours 210
TIME SCHEDULE & ASSESSMENT
Sl. No Major Topics No. of

periods
1. Selection of Topic 06
2. Data collection 15
3. Case study 18
4. Case study Analysis & Proposed project 15
requirements
5. Site selection 12
6. Schematic proposals 30
7 Presentation drawings 30
8 Working drawings 30
9. Report 12
10. Model 30
11 Log book -
Review-1 Viva/Seminar 06
Review-2 Viva/Seminar 06
Final Viva/Seminar -
Total: 210
Note:
1. The project drawings should be prepared in AutoCAD and the report should be
prepared in MS Word.
2. The final presentation should have a A3 size portfolio and a A4 size black bound report.
OBEJECTIVES
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be ableto select a topic for study, make
literature study, visit a case study site, building and get acquainted with the spaces,
475
analyze, prepare project requirements, and propose concept based proposals and acquire
confidence to handle projects independently.
COURSE CONTENT
1) Selection of Topic
The topic should be selected from the array of topics available in design and submit
a report containing aim, objectives, scope and limitations. The topic should be of
sufficient scope to suit the diploma level education.
2) Data Collection
Data is to be collected from relevant standard books and case studies done earlier
and prepare a report.
3) Case study
Each group of students is required to select a case study building, visit the site, get
acquainted with the spaces and study the same with respect to the data already
collected and prepare measured drawings and report. Site and building photographs
may also be taken.
4) Case study Analysis& Proposed project requirements
Each group of students should analyze the case study at three levels i.e. at site level,
building level and unit level by considering the data collected from books and data
from case study and prepare an analytic report.
5) Site selection
Students should select an appropriate site to suit the proposed project

requirements.
6) Schematic Proposals
Prepare two schematic proposals to be approved by the concerned faculty member,
476
7) Presentation Drawings
i) Site plan
ii) Floor Plans with furniture
iii) Elevations
iv) Sections
v) Schedule of openings
vi) Door & window details
vii) Perspective views of interior and exterior.
viii) Kitchen/ toilet details, if any.
8) Working Drawings
Structural working drawings
i) Center line plan

ii) Footing or foundation plan
iii) Any one slab detail
iv) Staircase detail
Architectural working drawings
i) Site plan
ii) Floor plans (superstructure plans)
iii) Terrace floor plan (for roof structures & drainage)
iv) Elevations
v) Sections
vi) Water Supply,
vii) Sanitary layout
viii) Electrical layout
9) Report
Each group of students has to prepare a combined report in A4 size on the entire
project work including contents 1 to 8.
10) Model
A block model is to be prepared to a suitable scale.

11) Log Book
477
Web links for presentation techniques
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RZVXiBvTu08/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yEymIyLbiAI/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yEymIyLbiAI/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ml73GJKAYMk/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8fKUN7g-WRQ/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BjyGHjAwuP0/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AVGGD4xP8Qc/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YeKPt1oVjVE
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vmHoGicPQQQ
Skill Upgradation

2. Market survey
478
3. Material survey
4. Data collection
5. Site visits
9. Seminars
10. Presentations
12. Slip tests
13. Surprise tests
14. Time Problems
15. Desktop surveys
16. Model making
17. 3D Renderings
18. Walk through
Extra Curricular:
2. Debates
3. Elocution
4. Recitation
5. Dumb Charades
VI SEMESTER
479
18AA- 601 P INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Max Min.
S.NO Subject Duration Assessment
Marks Marks
1.First 150
Assessment
300
(at the end of
3rd month)
2. Second 150
Industrial 6 Months Assessment
1 300
Training (at the end
of 6th month)
3. Log Book 100 200
4.
100
Portfolio/Report
5. Seminar/viva 200
TOTAL MARKS 1000 500
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

480
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme
Sl Criteria Marks Time

No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300

Total
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be
averaged
481

Preamble: C-18 - Curriculum For Diploma Programmes in Telangana

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preamble: C-18 - Curriculum For Diploma Programmes in Telangana

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preamble: C-18 - Curriculum For Diploma Programmes in Telangana

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-18 - CURRICULUM

FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA

1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:

THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based

2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

E 0 Rest of the Candidates

a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Industrial Training (VI Semester)

Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30

4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50

5 Comprehension and observation 10 10

7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

10 General conduct during the period 40 40

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)

Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

before commencement of 3rd semester.

(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6 th (Industrial Training) semester

i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

DIPLOMA IN ARCHITECTURAL ASSISTANTSHIP

TELANGANA STATE, HYDERABAD

S. No. CONTENTS PAGE NO.

II Rules & Regulations

23 18AA-301F Applied Engineering Mathematics

24 18AA-302C Engineering Mechanics (common with Civil)

25 18AA-303C Building Specifications

45 18AA-501C Reinforced Concrete Structures (common with Civil)

55 18AA-601 Industrial Training

DIPLOMA IN ARCHITECTURAL ASSISTANTSHIP, (C -18)

` Cours Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

1 18AA- Basic English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

3 18AA- Basic Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

9 18AA- Basic Science Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

1 18AA- Advanced 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

3 18AA- Applied Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

6 18AA- Advanced 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

9 18AA- Applied science lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics

Instruction Total Min

4 18 AA- HISTORY OF INDIAN 2.4 1.6 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 15 100 35

8 18 AA- MODEL MAKING LAB